NORD BIM1000 General Instructions 200903

High Performance
AC Vector Drives
B1000
Operating & Instruction Manuals
For Gear Units
Intelligent Drivesystems
B1000 DRIVESYSTEMS
Product
Overview
We can match our NORDAC AC vector drives with our Inverter/Vector Duty Motors and
UNICASE Speed Reducers to provide a total AC Motor Drive solution from one trusted source.
HIGH PERFORMANCE
MOTORS & BRAKEMOTORS
HELICAL IN-LINE
- Foot or Flange Mount
- Torque up to 205,000 lb-in
- Gear ratios 1.82:1 to over 300,000:1
NORDBLOC
HELICAL IN-LINE
- Gear ratios 1.88:1 to over 370:1
PARALLEL HELICAL CLINCHER
- Shaft, Flange or Foot Mount
RIGHT ANGLE
HELICAL-BEVEL 2-STAGE
- Foot, Flange or Shaft Mount
- Gear ratios 4.1:1 to 72:1
RIGHT ANGLE HELICAL-BEVEL
RIGHT ANGLE HELICAL-WORM
MINICASE
RIGHT ANGLE WORM

- Gear ratios 5:1 to 500:1
UNICASE
SPEED REDUCERS
NORDAC
AC VECTOR DRIVES
INVERTER/VECTOR DUTY
- Standard or Energy Efficient
- Integral, NEMA or Metric IEC
- 1/6 to 250 hp
TRIO SK300E
- Motor or remote mounted
- IP55 washdown
- 380-460V, 3-phase, to 5hp
- 200-240V, 3-phase, to 3hp
SK500/520/530E
- Compact, high performance
- 380-480V, 3-phase, to 10hp
- 200-240V, 3-phase, to 5hp
- 200-240V, 1-phase, to 3hp
- 110-120V, 1-phase, to 1.5hp
SK700E
- Flexible high performance
- 380-460V, 3-phase, to 200hp
FLEXBLOC

WORM
- Modular bolt-on options
- Gear ratios 5:1 to 3,000:1
1
0
0
2
0
0
1
0
4
/
0
9
0
9
NORD Gear Corporation
National Customer Service Toll-Free: 888.314.6673
[email protected]
WEST
Corona, CA (Los Angeles)
Phone: 608.849.0190
MIDWEST
Waunakee, WI (Madison)
Phone: 608.849.7300
EAST
Charlotte, NC
Phone: 608.849.0140
CANADA
Brampton, ON (Toronto)
Phone: 905.796.3606
NORD Gear Limited
Toll-Free in Canada: 800.668.4378
[email protected] www.nord.com
DRIVESYSTEMS
CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.automatedpt.com Email: [email protected]
DRIVESYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETAIN FOR FUTURE USE
TITLE Document Number & Hyperlink
General Instructions U10000
Safety Notes U10020
Storage & Commissioning U10040
Unit Installation U10060
Solid Shaft Connections U10250
Keyed Hollow Shaft U10270
Shaft Fixing Kit U10280
Hollow Shaft With Shrink Disc U10290
NORD GRIPMAXX U10310
Reducer Mounting Footed & Flange Mount Gear Units U10500
Clincher Shaft-Mount With Rubber Buffers U10580
Right Angle Shaft-Mount with Torque Arm (D) U10600
90.1 Helical-Bevel Shaft-Mount with Bottom Mount Torque Arm (K) U10620
Helical & Bevel Reducer Lubrication U10750
VL2 & VL3 Extended Bearing Lubrication U10760
Helical Worm Reducer Lubrication U10770
Minicase Worm Reducer Lubrication U10790
FLEXBLOC Worm Reducer Lubrication U10810
Expansion Chambers Installation & Maintenance Manual U10830
Helical & Bevel Reducer Lubrication Types U11000
Helical Worm Reducer Lubrication Types U11020
Minicase Worm Reducer Lubrication Types U11040
FLEXBLOC Worm Reducer Lubrication Types U11060
Standard In-Line Footed Oil Fill Quantities U11500
Standard In-Line Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U11600
Helical In-Line Footed Oil Fill Quantities U11700
Helical In-Line Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U11800
CLINCHER Oil Fill Quantities U11900
90.1 Helical-Bevel Footed Oil Fill Quantities U12000
90.1 Helical-Bevel Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U12100
92 Series Helical-Bevel Footed Oil Fill Quantities U12200
92 Series Helical-Bevel Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U12300
Helical-Worm Footed Oil Fill Quantities U12400
Helical-Worm Solid Shaft/Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U12500
Helical-Worm Hollow Shaft Oil Fill Quantities U12600
Nordbloc Footed Oil Fill Quantities U12700
Nordbloc Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U12800
Nordbloc.1 Footed Oil Fill Quantities U12900
Nordbloc.1 Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U13000
Minicase Footed Oil Fill Quantities U13100
Minicase Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U13200
WWW.NORD.COM
www.nord.com/docs 02.20.12
Toll Free in the United States: 888.314.6673
NORD Gear Limited
Toll Free in Canada: 800.668.4378
TITLE Document Number & Hyperlink
FLEXBLOC Oil Fill Quantities U13300
Standard In-Line Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14000
Helical In-Line Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14100
CLINCHER Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14200
92 Series Helical-Bevel Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14300
90.1 Helical-Bevel Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14400
Helical-Worm Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14500
Nordbloc Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14600
Nordbloc.1 Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14700
FLEXBLOC Vent Locations U14800
Standard In-Line Parts List Drawings U15000
Helical In-Line Parts List Drawings U15100
CLINCHER Parts List Drawings U15200
CLINCHER VL2 & VL3 Parts List Drawings U15210
90.1 Helical-Bevel Parts List Drawings U15300
90.1 Helical-Bevel VL2 & VL3 Parts List Drawings U15310
92 Series Helical-Bevel Parts List Drawings U15400
Helical-Worm Parts List Drawings U15500
Nordbloc Parts List Drawings U15600
Troubleshooting U19000
Motors - AC Induction, Single and Polyphase U30000
Motor Brakes Installation & Maintenance U35000
Fast Acting Brake Rectiers [GPE, GPU & PMG] U35100
Current Sensing Brake Relay [IR] Installation & Maintenance U35200
NEMA/IEC Inputs Adapters & Their Couplings U45100
Automatic Lubricator U45250
Solid Input Shaft [W] U45300
Motor Mount Platform [MK] U45400
Sugar Scoop U45500
NSD tuph Touch-Up Kit U65100
Terms & Conditions of Sale Terms
DRIVESYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETAIN FOR FUTURE USE WWW.NORD.COM
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
BIM TO USER MANUAL
CROSS REFERENCE
WWW.NORD.COM
NORD Gear Limited
Old BIM TITLE
(No Longer Available)
New User Manual
Document Numbers & Hyperlinks
BIM 1010 - Unicase Helical In-Line Gearboxes
Installation & Maintenance Instructions
U10000 - General Instructions
U10020 - Safety Notes
U10040 - Storage & Commissioning
U10060 - Unit Installation
U10250 - Solid Shaft Connections
U10500 - Reducer Mounting Footed & Flange Mount Gear Units
U10750 - Helical & Bevel Reducer Lubrication
U11000 - Helical & Bevel Reducer Lubrication Types
U11700 - Helical In-Line Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U11800 - Helical In-Line Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U14100 - Helical In-Line Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U15100 - Helical In-Line Parts Lists Drawings
BIM 1011 - NORDBLOC Helical Gearboxes
U12700 - Nordbloc Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U12800 - Nordbloc Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U14600 - Nordbloc Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U15600 - Nordbloc Parts Lists Drawings
BIM 1012 - Standard Helical In-Line Gearboxes
U11500 - Standard In-Line Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U11600 - Standard In-Line Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U14000 - Standard In-Line Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U15000 - Standard In-Line Parts Lists Drawings
BIM 1013 - NORDBLOC.1 Helical Gearboxes
U12900 - Nordbloc.1 Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U13000 - Nordbloc.1 Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U14700 - Nordbloc.1 Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
BIM 1020 - Unicase Shaft Mount Gearboxes
U10580 - CLINCHER w/ Rubber Buffer
U11900 - CLINCHER Oil Fill Quantities
U14200 - CLINCHER Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U15200 - CLINCHER Parts Lists Drawings
Old BIM TITLE
(No Longer Available)
New User Manual
Document Numbers & Hyperlinks
BIM 1030 - Unicase Helical Worm Gearboxes
U10770 - Helical-Worm Reducer Lubrication
U11020 - Helical-Worm Reducer Lubrication Types
U12400 - Helical-Worm Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U12500 - Helical-Worm Solid Shaft/Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U12600 - Helical-Worm Hollow Shaft Oil Fill Quantities
U14500 - Helical-Worm Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U15500 - Helical-Worm Parts LIsts Drawings
BIM 1031 - MINICASE Worm Gearboxes
U10770 - Helical Worm Reducer Lubrication
U11040 - Minicase Worm Reducer Lubrication Types
U13100 - Minicase Foot Mount Oil Fill Quantities
U13200 - Minicase Foot Mount Oil Fill Quantities
BIM 1033 - SI Design FLEXBLOC Worm Gearboxes
U10770 - Helical Worm Reducer Lubrication
U11060 - FLEXBLOC Worm Reducer Lubrication Types
U13300 - FLEXBLOC Oil Fill Quantities
U14800 - FLEXBLOC Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
BIM 1040 - 92 & 90.1 Helical-Bevel
U12000 - Bevel Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U12100 - Bevel Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U12200 - 92 Series Helical-Bevel Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U12300 - 92 Series Helical-Bevel Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U14300 - 92 Series Helical-Bevel Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U14400 - 90.1 Helical-Bevel Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U15300 - 90.1 Helical-Bevel Parts Lists
U15400 - 92 Series Helical-Bevel Parts Lists Drawings
BIM 1001 - Hollow Shrink Disc Shaft
U10290 - Hollow Shaft with Shrink Disc
BIM 1002 - Keyed Shaft & Fixing Element
U10270 - Keyed Hollow Shaft
U10280 - Shaft Fixing Kit
BIM 1003 - Expansion Chambers
U10830 - Expansion Chambers
Installation & Maintenance Manual
BIM 1009 - Inputs
U45100 - NEMA IEC Inputs & Their Couplings
U45250 - Perma Lube Options
U45300 - Solid Input Shaft [W]
U45400 - Motor Mount Platform
U45500 - Sugar Shoop
BIM 1004 - Motors U30000 - Motors - AC Induction, Single and Polyphase
BIM 1014 - Motor Brakes U35000 - Motor Brakes Installation & Maintenance
BIM 1092 - Current Sensing Brake Relay [IR] U35200 - Current Sensing Relay
BIM 1095 - Fast Brake Rectier [GPE & GPU] U35100 - Fast Brake Rectier
BIM 9002 - GRIPMAXX U10310 - NORD GRIPMAXX
DRIVESYSTEMS WWW.NORD.COM
NORD Gear Limited
BIM TO USER MANUAL
CROSS REFERENCE
DRIVESYSTEMS
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
1. Importance of the operating instructions
These operating instructions are intended to provide general
information and safety guidelines. It is the responsibility of
the buyer, machine builder, installer and user of the NORD
product to make sure that all the proper safetynotes and op-
erating instructions have been reviewed and understood. If
the contents of this instruction or any applicable operating
instructions are not understood, please consult NORD.
WARNI NG

Electric motors, gearmotors, electrical brakes, variable
frequency drives, and gear reducers contain potentially
dangerous high-voltage, rotating-components and
surfaces that may become hot during operation. All work
involved in the transport, connection, commissioning and
maintenance of any NORD product must be carried out by
qualied and responsible technicians.
2. Inspect incoming freight
Before accepting shipment from the freight company,
thoroughly inspect the NORD equipment for any shipping
and handling damage. If any goods called for in the bill of
lading or express receipt are damaged, or if the quantity is
short, do not accept until the freight express agent makes an
appropriate notation on your freight bill or express receipt. If
any concealed loss or damage is discovered later, notify your
freight carrier or express agent at once, and request a formal
review of your claim.
Claims for loss or damage in shipment must not be deducted
from the NORD invoice, nor should payment of the NORD
invoice be withheld awaiting adjustment of such claims, as
the carrier guarantees safe delivery. NORD will try to assist in
collecting claims for loss or damage during shipment; how-
ever, this willingness on our part does not remove the trans-
portation companys responsibility in reimbursing you for col-
lection of claims or replacement of material.
3. Obtaining detailed operating instructions
One can receive the detailed installation and maintenance
instructions by entering a serial number (or NORD order
number) at the appropriate location on the NORD web site.
i. Record the serial number from your gearmotor, gear
reducer, or motor nameplate, or record the serial number
found on your order conrmation.
ii. Go to www.nord.com/docs to download the appropriate
operating instructions.
EXAMPLE: www.nord.com/docs
4. Intended use
NORD is a supplier of electric motors, gearmotors, reduc-
ers, electromechanical brakes, mechanical variators, and
electrical variable frequency drives that are intended for
commercial installations on larger systems and machines.
WARNI NG

NORD does not accept any liability for damage or injury
caused by:
Inappropriate use, operation or adaptation of
the drive system.
Unauthorized removal of housing covers, safety
and inspection covers, guarding, etc.
Unauthorized modications to the drive system.
Improper servicing or repair work on the drive system.
Damage caused during shipment or transportation.
Disregard of the important Safety Notes or
Operating Instructions.
U10000 - 1 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
5. Notes concerning warranty and liability
All units are supplied according to the terms described in
our standard Conditions of Sale. The unit limited war-
ranty is also dened in our Conditions of Sale and is
located in the back of our product catalogs as well as the
back of your order invoice.
All NORD Safety Notes and all related NORD Operating
instructions shall be considered up-to-date at the time in
which they were compiled by the buyer, machine builder,
installer or user. NORD reserves the right to incorporate
technical modications and information updates to any
safety/operating instructions that are within the scope
of providing additional knowledge or clarication, com-
municating design changes, or product enhancements.
Information updates may include any NORD product, or
subsequent products purchased and supplied by NORD;
No specic claims can be derived from the information or
illustrations and descriptions contained in the safety notes
or related operating instructions.
WARNI NG

NORD assumes no liability for personal injury, equipment
damage or malfunctions resulting from failure to
comply with any installation safety notes. The appli-
cable national, regional, and local work regulations
and safety requirements must also be complied with.
Failure to comply with any safety notes or regulations
may result in serious injury, damage to property, or even
death.
6. Checklist for installation and operation
Verify that the purchased NORD product has been
supplied with the expected accessories & options. Check
the received goods and packing slip to make sure items
are properly received.
Make sure that you have all of the required Operating
Instructions for your NORD electric motor, gearmotor,
reducer, electromechanical brake, mechanical variable
speed drives, or electrical variable frequency drives.
Consult NORD if you feel you are missing any
documentation or if you have questions.
DRIVESYSTEMS
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
RETAIN FOR FUTURE USE U10000 - 2 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
SAFETY NOTES
1. Safety & information symbols
All work including transportation, storage, installation, elec-
trical connection, commissioning, servicing, maintenance and
repair must be performed only by qualied specialists or
personnel. It is recommended that repairs to NORD Products
are carried out by the NORD Service Department. Instructions
related to operational safety will be emphasized as shown.
Symbol Meaning

General Warning or Hazard - Severe risk or danger
of personal injury or death by working around dan-
gerously high electrical voltage or moving machinery.
Proper safety precautions must be taken.

STOP
Possible Harmful Situation - Care must be taken to
avoid the possibility of damaging the drive unit, driven
machine, or the environment.

Important Note - Useful note or tip to help assure
trouble-free operation.

Material Disposal Note - Important note concerning
suggested material disposal.
2. Safety warnings
All work involved in the transport, connection,
commissioning and maintenance of any NORD
product must be carried out by qualied and respon-
sible technicians. All applicable national, regional,
and local work regulations and safety requirements
must also be complied with. NORD assumes no
liability for personal injury, accidental death, or
equipment damage and malfunctions resulting from
failure to comply with installation or operating
instructions, safety notes, or any work regulations
and laws!
Gear unit installation and maintenance work may
only be performed when no power is available to
the prime mover or motor. Electric motors,
electrical brakes, and variable frequency drives,
contain potentially dangerous high-voltage. Prior to
installation or maintenance, shut down the power at
the circuit breaker or power switch. While working
on the drive, make sure the power from the prime
mover is isolated or secured on lock-out to prevent
accidental start-up and to safeguard against injury!
Surfaces of motors and gear units may become hot
during operation or shortly after start-up. In some
instances additional protection against accidental
contact may be necessary. Use caution to avoid burns
or serious injury!
GENERAL WARNI NGS
3. Observe published performance range
& nameplate data
Observe the data on all reducer nameplates and verify
published ratings for the NORD item/s in question.
Do not operate any NORD equipment outside the
published performance range. Failure to comply may
result in damage to the drive unit, driven machine, or
the environment.
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP STOP
U.S. Nameplate

NORD GEAR CORPORATION-USA / WWW.NORD.COM
SK
S/N
RATIO
TORQUE
SPEED
LUBRICATION
SEE MANUAL
FOR GEAR
MTG POS
RPM
LB-IN
SF
1
2
0
0
9
4
6
3
0
DRIVESYSTEMS
European Nameplate
DRIVESYSTEMS
Type SK
No.
i=
n2= min
Siehe Wartungsanleitung
See maintenance instructions
Voir instructions d entretien
-1
0
8
5

0
1
5
7
-
0
Getriebebau NORD
GrbH&Co KG
D - 22934 Bargteheide
4. Transportation and handling
Make sure that all eyebolts and lifting lugs are tight and
lift only at designed points. Protect the mounting surface
from possible damage during transportation.
WARNI NG

Do not attach other machinery or loads to the NORD
assembly, since the supplied lifting bolts are not
designed for this purpose.
If the gearmotor or assembly is equipped with two sus-
pension eye bolts, then both locations should be used for
transportation and placement of the unit; in this case the
tension force of the slings must not exceed a 45 angle.
In some instances it may be appropriate to use additional
lifting straps or slings in order to assure safe transportation
of the assembly. Always use sufciently rated handling
equipment and ensure that adequate safety measures
are taken to protect personnel from injury during trans-
portation. Once the NORD assembly is properly installed,
remove the transportation xtures.
Model/Type
Serial Number
Gear Ratio
Service Factor
Torque Rating
Output Speed RPM
Mounting Position
Model/Type
Serial Number
Gear Ratio
Speed
NORD Gear Limited
7. DISPOSAL
Properly dispose of all used gear units and internal parts
in accordance with all local regulations. In particular,
all lubricants must be properly collected and disposed.
MATERI AL DI SPOSAL
For conrmation of specic materials used in a specic
reducer or gearmotor assembly, please consult NORD with
the appropriate unit identication or serial number.
Components Material
Gear wheels, shafts, rolling bearings,
parallel keys, snap rings, spacers,
shims, etc.
Steel
Gear housing and housing
components
Cast iron or Aluminum
(depending on type and size)
Worm gears Bronze alloy
Radial seals, sealing caps, and rubber
components
Elastomers with some steel
Coupling components Plastic or Elastomer with Steel
Housing gaskets and at oil seals Asbestos-free sealing or gasket
material (various types used)
Gear Oil Mineral, SHC-Synthetic or
PG-Synthetic (can vary)
DRIVESYSTEMS
SAFETY NOTES
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
STORAGE & COMMISSIONING
1. Storage
IMPORTANT NOTE
For storage periods longer than 9 months, or for storage
in less than desirable conditions, please consult NORD for
recommendations.
Storage for up to 9 months is possible, so long as the follow-
ing conditions are observed:
Store the gear unit in its actual mounting position in
accordance with the specied oil ll-level, in a clean and
dry temperature controlled area. Avoid temperature
uctuations within the range of 0C and 40C (32F to
104F) and avoid relative humidity conditions in excess
of 60%.
Protect all exposed or unpainted shaft and ange surfaces
with an anti-corrosion agent or grease.
Store in a location free from shock and vibration, to avoid
false brinelling of bearing elements and raceways.
Whenever possible, rotate the shafts periodically, by hand
if necessary, to help prevent brinelling (bearing damage)
and to help keep the shaft seals pliable.
Avoid direct exposure to the sun or UV light and aggressive
or corrosive materials in the environment (ozone, gases,
solvents, acids, caustic solutions, salts, radioactivity, etc.
2. Commissioning
Prior to gear unit start-up, complete the following:
Check the lubricant and be sure the gear unit is lled with
the proper oil type, to the proper level, as determined by
the mounting position.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Some smaller gear units are supplied as maintenance free/
lubricated for life gear units. Oil level may not be checked
on some of these units.
Check the condition of all shaft seals and all assembled
ange gasket areas. If any change is detected in the
shape, color, hardness or permeability, or if any leaks are
detected, the corresponding shaft seals and/or gaskets
must be replaced.
Remove all anti-corrosive metal protectant from
otherwise bare metal surfaces. Follow product manufac-
turers directions and warnings during surface protection
removal.
Check the resistance of all motor and brake windings to
verify the integrity of the winding insulation and inspect
all terminal box openings and wire connection areas to
verify that all components are dry and free of corrosion.
3. Long-Term Storage
By taking special precautions, problems such as seal leakage
and reducer failure due to the lack of lubrication, improper
lubrication quantity, or contamination can be avoided. The
following precautions will protect gear reducers during peri-
ods of extended storage:
Store the gear unit in its actual mounting position in
accordance with the specied oil ll-level, in a clean and
dry temperature controlled area. Avoid temperature
uctuations within the range of 0C and 40C (32F to
104F) and avoid relative humidity conditions in excess
of 60%.
Fill the reducer full with oil that is compatible with the
product normally used or recommended during service.
Apply grease to all unpainted or unprotected shafts,
bores, keyways, ange surfaces, tapped holes, and to the
exterior of all oil seals.
Store in a location free from shock and vibration, to avoid
false brinelling of bearing elements and raceways.
Once every few months rotate the input shaft
approximately 10-20 revolutions to redistribute the
weight of gears and shafts and to prevent brinnelling of
the bearings and drying of the seal track.
Avoid direct exposure to the sun or UV light and aggressive
or corrosive materials in the environment (ozone, gases,
solvents, acids, caustic solutions, salts, radioactivity, etc.)
4. Commissioning After Long-Term Storage
Remove all anti-corrosive metal protectant from
otherwise bare metal surfaces. Follow product manufac-
turers directions and warnings during surface protection
removal.
Drain the reducer and rell it with the proper type and
amount of lubricant.
Observe start-up and initial operation to make sure there
are no seal or gasket leaks, or unusual sounds, vibration or
heat rise during operation.
Check the resistance of all motor and brake windings to
verify the integrity of the winding insulation and inspect
all terminal box openings and wire connection areas to
verify that all components are dry and free of corrosion.
U10040 - 1 of 1
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
UNIT INSTALLATION
1. Installation site
Drives must be properly installed if they are to produce the
rated torque. Improper installation may lead to oil leaks, re-
duced life, or even catastrophic failure. NORD gear drives
and motors are intended to be installed at a suitable mount-
ing site under the following conditions:
Unimpeded airow to and around the units.
Accessibility to oil drain, level and breather plugs.
On brakemotors, allow adequate space for removing the
fan guard and replacing and adjusting the brake.
Mounting surfaces must be at, torsionally rigid, and
dampened against vibration.
Unless special measures are taken, the immediate vicinity
around the gear drive or motor should not be exposed
to any aggressive or corrosive substances, contaminated air,
ozone, gases, solvents, acids, alkalis, salts, radioactivity, etc.
2. Mounting position
Reducer mounting position charts illustrate the standard
mounting positions for horizontal and vertical mounting.
All gear units are assembled with the oil ll-level, oil-drain
and vent plugs installed in their proper locations, according
to the customer-specied mounting position. For mounting
orientations other than shown consult NORD Gear.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
The gear reducer may not receive proper lubrication if
the unit is not mounted in the position for which it is
designed. Observe the mounting position designated
on the reducer nameplate, or specied in the order
acknowledgement. Consult NORD prior to changing
mounting position in the eld. While it is often possible
to simply relocate the oil ll-level and vent locations,
and adjust the oil ll amount, in some cases, different
mounting positions may lend themselves to different
internal construction features.
3. Reducer mounting
The support foundation must be straight, Ievel and at.
Whether the gear unit is foot-mounted or ange-
mounted, NORD recommends that the straightness and
atness of the customer-supplied support foundation
follow Table 1.
The gear unit must be properly aligned with the driven
shaft of the machine in order to prevent additional
stress or load forces from being imposed upon the gear
unit.
To facilitate oil drainage it may be desirable to elevate
the gear box foundation above the surrounding
support structure.
All bolting surfaces must be clean and free from
contamination and corrosion.
Table 1: Recommended Straightness and Flatness of
Customer-Supplied Support Foundation
Above
(in)
To &
Including
(in)
General Tolerance on
Straigtness & Flatness
ISO 2768-2, Tolerance Class K
0.00 0.39 +/- 0.002 in
0.39 1.18 +/- 0.004 in
1.18 3.9 +/- 0.008 in
3.9 11.8 +/- 0.016 in
11.8 39 +/- 0.024 in
39 118 +/- 0.031 in
Above
(mm)
To &
Including
(mm)
General Tolerance on
Straigtness & Flatness
ISO 2768-2, Tolerance Class K
0 10 +/- 0.05 mm
10 30 +/- 0.1 mm
30 100 +/- 0.2 mm
100 300 +/- 0.4 mm
300 1000 +/- 0.6 mm
1000 3000 +/- 0.8 mm
Straightness: Based upon the length of the corresponding line.
Flatness: Based upon the longer lateral surface or the
diameter of the circular surface.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
The responsibility for the design and construction of the
support foundation is with the user. The foundation
must be adequate to withstand normal operating loads
and possible overloads while maintaining alignment to
attached system components under such loads. Motors
and drive components mounted on prefabricated base
plates can become misaligned during shipment. Always
check alignment after installation.
4. Steel foundation
An engineered structural steel foundation should be
designed to provide adequate rigidity and prevent loads
from distorting the housing or causing misalignment of inter-
nal gears and shafts. When foot-mounting the gear reducer,
a base plate or sole plate with suitable thickness (generally
equal or greater than the thickness of the drive feet) should
be securely bolted to steel supports and extend under the
entire gear drive assembly. When ange-mounting the gear
unit, the bulk head plate must be engineered to minimize
buckling distortions and support the cantilevered weight of
the gear unit or gear motor.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Do not weld on the gear unit or use the gear unit as an
earth or ground connection for any welding procedure
as this may cause permanent damage to the bearings
and gears.
NORD Gear Limited
5. Concrete foundation
If a concrete foundation is used, allow the concrete to set
rmly before bolting down the gear drive. Grout structural
steel mounting pads and bolts of sufcient size into the
concrete, to adequately distribute the load stress onto the
concrete foundation.
Figure 1: Concrete Foundation
6. Bolt connections for footed & ange mounted units
NORD footed reducers and ange-mount reducers (with B5
ange) have clearance designed into the mounting holes to
allow for some minor adjustments in alignment. BoIt size,
strength and quantity should be veried to insure proper
torque reaction capacity whatever the mounting arrange-
ment. Tightening torque for gear reducer mounting bolts,
and recommended fastener grades, are provided in Table 2.
Table 2A: Tightening Torque for Inch Reducer Mounting Bolts
Thread Size
Grade SAE 5 /
ASTM A449
Grade SAE 8
(in) (lb-ft) (Nm) (lb-ft) (Nm)
1/4-20 7.1 9.6 10.0 13.6
5/16-18 16 21 22 30
3/8-16 28 37 39 53
1/2-13 69 93 98 132
5/8-11 138 188 195 264
3/4-10 247 334 348 472
7/8-9 396 537 558 757
1-8 592 802 833 1,130
1 1/8-7 - - 1,233 1,672
1 1/4-7 - - 1,717 2,327
1 3/8-6 - - 2,267 3,073
1 1/2-6 - - 2,983 4,045
1 3/4-5 - - 4,458 6,045
Calculated tightening torques are based a conventional
60, clean and dry (un-lubricated) thread, with thread-
friction and head-friction equal to 0.15.
When using inch-fasteners, NORD recommends a minimum
Grade SAE 5 (ASTM A-449) for sizes up to 1-8 UNC, and
Grade SAE 8 for all larger sizes.
Table 2B: Tightening Torque for Metric Reducer Mounting Bolts
Above
ISO Grade 8.8 ISO Grade 10.9 ISO Grade 12.9
(mm) (lb-ft) (Nm) (lb-ft) (Nm) (lb-ft) (Nm)
M4 2.4 3.2 3.5 4.7 4.1 5.5
M5 4.7 6.4 6.9 9.3 8.1 11
M6 8 11 12 16 14 19
M8 20 27 29 39 34 46
M10 39 53 58 78 67 91
M12 68 92 100 135 110 155
M14 107 145 159 215 180 250
M16 170 230 247 335 290 390
M18 240 325 343 465 400 540
M20 339 460 487 660 570 770
M22 465 630 664 900 770 1,050
M24 583 790 848 1,150 960 1,300
M27 848 1,150 1,217 1,650 1,440 1,950
M30 1,180 1,600 1,660 2,250 1,950 2,650
M36 2,050 2,780 2,884 3,910 3,470 4,710
M42 3,297 4,470 4,639 6,290 5,560 7,540
M48 4,940 6,700 7,010 9,500 8,260 11,200
Calculated tightening torques are based on a conventional
60, clean and dry (un-lubricated) thread, with thread-
friction and head-friction equal to 0.15.
When using metric-fasteners, NORD recommends a
minimum ISO Grade 8.8 bolt.
7. Mounting the prime mover
When the motor is not ange mounted or integrally mounted
to the gearbox, it is important to properly secure and
align the gear drive with respect to the driven machine
before attempting to align the prime mover or motor.
A. After the main gear drive is properly aligned and bolted in
place, align the prime mover with respect to the reducer
input shaft.
B. Use shims under the feet of the prime mover as needed,
and secure in place with the proper mounting bolts. Dowel
pins may be eld-installed to help prevent misalignment
and ensure proper realignment if removed for service.
I MPORTANT NOTE
When using a high speed coupling connection between
the prime mover and the reducer, check alignment
per the coupling manufacturers recommendations. If
the coupling is misaligned, the reducer alignment or
shimming is incorrect. Re-align the gear reducer and
re-check the high-speed coupling alignment before re-
aligning the motor.
DRIVESYSTEMS
UNIT INSTALLATION
Grouted Structural
Steel Mounting Pads
Mounting Bolts
Concrete Foundation
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
SOLID SHAFT CONNECTIONS
1. Solid shaft diameter tolerance
Reducer input and output shaft extensions have a diameter
tolerance as specied in Table 1.
Table 1: Solid Shaft Diameter Tolerance
Above

(in)
To &
Including
(in)
Tolerance
(in)
0.375 1.750 +0.0000 / -0.0005
1.750 7.500 +0.0000 / -0.0010
Above

(mm)
To &
Including
(mm)
Tolerance
(mm)
ISO 286-2
Fit Class
10 18 +0.012 / +0.001 k6
18 30 +0.015 / +0.002 k6
30 50 +0.018 / +0.002 k6
50 80 +0.030 / +0.011 m6
80 120 +0.035 / +0.013 m6
120 180 +0.040 / +0.015 m6
180 190 +0.046 / +0.017 m6
2. Fitting drive elements onto the reducer solid shaft
Solid input and output shaft extensions are provided with a
drill and tap feature as indicated in Table 2. When installing
drive elements such as coupling hubs, pulleys, sprockets, or
gears, NORD recommends using the threaded hole in the
end of the shaft, along with a suitable assembly device tted
into the threaded hole.
Typical Assembly
Device
Table 2: Solid Shaft End - Threaded Holes
Above

(in)
To &
Including
(in)
Tap size & Depth
(in)
0.375 0.500 10-24 x 0.43 in
0.500 0.875 1/4-20 x 0.59 in
0.875 0.938 5/16-18 x 0.71 in
0.938 1.100 3/8-16 x 0.87 in
1.100 1.300 1/2-13 x 1.10 in
1.300 1.875 5/8-11 x 1.42 in
1.875 3.500 3/4-10 x 1.73 in
3.500 5.125 1-8 x 2.63 in
5.125 7.500 1 1/4 - 7 x 3.15
Above

(mm)
To &
Including
(mm)
Tap Size & Depth
(mm)
10 13 M4 x 10 mm
13 16 M5 x 12.5 mm
16 21 M6 x 16 mm
21 24 M8 x 19 mm
24 30 M10 x 22 mm
30 38 M12 x 28 mm
38 50 M16 x 36 mm
50 85 M20 x 42 mm
85 130 M24 x 50 mm
130 190 M30 x 60 mm
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
DO NOT DRIVE or HAMMER the coupling hub, pulley,
sprocket, or gear into place. An endwise blow to the
reducer shaft can generate damaging axial forces and
cause damage to the reducer housing, bearings or internal
components.
WARNI NG

To avoid serious injury the user must provide suitable
safety guards for all rotating shafts and shaft compo-
nents such as couplings, chain drives, belt drives, etc. All
guarding must adhere to local regulations and safety
standards.
3. Installing interference-t hubs to the reducer shaft
Prior to installing any interference-t hubs to the reducer
shaft, consult with the manufacturer to determine proper
assembly and t. Interference-ts usually require heating the
coupling, sprocket or gear hub, per the manufacturers rec-
ommendations. Coupling hub installation typically follows
ANSI/AGMA 9002-A86. Always make sure the reducer shaft
seals are protected from the heat source. Apply uniform heat
to the drive element hub to prevent distortion. NORD does
not recommend heating the drive element hub beyond 212F
to 275F (100C to 135 C).
WARNI NG

When using heat to mount a drive element hub, do not
use open ame in a combustible atmosphere or near
ammable materials. Use suitable protection to avoid
burns or serious injury.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
When using external chain or belt drives, make sure
the reducer is sized so that the shaft and bearings have
adequate capacity. To avoid unnecessary bearing loads
and additional shaft deection, mount all power take-off
devices (sprockets, pulleys, etc.) so that the applied load
center is as close to the gear housing as possible and check
component alignment and tension of any belts or chains
per the manufacturers recommendation. Do not over
tighten the belts or chains.
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
SOLID SHAFT CONNECTIONS
4. Coupling installation
The performance and life of any coupling depends upon how
well it is installed. Coupling hubs are typically mounted ush
with the shaft ends, unless specically ordered for overhung
mounting. Shaft couplings should be instaIIed according to
the coupling manufacturers recommendations for gap, an-
gular and paraIIeI aIignment. To help obtain critical shaft
alignment coupling hubs may be installed to the machine
shafts prior to nal shimming or tightening of the founda-
tion bolts. Proper coupling alignment aIIows for thermaI and
mechanicaI shaft movement during operation and ensures
that only torque (no radial load) is transmitted between the
mating shafts.
Coupling gap and angular alignment
The shaft gap must be sufcient to accommodate any antici-
pated thermal or mechanicaI axiaI movement. When setting
the coupling gap, insert a spacer or shim stock equal to the
required spacing or gap between the coupIing hub faces.
Measure the clearance using feeler gauges at 90-degree in-
tervals, to verify the angular alignment.
Parallel (or offset) alignment
Mount a dial indicator to one coupIing hub, and rotate this
hub, sweeping the outside diameter of the other hub. The
paraIIeI or offset misalignment is equal to one-half of the
total indicator reading. Another method is to rest a straight
edge squarely on the outside diameter of the hubs at 90
intervals and measure any gaps with feeler gauges. The maxi-
mum gap measurement is the paraIIeI or offset misalignment.
Check alignment
After both angular and paraIIeI alignments are within speci-
ed Iimits, tighten aII foundation boIts securely and re-check
critical aIignment. If any of the specied Iimits for aIignment
are exceeded, realign the coupIing.
5. Installing sheaves (pulleys), sprockets and gears
To avoid unnecessary bearing loads and additional shaft de-
ection, mount all power take-off devices (sprockets, pulleys,
gears, etc.) so that the applied load center is as close to the
gear housing as possible, as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2: Sprocket or Gear Mounting

Sprocket
Sprocket Hub
Preferred Mounting of Sprocket or Gear
Align the driver sheave or sprocket with the driven sheave
or sprocket by placing a straight-edge length-wise across
the face of the sheaves or sprockets. AIignment of bushed
sheaves and sprockets should be checked only after bushings
have been tightened. Check horizontal shaft alignment by
placing one leg of a square or a level vertically against the
face of the sheave or sprocket.
Always check component alignment and tension any belts or
chains per the manufacturers recommendation. The ideal
belt or chain tension allows proper wrap of the driver and
driven wheels, while maintaining the lowest possible tension
of the belts or chain, so that no slipping occurs under load
conditions. Check belt or chain tension frequently over the
rst 24 to 48 hours of operation.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
center is as close the gear housing as possible and check
tension the belts or chains.
6. Outboard pinion gear alignment
Align outboard pinion gears and adjust the gear tooth clear-
ance according to the manufacturers recommendations,
checking for acceptable outboard pinion tooth contact. The
foundation boIts may have to be Ioosened and the gear unit
moved slightly to obtain proper gear tooth contact. After
the unit is moved to correct tooth contact, the prime mover
may need to be realigned.
U10250 - 2 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
KEYED HOLLOW SHAFT
1. Keyed hollow shaft design
NORD uses high quality carbon steel to manufacture
hollow-shafts. Upon request, NORD can provide alternate
materials, such as stainless steel. NORD hollow shafts are
designed with a bore relief (reduced contact area) between
the mating shafts.
The bore relief provides a cavity to hold an anti-seize assem-
bly paste. It also acts as a design feature intended to help
prevent corrosion and to facilitate gearbox removal from the
solid shaft.
NORD furnishes dual keys designed to be used in each of the
bore land areas, as opposed to supplying a single long key.
The dual keys are intended to simplify assembly onto the
machines solid shaft.

Bore Land Bore Land Bore Relief
I MPORTANT NOTE
If a single shaft key or dual shaft keys are supplied by
others, the key/s must engage the full bore-land length at
each end of the hollow shaft.
2. Key and keyway dimensions
Unless otherwise indicated, inch keys and keyways follow the
ANSI B17.1 standard and metric keys and keyways follow the
DIN6885-1 standard. Inch bores will typically utilize square
keys but in some instances the larger hollow shaft bore sizes
utilize the alternate rectangular key shown in the ANSI B17.1
standard.
Key slots for the solid machine shaft should be made with a
Class 2, transitional-t class (slightly loose to slightly tight).
Key slots in the female shaft are designed to be a low clear-
ance t. These suggested practices should allow for easier
assembly with the mating solid shaft, without allowing exces-
sive clearance which could cause keys to work loose during
reducer operation.
I MPORTANT NOTE
If the key t is too tight, light ling of the key sides and
hand-tting of the keys may be required.
3. Keyed hollow-shaft bore tolerances
Standard keyed hollow-shaft bore tolerances are shown in
the following table.
Table 1 - Keyed hollow bore tolerances
Above To and Including Bore Diameter
Tolerance
[in] [in] [in]
0.4375 1.6250 +0.0010 / -0.0000
1.6250 3.2500 +0.0012 / -0.0000
3.2500 7.0000 +0.0014 / -0.0000
Above To and Including Bore Diameter
Tolerance
[mm] [mm] [mm]
10 18 +0.018 / -0.000
18 30 +0.021 / -0.000
30 50 +0.025 / -0.000
50 80 +0.030 / -0.000
80 120 +0.035 / -0.000
120 180 +0.040 / -0.000
180 190 +0.035 / -0.000
Metric hollow bore tolerances per ISO286-2, Class H7
4. Suggested solid shaft (machine shaft) tolerances
NORD recommends a close t of the customer-supplied solid
shaft or machine-shaft, for the following reasons:
To help minimize the potential for fretting and corrosion.
To help prevent excessive free play in the shaft connection
that could lead to excessive load stress on the driven
system, the gear drive, or both.
Table 2 - Suggested solid shaft tolerances
Above To and
Including
Shaft Diameter Tolerance
Uniform Load Shock Load
[in] [in] [in] [in]
0.4375 0.8750 +0.0000 / -0.0005 +0.0000 / +0.0005
0.8750 4.5000 +0.0000 / -0.0010 +0.0000 / +0.0010
4.5000 7.0000 +0.0000 / -0.0012 +0.0000 / +0.0015
Above To and
Including
Shaft Diameter Tolerance
Uniform Load Shock Load
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
10 18 +0.000 / -0.011 +0.012 / +0.001
18 30 +0.000 / -0.013 +0.015 / +0.002
30 50 +0.000 / -0.016 +0.018 / +0.002
50 80 +0.000 / -0.019 +0.021 / +0.002
80 120 +0.000 / -0.022 +0.025 / +0.003
120 180 +0.000 / -0.025 +0.028 / +0.003
180 190 +0.000 / -0.029 +0.033 / +0.004
Uniform load: Mating shaft diameter tolerance per ISO286-2, class h6
Shock load: Mating shaft diameter tolerance per ISO286-2, class k6
U10270 - 1 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
As indicated in Table 2, different solid shaft tolerances are
suggested depending upon the load type.
If the machine load conditions are considered Uniform
a clearance t is allowed.
If the machine load conditions are considered to have
Shock Load a light clearance to interference t condi-
tion is suggested.
Typically the machine builder will have good knowledge as to
the load type. As an alternate method to classify load type,
one could follow the Mass Acceleration Factor Selection
Method that is discussed in NORDs product catalog/s.
Straightness, roundness, and diameter tolerance variations
of both shafts should be controlled as accurately as possible.
When mating, solid shaft design features are not controlled,
reducer installation may be very difcult without ordering
special hollow-bore design features to accomodate.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
The supporting solid shaft or driven machine shaft must
be of adequate size and strength to withstand normal
operating loads and peak loads without damage to itself
or any of the system components.
5. Suggested solid-shaft mating shaft surface nish
Controlling the mating shaft surface nish helps to assure
proper t and assembly while minimizing the possibility of
corrosion and fretting. NORD recommends that the mat-
ing solid shaft surface should be at least 125 micro-inches
(3.2 microns) or smoother.
6. Assembly to the machine shaft
A. Clean and remove any dirt, grease, or rust-preventative
coatings from both the reducer hollow shaft and the
machine shaft.
B. Make sure the edges of both the reducer hollow shaft and
machine shaft are free from any nicks or burrs. If nicks
or burrs are present remove them using an abrasive
material such as an emery cloth.
C. Before installing the gear reducer onto the machine
shaft, apply an anti-seize compound or anti-corrosive
lubricant to the mating shafts as shown in Figure 1.
Assembly and subsequent dismantling will be aided by the
anti-seize agent.
Figure 1 Application of anti-seize to the mating shafts

Apply to bore land area Apply to machine shaft
D. Fit the shaft key/s into place on the machine shaft.
Depending upon the key slot design on the machine shaft,
it may be necessary to stake or Loctite
the key/s into place

so they do not slide axially while tting the reducer to the
shaft.
E. Lift the gear unit assembly into place and align it carefully
with respect to the machine shaft.
F. Fit the gear unit assembly onto the machine shaft using a
suitable pulling device.
G. Secure the reducer onto the machine shaft in an axial
direction, to prevent the reducer from shifting or walking
out of place during operation.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Do not use excessive force or try to hammer the gear unit
into place. The housing, shafting, bearings or gear wheels
may become damaged.
7. Securing the reducer onto the machine shaft
There are slight shaft oscillations during operation in any ro-
tating shaft equipment or any shaft-mounted reducer assem-
bly. Therefore it is important to secure the reducer in an axial
direction onto the machine shaft, to prevent the reducer
from shifting or walking out of place during operation.
Possible methods to secure the reducer axially to the machine
shaft include:
Using commercial set collars, retaining rings, or snap rings.
Using the optional NORD Fixing Element Kit
(see U10280).
The NORD Fixing Element Kit includes all of the necessary
parts to secure the shaft by using a tapped hole in the end of
the mating male shaft.
Loctite
is a registered trademark of Loctite Corporation

U.S.A. and Henkel.
DRIVESYSTEMS
KEYED HOLLOW SHAFT
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
SHAFT FIXING KIT
1. Shaft xing kit - basic design
The NORD Fixing Kit provides a method for securing the
reducer in an axial direction, after the keyed-hollow shaft
reducer is mounted onto the machine shaft. The xing kit
prevents the reducer from shifting or walking out of place
during operation. NORD offers a variety of standard xing
kits, based upon bore size, as shown on Page 2 of this manual.
Figure 1 Fixing kit components

SCREW
PLUG
RETAINING
WASHER
LOCK
WASHER
SNAP-RING
I MPORTANT NOTE
For installation of the keyed-hollow bore reducer to the
machine-shaft, see user manual U10270.
2. Assembly types
There are two types of assembly methods commonly used for
securing the xing kit.
Figure 2 Fixing kit assembly methods
Type 1
The machine-shaft is located against a xed snap-ring
located inside the bore of the reducer.

Type 2
The machine shaft is shouldered and is pulled tight against
the hollow-shaft; the snap-ring is no longer required.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
The maximum edge break on the solid machine shaft must
not exceed the values shown on Page 2 of this manual.
Otherwise the load-bearing capacity of the snap-ring will
be reduced and may result in failure.
3. Assembly
A. If using a Type 1 assembly, secure the appropriate snap-
ring into the bore of the reducer. With Type 2 assembly, no
snap-ring is required.
B. Draw the hollow bore gear reducer onto the machine
shaft as instructed in U10270. Remember to apply a
suitable assembly paste or anti-seize compound to the
mating shafts.
C. Install the retaining washer over the end of the hollow
bore.
D. Secure the appropriate cap-screw into the machine shaft
and tighten the screw based upon the assembly type, as
noted below. Then install the protective plug over the
screw hole.
Type 1 - Screw tightening
Tighten until lightly snug and secure the screw with a thread-
locking compound to prevent the screw from backing out.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Over tightening the retaining screw may cause the snap
ring to be pulled out of its seating groove, causing dam-
age to the hollow-bore or snap ring.
Type 2 - Screw tightening
Follow the cap screw manufactures guidelines and tighten
the screw to the proper torque, based upon the bolt grade
and material. For reference tightening torque values, also see
manual U10060, Table 2.
4. Disassembly
When using Type 2 assembly, it is possible to design a simple
disassembly tool to allow easier removal of the hollow-bore
reducer. The solid shaft is shouldered to rest against the hol-
low-bore of the reducer. The machine shaft is supported in
both of the hollow bore land areas, but the overall length is
reduced compared to Type 1 assembly.
Figure 3 Disassembly Tool

REDUCER
SHAFT
KEY SNAP-RING
MACHINE
SHAFT
THRUST
WASHER
JACKING
NUT
JACKING
BOLT
I MPORTANT NOTE
For suggestions on how to construct a disassembly tool for
a particular reducer and bore size, please consult NORDs
application engineering department.
U10280 - 1 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
Shaft
Bore
Bolt
Size
Allowable Thrust Max. Edge
Groove Ring Break
lb lb in
[in] [N] [N] [mm]
0.500 10-32
730 520 0.02
[3255] [2300] [0.5]
0.750 1/4-20
1800 560 0.04
[7905] [2500] [1]
1.000 3/8-16
2900 1000 0.04
[13020] [4600] [1]
1.188 7/16-14
5100 1000 0.04
[22630] [4700] [1]
1.250 7/16-14
5100 1000 0.04
[22630] [4700] [1]
1.375 5/8-11
6500 1400 0.06
[29140] [6400] [1.5]
1.438 5/8-11
6900 1500 0.06
[30690] [6500] [1.5]
1.500 5/8-11
7800 1500 0.06
[34875] [6700] [1.5]
1.625 5/8-11
9900 1900 0.08
[44020] [8400] [2]
1.688 5/8-11
10500 1800 0.08
[46810] [8200] [2]
1.938 5/8-11
11100 1900 0.08
[49600] [8400] [2]
2.000 5/8-11
14100 2700 0.08
[62775] [12100] [2]
2.063 5/8-11
14100 2700 0.08
[62775] [12100] [2]
2.188 3/4-10
16800 2900 0.08
[74865] [13000] [2]
2.375 3/4-10
17400 2900 0.08
[77190] [13000] [2]
2.438 3/4-10
17400 2900 0.08
[77190] [13000] [2]
2.750 3/4-10
19600 4700 0.10
[87110] [21000] [2.5]
2.938 3/4-10
20900 4700 0.10
[93000] [21000] [2.5]
3.188 3/4-10
27700 7000 0.12
[123225] [31200] [3]
3.438 3/4-10
29300 7000 0.12
[130200] [31400] [3]
3.625 7/8-9
30900 7000 0.12
[137330] [31400] [3]
3.938 7/8-9
32400 6900 0.12
[144305] [30800] [3]
4.000 7/8-9
39000 16400 0.12
[173600] [73000] [3]
4.063 7/8-9
39000 16400 0.12
[173600] [73000] [3]
4.375 7/8-9
41500 16200 0.12
[184450] [72000] [3]
4.438 7/8-9
41500 16200 0.12
[184450] [72000] [3]
4.750 7/8-9
44200 15700 0.12
[196850] [70000] [3]
4.938 7/8-9
48000 15500 0.12
[213900] [69000] [3]
Upon request, additional hollow-bore sizes & xing kit sizes may be offered.
Shaft
Bore
Bolt
Size
Allowable Thrust Max. Edge
Groove Ring Break
N N mm
[mm] [lb] [lb] [in]
16 M5 Not applicable
20 M6
8370 5600 1.0
[1900] [1300] [0.04]
25 M10
12400 7300 1.0
[2800] [1600] [0.04]
30 M10
17515 7200 1.0
[3900] [1600] [0.04]
35 M12
29140 8700 1.5
[6500] [1900] [0.06]
40 M16
41850 10900 2.0
[9400] [2400] [0.08]
45 M16
46810 10700 2.0
[10500] [2400] [0.08]
50 M16
62775 19000 2.0
[14100] [4300] [0.08]
60 M20
74865 29200 2.0
[16800] [6600] [0.08]
70 M20
87110 30300 2.5
[19600] [6800] [0.10]
80 M20
115630 56000 2.5
[26000] [12600] [0.10]
90 M24
130200 56000 3.0
[29300] [12600] [0.12]
100 M24
144305 55000 3.0
[32400] [12400] [0.12]
110 M24
181350 71000 3.0
[40800] [16000] [0.12]
120 M24
196850 70000 3.0
[44300] [15700] [0.12]
Upon request, additional hollow-bore sizes and xing kit sizes may be offered.
This xing kit is not supplied with a snap-ring.
A Type 2 machine shaft is required.
Thrust load-bearing capacity of the groove is based upon using
a hollow-shaft material with a yield-strength of at least 45,000
psi (310 N/mm
2
).
Thrust load-bearing capacity of the snap-ring is based upon a
typical snap-ring material with a yield-strength of at least
30,500 psi (210 N/mm
2
).
On the solid machine shaft, observe the maximum edge break
(radius or chamfer) shown. A larger edge break will result in
reduced load-bearing capacity of the snap-ring.
MAX SOLID
SHAFT EDGE
BREAK
DRIVESYSTEMS
SHAFT FIXING KIT
NORD Gear Limited
5. Standard xing kit size offerings
NORD offers a variety of standard xing kit sizes as shown by the following tables.
Table 1 - Standard xing kit size offerings
DRIVESYSTEMS
HOLLOW SHAFT WITH
SHRINK DISC
1. Shrink disc design concept
A shrink disc option is adaptable to many NORD hollow-bore
reducers. The shrink disc applies a high-capacity, zero back-
lash, interference t to the driven machine shaft. The dou-
ble tapered inner ring converts most all of the screw clamp-
ing load into radial contact pressure, as the outer clamping
discs are pulled together by proper tightening of the locking
screws. As the inner ring is contracted, the clearance between
the customer solid shaft and reducer shaft is absorbed.
In their relaxed state, shrink discs provide a generous
assembly clearance, thus eliminating the typical assembly
and disassembly challenges of using interference ts.
Shrink discs also reduce solid machine shaft stresses by
eliminating the need for shaft keys and keyways.
When properly applied, high shrink ts help eliminate
shaft fretting corrosion and allow for easier shaft mounting
and dismounting.
TAG:
Shrink Disc Type
& Bolt Torque
Reducer Shaft
Customer Solid Shaft
Locking Screws
Outer Clamping
Discs
Inner Ring
(Ferrule)
Do Not
Lubricate!!
2. Solid (machine) shaft design guidelines
Always use a solid shaft material of adequate strength and
apply proper shaft ts in order to establish adequate clamp-
ing force during assembly and assure proper shaft release
during disassembly.
Use solid shaft material with yield strength of at least
52,260 psi (360 N/mm
2
).
The solid machine shaft should be machined according to
ISO 286-2, Class h6 t tolerances, with a shaft nish of 125
micro inches (3.2 m) or smoother, per Table 1.
The solid machine shaft must extend the full length of the
reducer hollow shaft.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Contact NORD when using a shrink disc in an application
where the shrink disc connection must simultaneously
transmit torque and thrust.
3. Safety
WARNI NG

operating loads and peak loads without damage to
itself or any of the system components.
The transmissible torque and the gripping capacity of
the shrink disc may be reduced if shaft tolerances or
clearances are larger than specied.
Excessive tightening torque can result in permanent
deformation of the inner ring and the reducer hollow
bore, making disassembly very difcult. Do not over
tighten the shrink disc to compensate for excessive
clearance between the machine shaft and reducer bore.
Observe the published ratings and safety factors
for both the reducer and shrink disc. Overload
conditions or excessively high torque can cause the
shrink disc connection to slip. In extreme cases localized
galling or welding of components may occur.
4. Shrink disc shaft tolerances
Recommended solid shaft tolerances and reducer bore toler-
ances are shown in the table below.
Table 1: Shrink disc shaft tolerances
Above &
Including
[in]
To &
Including
[in]
Solid Shaft
Tolerance
[in]
Reducer Bore
Tolerance
[in]
Max. Assembly
Clearance
[in]
0.7500 1.1250 +0.0000 / -0.0005 +0.0008 / -0.0000 0.0013
1.1250 1.9375 +0.0000 / -0.0006 +0.0009 / -0.0000 0.0015
2.0000 3.1250 +0.0000 / -0.0007 +0.0011 / -0.0000 0.0018
3.1875 4.6875 +0.0000 / -0.0008 +0.0013 / -0.0000 0.0021
4.7500 7.0625 +0.0000 / -0.0009 +0.0015 / -0.0000 0.0024
7.1250 7.5000 +0.0000 / -0.0011 +0.0018 / -0.0000 0.0029
Above
[mm]
To &
Including
[mm]
Solid Shaft
Tolerance
[mm]
Reducer Bore
Tolerance
[mm]
Max. Assembly
Clearance
[mm]
18 30 +0.000 / -0.013 +0.021 / -0.000 0.034
30 50 +0.000 / -0.016 +0.025 / -0.000 0.041
50 80 +0.000 / -0.019 +0.030 / -0.000 0.049
80 120 +0.000 / -0.022 +0.035 / -0.000 0.057
120 180 +0.000 / -0.025 +0.040 / -0.000 0.065
180 190 +0.000 / -0.029 +0.046 / -0.000 0.075
Shaft/bore tolerances per ISO 282-6, Class h6/H7.
Solid shaft nish should be 125 micro inches (3.2
micro meters) or smoother.
U10290 - 1 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
5. Installation
WARNI NG

Disconnect all power sources from the equipment before
beginning this installation procedure. Handle the com-
ponents with care and avoid all sharp machined edges to
prevent personal injury.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Do not tighten any of the shrink disc locking screws prior
to installing the reducer with shrink disc onto the machine
shaft. The inner ring of the shrink disc can become perma-
nently contracted or damaged at relatively low tightening
torque.
A. Inspect the gear unit received. Make sure the shrink disc
and extended hollow shaft projection is on the side of the
reducer where it was specied or ordered.
B. Loosen the shrink disc locking screws but do not take the
shrink disc completely apart. Remove and discard any
packaging material or transportation spacers that come
with the shrink disc.
C. Remove all burrs, rust, corrosion, lubricants, and foreign
matter from the surfaces of the solid shaft and hollow-bore.
D. Make sure the shrink disk is positioned onto the hollow
shaft until the outer clamping ring is ush with the edge
of the hollow shaft.
E. To aid in assembly, it is acceptable to lightly grease the
solid shaft, only in the area that will come in contact with
the bronze-bushing side of the reducer hollow-shaft. The
reducer hollow shaft must be completely de-greased and
free of lubricant, especially in the area of the shrink disc.
F. Position the gear reducer onto the solid machine shaft
and make certain the area under the shrink disc is
completely supported by the solid shaft.
G. After conrming the proper positioning of gear reducer
and the shrink disc, hand tighten (3) or (4) equally spaced
locking screws to make sure the outer collars of the shrink
disc are drawn together in a parallel fashion. Then hand-
tighten the remaining screws.
H. Refer to Table 2 for the specied tightening torques for
the shrink disc locking screws. Using a properly set torque
wrench using approximately (90) turns; tighten the
locking screws, by working in a circular clockwise or
counterclockwise sequence around the shrink disc.
I. Continue the tightening sequence (Step H.) even if some
locking screws initially require very low tightening torque
to achieve turns; do this for several passes until turns
can no longer be achieved.
J. Reset the torque wrench to approximately 3-5% over-
torque and tighten the locking screws for 1 or 2 more
passes. This procedure will compensate for relaxation of
the locking screws, since tightening of a given screw will
always tend to relax the adjacent screw. Without a slight
overtorquing of the screws, an innite number of passes
would be required to reach the desired tightening torque.
Table 2 - Shrink Disc Locking Screw Torque
Screw Size Wrench Size Tightening Torque
[mm] [Nm] [lb-in] [lb-ft]
M5 8 7 62 5.2
M6 10 12 106 8.9
M8 13 30 266 22
M10 17 59 522 44
M12 19 100 885 74
M16 24 250 2213 184
M20 30 490 4337 361
M24 36 840 7435 620
M30 46 1700 15050 1254
BOLT TIGHTENING PATTERN
K. Reset the torque wrench to the correct tightening torque
as indicated in Table 2. Make sure each locking screw has
been properly tightened until the screws are no longer
turning at the specied torque wrench setting. If necessary
repeat Steps G. & H.
6. Removal
A. Loosen the shrink disc locking screws in a circular pattern
by using (180) turns, until the shrink disc hub can be
moved or until the shrink disc hub and reducer shaft will
return to their original ts.
WARNI NG

Do not completely remove the locking screws before the
outer clamping disks of the shrink disc are disengaged
from the inner ring. A sudden release of the outer collars
will create high separating forces and could result in injury
or even death.
B. Loosen the outer collars of the shrink disc from the tapered
inner ring. This may require tapping the bolts with a soft
faced hammer or prying lightly between the outer collars.
C. Remove the gear reducer from the machine shaft.
7. Re-installation
A. It may be possible to re-use the shrink disc. However the
shrink disk should not be re-used if it becomes damaged
during removal, or excessively rusty or corroded. Shrink
discs must always be disassembled and thoroughly cleaned
before re-using.
B. After cleaning the shrink disc, lubricate between the
taper of the outer clamping disks and the outside of the
inner ring using MOLYKOTE G-Rapid Plus Paste
(product of Dow Corning) or equivalent. In addition,
grease screw threads and head contact area with multi-
purpose grease.
DRIVESYSTEMS
HOLLOW SHAFT WITH
SHRINK DISC
U10290 - 2 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORD GRIPMAXX

1. General information
The NORD GRIPMAXX keyless bushing system is adaptable
to most all NORD shaft-mounted reducers. The bushing sys-
tem offers interchangeable bushings to accommodate a large
range of driven machine-shaft sizes.
The unique design of the NORD GRIPMAXX bushing system
offers a number of distinct advantages as follows:
The NORD GRIPMAXX allows the machine builder to
utilize standard cold nished shaft stock, without the need
for additional shaft machining or shaft keys.
It uses a NORD shrink disc to apply a high-capacity, zero
backlash, interference t to the driven machine shaft,
while eliminating the typical assembly and disassembly
challenges of using interference ts.
The built in clearance between the customer shaft and
the bushing system helps to ensure easy installation and
removal of the gearbox. To help ensure easy removal, the
NORD GRIPMAXX bushings are prepared with a special
low-wear, corrosion-resistant hardened surface treatment,
that minimizes the formation of shaft corrosion and
fretting.
The NORD GRIPMAXX is ideal for start-stop operation
and bi-directional loading because it does not depend on
keys or keyways that transmit torque, which can also can
become loose or deform when subjected to these loading
conditions.
Unlike the typical conical or tapered bushing kits, the
NORD GRIPMAXX design allows a tight t against a
shouldered machine shaft.
The torque bushing and support bushing are the same
part and are fully interchangeable with one another.
2. GRIPMAXX assembly detail
3
2

1
5
6
4
3*
5
1
4
6
3* 5 1
3
Sideview of GRIPMAXX
5
6
1
Assembled GRIPMAXX
[1] NORD Shrink Disc
[2] Locking Screw
[3] Bushing (Torque Side)
[3*] Bushing (Support Side)
[4] Clamp Ring
[5] Gear Reducer Hollow Shaft
[6] Machine Shaft
I MPORTANT NOTE
NORD recommends that the machine shaft have a yield
strength of at least 52,260psi (360N/mm
2
)
I MPORTANT NOTE
Observe the recommended machine shaft tolerances in
table 1, page 2.
WARNI NG

operating loads and peak loads without damage to
itself or any of the system components.
U10310 - 1 of 3
NORD Gear Limited
3. Installation
WARNI NG

Disconnect all power sources from the equipment
before beginning this installation procedure. Handle the
components with care and avoid all sharp or machined
edges to prevent personal injury.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Do not tighten any of the shrink disc locking screws prior
to installing the reducer with shrink disc onto the machine
shaft. The inner ring of the shrink disc can become perma-
nently contracted or damaged at a relatively low tighten-
ing torque.
Table 1 - Required Machined Shaft Tolerance
Inch Machine Shaft Metric Machine Shaft
Above To &
Including
Tolerance
ISO 286-2
Above To &
Including
Tolerance
h11
[in] [in] [in] [mm] [mm] [mm]
0.4375 0.6875 - 0.0043 10 18 - 0.110
0.7500 1.1250 - 0.0051 18 30 - 0.130
1.1250 1.9375 - 0.0063 30 50 - 0.160
2.0000 2.9375 - 0.0074 50 75 - 0.190
A. Carefully inspect the machine shaft [6] and remove all
burrs, rust, corrosion, lubricants, and foreign matter
from the shaft surface. Verify that the diameter is within
the dimensional tolerances shown in Table 1.
B. Inspect the gear unit received to conrm the correct
position of the shrink disc [1]. Make sure the hollow
shaft [5] projection is on the side of the reducer where
it was specied or ordered.
C. In addition to cleaning the machine shaft [6], remove all
dirt, grease or oils from the reducer hollow shaft [5],
bushings [3], clamp ring [4], and shrink disk [1]. Do not
apply lubricants, corrosion preventatives, anti-sieze
compounds or coatings to the mating surfaces of the
shaft, bushings, clamp collars or shrink disc.
D. Position the clamp ring [4] and support bushing [3*]
over the machine shaft [6], making sure the support
bushing is in its desired location. Then secure the sup-
port bushing [3*] with the clamp ring [4] and tighten
the clamp ring screw.
E. Slide the gear reducer onto the machine shaft [6] until
the gear reducer stops against the secured support
bushing [3*].
F. Without taking the shrink disc [1] apart, loosen the
shrink disc locking screws [2]. Slide the shrink disk over
the reducer shaft [5] and slide the torque bushing [3]
onto the machine shaft, making sure it is seated
completely.
G. Conrm the positioning of the shrink disc [1] and
torque bushing [3]. Do not tighten the shrink disc until
the machine shaft and torque bushing are in proper
position, or the reducer shaft will be damaged. Hand-
tighten 3 or 4 or locking screws [2] and make sure the
outer collars of the shrink disc are drawn together in
a parallel fashion and then hand-tighten the remaining
screws.
H. Refer to Table 2 for the specied tightening torques for
the shrink disc locking screws. Using a properly set torque
wrench using approximately (90) turns; tighten the
locking screws, by working in a circular clockwise or
counterclockwise sequence around the shrink disc.
I. Continue the tightening sequence (Step H.) even if some
locking screws initially require very low tightening torque
to achieve turns; do this for several passes until turns
can no longer be achieved.
J. Reset the torque wrench to approximately 3-5% over-
torque and tighten the locking screws for 1 or 2 more
passes. This procedure will compensate for relaxation of
the locking screws, since tightening of a given screw will
always tend to relax the adjacent screw. Without a slight
overtorquing of the screws, an innite number of passes
would be required to reach the desired tightening torque.
Table 2 - Shrink Disc Locking Screw Torque
Screw Size Wrench Size Tightening Torque
[mm] [Nm] [lb-in] [ft-lb]
M5 8 7 62 5.2
M6 10 12 106 8.9
M8 13 30 266 22
M10 17 59 522 44
M12 19 100 885 74
M16 24 250 2213 184
M20 30 490 4337 361
BOLT TIGHTENING PATTERN
K. Reset the torque wrench to the correct tightening torque
as indicated in Table 2. Make sure each locking screw has
been properly tightened until the screws are no longer
turning at the specied torque wrench setting. If necessary
repeat Steps G. & H.
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORD GRIPMAXX

NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORD GRIPMAXX

NORD Gear Limited
5. Bushing kit removal
A. Loosen the shrink disc locking screws [2] in circular
pattern by using (180) turns, until the shrink
disc hub can be moved or until the shrink disc hub and
reducer shaft will return to their original ts.
WARNI NG

Do not completely remove the locking screws before the
outer clamping disks of the shrink disc are disengaged
from the inner ring. A sudden release of the outer collars
will create high separating forces and could result in injury
or even death.
B. Loosen the outer collars of the shrink disc from the
tapered inner ring. This may require tapping the bolts
with a soft faced hammer or prying lightly between the
outer collars.
C. Remove the gear reducer from the machine shaft.
6. Re-installation
A. It may be possible to re-use the bushings
and shrink disc that are part of the NORD bushing
system. However these components should not be
re-used if they are damaged during removal, or excessively
rusty or corroded.
B. Never re-use any of the bushing kit components without
prior cleaning. Shrink discs must always be disassembled
and thoroughly cleaned before re-using.
C. After cleaning the shrink disc, lubricate between the taper
of the outer clamping disks and the outside of the inner
ring using MOLYKOTE
G-Rapid Plus Paste (product of Dow

Corning) or equivalent. In addition, grease screw threads
and head contact area with multipurpose grease.
TAG:
Shrink Disc Type
& Bolt Torque
Reducer Shaft
Customer Solid Shaft
Locking Screws
Outer Clamping
Discs
Inner Ring
(Ferrule)
Do Not
Lubricate!!
DRIVESYSTEMS
REDUCER MOUNTING
FOOTED & FLANGE MOUNT GEAR UNITS
1. Foot-mounted reducers
When installing the foot-mounted gear unit, observe the
atness specications and bolt tightening torque guidelines
provided in U10060 and make sure the mating mounting
surface and reducer feet are clean and free of debris. Use
of shims under the feet of the gear unit may be required in
order to align the output shaft to the driven equipment.
Make sure that all feet are supported so that the housing
will not distort when it is bolted down. Improper shimming
will cause mis-alignment and may reduce the life of the gear
unit or cause component failure. Dowel pins may be eld-
installed to help prevent misalignment and ensure proper
realignment if removed for service.

I MPORTANT NOTE
Gear units may be subjected to radial loads or side pull,
caused by external chain drives or belt drives. In these
instances it is recommended that the mounting base be
designed with a slide-plate adjustment to accommodate
extra slack in the chain or the belt after the feet are
loosened. When using an external chain or belt drive,
make sure the reducer is sized so that the shaft and
bearings have adequate capacity.
2. Flange-mounted reducers (with B5 ange)
When using the B5 ange to mount the gear unit, the bulk
head plate must be engineered to minimize buckling distor-
tions and support the cantilevered weight of the gear reduc-
er or gearmotor. On the B5 mounting ange NORD provides
a pilot register or and the ange pilot tolerance as listed per
Table 1. When the mating hole is designed with the proper
t, the ange pilot tenon provides a means of accurately po-
sitioning the reducer while the hold-down bolts are properly
secured; once the reducer is secured, the tenon helps prevent
movement of the reducer and it helps locate the center of
the reducer output shaft.

Table : Flange Pilot Tolerance
Above
(in)
To &
Including
(in)
Tolerance
(in)
ISO 286-2
Fit Class
1.969 3.150 +0.0005 / -0.0003 j6
3.150 4.724 +0.0005 / -0.0004 j6
4.724 7.087 +0.0006 / -0.0004 j6
7.087 9.055 +0.0000 / -0.0005 h6
9.055 9.843 +0.0000 / -0.0011 h6
9.843 12.402 +0.0000 / -0.0013 h6
12.402 15.748 +0.0000 / -0.0014 h6
15.748 19.685 +0.0000 / -0.0016 h6
Above
(mm)
To &
Including
(mm)
Tolerance
(mm)
ISO 286-2
Fit Class
50 80 +0.012 / -0.007 j6
80 120 +0.013 / -0.009 j6
120 180 +0.014 / -0.011 j6
180 230 +0.000 / -0.013 h6
230 250 +0.000 / -0.029 h6
250 315 +0.000 / -0.032 h6
315 400 +0.000 / -0.036 h6
400 500 +0.000 / -0.040 h6
When installing the ange mounted gear unit, observe the
atness specications and bolt tightening torque guidelines
provided in U10060. Make sure the mating mounting surface
and reducer ange are clean and free of debris. Use a straight
edge or parallel bar to check for high spots on the mating
mounting surface and remove any raised material around the
mounting holes.
Set the gear unit into place and tighten the bolts until they
are snug. Before nal bolt-tightening check for any mate-
rial gaps between the mating surfaces and if shimming is re-
quired, use U shaped shims at least 2 times the width of the
bolt. Avoid over shimming a very irregular surface as this will
make it very difcult to achieve proper alignment.
I MPORTANT NOTE
For heavy shock applications, it is advisable to eld-in-
stall dowel pins through the mounting ange connec-
tion (in addition to the mounting bolts). This will help
control ange movement or ange rotation and relieve
the mounting bolts from this additional stress.
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
REDUCER MOUNTING
FOOTED & FLANGE MOUNT GEAR UNITS
3. Flange-mounted reducers (with B14 ange)
When using the B14 ange to mount the gear unit, the bulk
head plate must be engineered to minimize buckling distor-
tions and support the cantilevered weight of the gear reducer
or gearmotor. When properly installed, the output ange of
the reducer housing is designed to enable the permissible
torques and radial forces to be reliably transmitted by the
bolt connections.
I MPORTANT NOTE
When using the B14 ange-face for mounting, if dowel
pin holes are provided in addition to the threaded holes,
then it is advisable to also use the proper dowel pins, to
help control ange movement or ange rotation and
relieve the mounting bolts from this additional stress
This is especially important for heavy shock applications.
4. Foot & ange reducer housings
Some gear reducer housings are available with a foot and an
output ange. Units with a foot and a B5 Flange are desig-
nated with the sufx XF after the primary model number and
units with a B14 face-ange are designated with the sufx
XZ after the primary model number. When a gear unit is
provided with both a foot and a ange, the foot is consider
the primary mounting surface. The ange is generally consid-
ered to be the secondary mounting option and it is intended
that this surface be used for auxiliary add on elements that
place minimal load stress on the reducer housing.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
To prevent overstress on the main gear unit housing, never
tighten the reducer mounting feet and the mounting
ange against one-another. Auxiliary add-on elements
that are mounted to the reducer ange, must not transmit
excessive force, torque or vibration to the main gear
housing.

U10500 - 2 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER
SHAFT-MOUNT
WITH RUBBER BUFFERS
1. Purpose of the built-in torque arm lug
The preferred method of installing a shaft-mounted Clinch-
er reducer is to support the weight of the gear unit or
gearmotor assembly from the driven solid machine shaft.
In order to restrain the gearbox, react the torque, and keep
the gear unit from spinning around the shaft, the Clincher
gear units have a built-in torque arm lug or tab cast into the
reducer housing. This torque tab is intended to be used in
conjunction with the NORD Rubber Buffers.
Figure 1: Built-in torque lug
2. Rubber buffers
When specied, NORD provides two rubber buffers that are
installed on either side of the gear units integral torque lug.
When properly used in tandem, on either side of the torque-
arm lug, the rubber buffers help isolate and absorb the load
forces present in the system and increase the reducers service
life by reducing cumulative torsional shock loads.
The primary load force acts in the direction of driven shaft
rotation, reacts the torque of the reducer, keeping the
gearbox from spinning on the shaft.
Additional forces present themselves in the direction
opposite of the shaft rotation, due to the typical slight
out-of-round condition present in the machine shaft. This
condition is the reason most shaft mounted-reducers have
a slight shaft-wobble, which is normal.
For further dampening it is possible to combine several
rubber buffers in a row, on either side of the torque lug.
I MPORTANT NOTE
Please reference Table 1 on page 2 of this manual for
dimensional information.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Always mount at least one rubber buffer on either side
of the reducers torque-arm lug. When using rubber
buffers in tandem, make sure equal numbers are used
on both sides of the torque tab. Failure to do so will not
properly cushion the reducer and can result in excessive
binding, bearing stress, and damage to the reducer.
3. Machine support
WARNI NG

It is the responsibility of the machine builder to design a
support bracket of adequate strength and rigidity, and
supply an appropriate tightening bolt assembly. Failure
to do so may result in injury caused from a damaged or
broken torque-reaction assembly.
A single customer-supplied machine support bracket, of ad-
equate strength and rigidity, can provide adequate restraint
for both directions. This is because when the rubber buffer
system is used, the applied load forces are always parallel to
the retaining bolt and there are no twisting forces induced
onto the bolt in either the clockwise or counter-clockwise
direction. In some cases the customer may desire to supply
a rigid support on either side of the rubber buffers. In these
instances, longer assembly hardware is required.
4. Installation of the rubber buffers
A. Install the Clincher hollow bore reducer onto the
machine shaft. Line up the hole in the reducers torque-arm
lug with the hole in the machines support bracket and
temporarily hold the reducer in place.
B. Properly secure the gear unit assembly to the driven shaft
in an axial direction. If using the NORD Shaft Fixing Kit,
follow the instructions in User Manual U10280.
C. Install the rubber buffers on either side of the gear units
torque-arm lug. Apply a thread locking compound to the
end of the xing bolt. Then place the xing bolt through
the rubber buffers, torque-arm lug and rigid machine
support bracket and loosely secure the nut onto the end
of the bolt.
D. Tighten the xing bolt and nut until lightly snug until all
of the free play is eliminated from the rubber buffer
assembly. Then snug the xing bolt assembly by tightening
an additional 1/4 to 1/2 turn.
WARNI NG

To help prevent damage to the rubber buffers, avoid
over-tightening.
I MPORTANT NOTE
A min. of (2) rubber buffers are required for each unit.
For larger size CLINCHERS
, NORD offers the heavy-duty

rubber buffer (Option VG).
A metric xing bolt is preferred for rubber buffer
assembly. NORD recommends a minimum ISO Grade
8.8 xing bolt.
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER
SHAFT-MOUNT
WITH RUBBER BUFFERS
Table 1: Rubber buffer assembly/typical dimensions
Standard Rubber Buffer Assembly Option (G) Heavy Duty Rubber Buffer Assembly Option (VG)
CD
C
A
C
B
CM
CM
d

x

I
FD
CD
C
B
CM
C
A
CM
d

x

I
FD
Type Rubber CB CA CD CM Bolt FD SFD
Buffer P/N inch inch inch inch d x l lb inch
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [metric] [kN] [mm]
SK0182NB..G 29603000
0.43 1.18 0.59 0.39
M10 x 70
217 0.06
[11] [30] [15] [10] [0.967] [1.5]
SK0282NB..G 29603000
0.43 1.18 0.59 0.47
M10 x 70
234 0.07
[11] [30] [15] [12] [1.04] [1.7]
SK1282..G 29603000
0.43 1.18 0.59 0.55
M10 x 80
504 0.14
[11] [30] [15] [14] [2.24] [3.6]
SK1382NB..G 29603000
0.43 1.18 0.59 0.55
M10 x 80
402 0.11
[11] [30] [15] [14] [1.79] [2.8]
SK2282..G
29604000
0.49 1.57 0.59 0.63
M12 x 90
600 0.07
SK2382..G [12.5] [40] [15] [16] [2.67] [1.8]
SK3282..G
29604000
0.49 1.57 0.59 0.71
M12 x 90
935 0.11
SK3382..G [12.5] [40] [15] [18] [4.16] [2.9]
SK4282..G
29606000
0.83 2.36 1.18 0.87
M20 x 150
1661 0.29
SK4382..G [21] [60] [30] [22] [7.39] [7.3]
SK5282..G
29606000
0.83 2.36 1.18 1.1
M20 x 150
2133 0.37
SK5382..G [21] [60] [30] [28] [9.49] [9.4]
SK6282..G
29608000
0.98 3.15 1.57 1.38
M24 x 190
3779 0.36
SK6382..G [25] [80] [40] [35] [16.81] [9.2]
SK7282..G
29608000
0.98 3.15 1.57 1.57
M24 x 200
4676 0.45
SK7382..G [25] [80] [40] [40] [20.8] [11.4]
SK8282..G
29610000
1.22 3.94 1.97 1.97
M30 x 260
6382 0.64
SK8382..G [31] [100] [50] [50] [28.39] [16.3]
SK9282..G
29610000
1.22 3.94 1.97 2.17
M30 x 260
9777 0.98
SK9382..G [31] [100] [50] [55] [43.49] [24.9]
Type Rubber CB CA CD CM Bolt FD SFD
Buffer P/N inch inch inch inch d x l lb inch
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [metric] [kN] [mm]
SK7282.VG
29620850
0.98 3.35 2.36 1.57
M24 x 240
4676 0.48
SK7382.VG [25] [85] [60] [40] [20.8] [12.2]
SK8282.VG
29621100
1.22 4.33 3.54 1.97
M30 x 340
6382 0.76
SK8382.VG [31] [110] [90] [50] [28.39] [19.3]
SK9282.VG
29621400
1.22 5.51 4.33 2.17
M30 x 380
9777 0.83
SK9382.VG [31] [140] [110] [55] [43.49] [21.2]
SK10282.VG
29621800
1.22 5.51 4.33 3.15
M30 x 430
12670 1.08
SK10382.VG [31] [140] [110] [80] [56.36] [27.4]
SK11282.VG
29621800
1.93 7.09 5.91 3.54
M48 x 550
18185 1.52
SK11382.VG [49] [180] [150] [90] [80.89] [38.5]
SK12382.VG 29621800
1.93 7.09 5.91 3.54
M48 x 550
23720 1.98
[49] [180] [150] [90] [105.51] [50.2]
U10580 - 2 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
FD = Force working on the
rubber buffer
d x l = diameter x length
c = thickness
S
FD
= Distance buffers
compress at force (FD)
A metric xing bolt is preferred
for rubber buffer assembly. NORD
recommends minimum ISO Grade
8.8 xing bolt as a minimum.
DRIVESYSTEMS
RIGHT-ANGLE SHAFT-MOUNT
WITH TORQUE ARM (D)
1. Torque arm (D)
The preferred method of installing a shaft-mounted reducer
is to support the weight of the gear unit or gearmotor as-
sembly from the driven solid machine shaft. A torque arm
is required in order to restrain the gearbox, react the load
torque, and keep the gear unit from spinning around the
shaft.
Table 1 (Page 2) provides a list of Torque-Arm (D) part num-
bers available based upon reducer series and type. The
torque-arm is a tear-drop shaped bracket that is mounted to
the B14 ange-face of the reducer. Each torque-arm bracket
is supplied with a resilient rubber bushing located at the
fastening hole-end of the bracket.

I MPORTANT NOTE
The side of the reducer that the torque arm is mounted
on, and the angular position can be specied at time
of order. Consult the appropriate NORD catalog for
specic Torque Arm (D) mounting options and ordering
guidelines.
2. Purpose of the built-in resilient rubber bushing
The resilient rubber bushing installed into the fastening hole
end of the torque-arm helps isolate and absorb all the load
forces present in the system and increase the reducers service
life by reducing cumulative torsional shock loads.
rotation, reacts the load torque of the reducer, and
prevents the gearbox from spinning on the shaft.

STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Always make sure that the Torque Arm (D) has the
resilient rubber bushing installed into the fastening
hole end of the torque arm. Failure to do so will not
properly cushion the reducer and can result in excessive
binding, bearing stress, and damage to the reducer.
3. Machine support
The user must supply a suitably strong and rigid mating ma-
chine support that provides load bearing capacity on both
sides of the torque-arm bracket.
WARNI NG

4. Installation of the right-angle reducer
with torque arm (D)
A. Make sure the Torque-Arm (D) is mounted in the correct
position on the reducer.
The torque-arm can be repositioned on the as-received
unit by removing the xing screws, re-position the
torque-arm in the correct location, and re-securing the
xing screws to the proper tightening torque, as
indicated in Table 2 (Page 2).
If the torque-arm was shipped loose, position the torque-
arm in the correct location on the gear unit, and secure
the torque-arm with the proper xing screws & tighten-
ing torque, as indicated in Table 2 (Page 2).
B. Install the right-angle hollow bore reducer onto the
machine shaft. Line up the hole in the reducers torque-
arm with the hole in the machines support bracket and
temporarily hold the reducer in place
C. Properly secure the gear unit assembly to the driven shaft
in an axial direction.
D. Place the fastening bolt through the rigid machine
support bracket and reducer torque-arm. Then apply a
thread locking compound to the end of the xing bolt
and loosely secure the nut onto the end of the bolt.
E. Tighten the xing bolt to the proper tightening torque as
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
RIGHT-ANGLE SHAFT-MOUNT
WITH TORQUE ARM (D)
NORD Gear Limited
Table 1 - Torque Arm (D) with rubber buffer
For all 90.1 Series Helical-Bevel gear units, NORD also offers a
bottom mount Torque Arm (K). See User Manual U10620.
For the large 90.1 Series Helical-Bevel gear units sizes: SK9082.1,
SK9086.1, SK9092.1, and SK9096.1, please use the Torque Arm (K).
A metric xing bolt is preferred for fastening the Torque-Arm(D)
to the machine support bracket.
Series Type Torque Arm
Assembly
P/N
Rubber
Buffer*
P/N
Reducer
Mounting Screws
Mounting
Screw
P/N
Fastening
Hole
in [mm]
Fastening
Bolt Size
92 Series
Helical- Bevel
SK92172AZD 69290600 29602505 (Qty 8) M6 X 16 SHCS 22106165 0.41 [10.5] M10
90.1 Series
Helical-Bevel
SK9012.1AZD/SK9013.1AZD 61090600 29602505 (Qty 7) M8 X 20 SHCS 22108205 0.41 [10.5] M10
SK9042.1AZD/SK9043.1AZD 68490600 29605205 (Qty 7) M12 X 35 SHCS 22112350 0.98 [25] M24
SK9052.1AZD/SK9053.1AZD 68590600 29605205 (Qty 7) M12 X 35 SHCS 22112350 0.98 [25] M24
SK9072.1AZD 68690600 29605205 (Qty 7) M16 X 45 SHCS 22116450 0.98 [25] M24
Helical-Worm SK02040AZD 60190600 29602505 (Qty 4) M6 X 20 SHCS 22106205 0.41 [10.5] M10
SK02050AZD/SK13050AZD 60290600 29602505 (Qty 4) M8 X 20 SHCS 22108205 0.41 [10.5] M10
MINICASE
Worm
1SM31AZD 60390600 29602505 (Qty 4) M6 X 20 SHCS 22106205 0.41 [10.5] M10
1SM40AZD/2SM40AZD 60490600 29602505 (Qty 4) M8 X 20 SHCS 22008206 0.41 [10.5] M10
FLEXBLOC
Worm
SK1SI31AZD 60393900 29602505 (Qty 4) M6 X 16 SHCS 22106160 0.41 [10.5] M10
Thread Size Tightening Torque
ISO Grade 8.8 ISO Grade 10.9
(mm) (lb-in) (lb-ft) (N-m) (lb-in) (lb-ft) (Nm)
M6 97 8 11 142 12 16
M8 239 20 27 345 29 39
M10 469 39 53 690 58 78
M12 814 68 92 1,195 100 135
M16 2,036 170 230 2,965 247 335
M20 4,071 339 460 5,841 487 660
M24 6,992 583 790 10,178 848 1,150
* Rubber Buffer
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL SHAFT-MOUNT
WITH BOTTOM MOUNT TORQUE ARM (K)
1. Torque arm (K)
The preferred method of installing a shaft-mounted reducer
is to support the weight of the gear unit or gearmotor as-
sembly from the driven solid machine shaft. A torque arm is
required in order to restrain the gearbox, react to the load
torque, and keep the gear unit from spinning around the
shaft.
Table 1 (Page 2) provides a list of Torque-Arm (K) part num-
bers available for the 90.1 Series Helical-Bevel gear units. The
Torque Arm (K) is secured to the base of the reducer. On most
sizes there is an integral resilient rubber bushing located at
the fastening hole-end of the torque arm. On the larger sizes,
rubber buffers are used in conjunction with the torque arm
and when properly used they are applied in tandem, on ei-
ther side of the torque arm lug.

I MPORTANT NOTE
When ordering the Torque Arm (K) one can specify
which side of the reducer to mount the fastening hole
that bolts to the machine support bracket. Consult the
appropriate NORD catalog for specic Torque Arm (K)
mounting options and ordering guidelines.
2. Purpose of the rubber bushing or rubber buffers
Regardless if the Torque Arm (K) is supplied with the inte-
gral rubber bushing or whether separate rubber buffers are
required, the bushing/buffers help isolate and absorb all the
load forces present in the system and increase the reducers
service life by reducing cumulative torsional shock loads.
rotation, reacts the load torque of the reducer, and
prevents the gearbox from spinning on the shaft.

STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Always make sure that the Torque Arm (K) is used in
conjunction with the required rubber bushing/s. Failure
to do so will not properly cushion the reducer and can
result in excessive binding, bearing stress, and damage
to the reducer.
3. Machine support
The user must supply a suitably strong and rigid mating ma-
chine support that provides load bearing capacity on both
sides of the machine support bracket.
WARNI NG

4. Installation of the right-angle reducer
with torque arm (K)
A. Make sure the Torque-Arm (K) is mounted so that the
machine fastening hole is on the correct side of the reducer.
The torque-arm can be repositioned on the as-received
unit by removing the xing screws, re-position the
torque-arm in the correct location, and re-securing the
xing screws to the proper tightening torque, as
If the torque-arm was shipped loose, position the torque-
arm in the correct location on the gear unit, and secure
the torque-arm with the proper xing screws & tighten-
ing torque, as indicated in Table 2 (Page 2).
B. Install the right-angle hollow bore reducer onto the
machine shaft. Line up the hole in the reducers torque-
arm with the hole in the machines support bracket ,and
temporarily hold the reducer in place
C. Properly secure the gear unit assembly to the driven shaft
in an axial direction.
D. Apply thread locking compound to the end of the xing
bolt, then place the fastening bolt through the rigid
machine support bracket and reducer torque-arm and
loosely secure the nut onto the end of the bolt.
E. If the torque arm has an integral rubber bushing
follow step F and skip steps G-H. If the torque arm uses
rubber buffers skip forward to steps G-H.
F. Tighten the xing bolt to the proper tightening torque as
G. Install the rubber buffers on either side of the gear units
torque-arm lug and place the xing bolt through the
rubber buffers and torque-arm lug and into the rigid
machine support bracket.
H. Tighten the xing bolt and nut lightly snug, until all the
free-play is eliminated from the rubber buffer assembly.
Then snug the xing bolt assembly by tightening an
additional to turn.
WARNI NG

To prevent damage to the rubber buffers, avoid over-
tightening.
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL SHAFT-MOUNT
WITH BOTTOM MOUNT TORQUE ARM (K)
NORD Gear Limited
Torque Arm (K) with integrated bushing Torque Arm (K) with rubber buffer
FD
d

x

l
Fastening Hole
Mounting Screws
Type Torque
Arm
P/N
Reducer Hardware
Hex Head Cap Screws
+ Lock Washer
Mounting
Screw
P/N
Lock
Washer
P/N
Rubber
Buffer
P/N
Fastening
Hole
In [mm]
Fastening
Bolt Size
Bolt
d x l
[metric]
FD
lb
[N]
SFD
inch
[mm]
SK9012.1...K
SK9013.1...K
68190600
M10 X 30 + A10
(Qty 3 Ea.)
22010300 28560106 N/A 0.41 [10.5] M10 N/A N/A N/A
SK9016.1...K
SK9017.1...K
68190600
M10 X 30 + A10
(Qty 3 Ea.)
22010300 28560106 N/A 0.41 [10.5] M10 N/A N/A N/A
SK9022.1...K
SK9023.1...K
68290610
M12 X 35 + A12
(Qty 3 Ea.)
22012350 28560126 N/A 0.65 [16.5] M16 N/A N/A N/A
SK9032.1...K
SK9033.1...K
68390610
M12 X 35 + A12
(Qty 3 Ea.)
22012350 28560126 N/A 0.65 [16.5] M16 N/A N/A N/A
SK9042.1...K
SK9043.1...K
68490610
M16 X 40 + A16
(Qty 3 Ea.)
22016400 28560166 N/A 0.98 [25] M24 N/A N/A N/A
SK9052.1...K
SK9053.1...K
68590620
M16 X 40 + A16
(Qty 3 Ea.)
22016450 28560166 N/A 0.98 [25] M24 N/A N/A N/A
SK9072.1...K 68690620
M24 X 60 + A24
(Qty 4 Ea.)
22024060 28560246 N/A 0.98 [25] M24 N/A N/A N/A
SK9082.1...K
SK9082.1...SHK
68819010
M24 x 65 + A24
(Qty 4 Ea.)
22024650 22024650 29610000 1.22 [31] M30 M30 x 260
5300 0.53
[23.64] [13.5]
SK9086.1...K
SK9086.1...SHK
68819010
M24 x 65 + A24
(Qty 4 Ea.)
22024650 22024650 29610000 1.22 [31] M30 M30 x 260
6900 0.69
[30.77] [17.6]
SK9092.1...SHK 68919010
M36 x 90 + A36
(Qty 4 Ea.)
22036900 28560366 29610000 1.22 [31] M30 M30 x 260
10300 1.03
[45.71] [26.2]
SK9096.1...SHK 69019000
M42 x 120 + A42
(Qty 4 Ea.)
22042120 28560426 29621800 1.93 [49] M48 M48 x 550
12,500 1.06
[55.56] [27.0]
Thread Size Tightening torque
ISO Grade 8.8 ISO Grade 10.9
[mm] [lb-in] [lb-ft] [N-m] [lb-in] [lb-ft] [N-m]
M10 469 39 53 690 58 78
M12 814 68 92 1,195 100 135
M16 2,036 170 230 2,965 247 335
M20 4,071 339 460 5,841 487 660
M24 6,992 583 790 10,178 848 1,150
M30 14,161 1,180 1,600 19,914 1,660 2,250
M36 24,605 2,050 2,780 34,606 2,884 3,910
M42 39,563 3,297 4,470 55,671 4,639 6,290
M48 59,300 4,942 6,700 84,436 7,036 9,540
For most all 90.1 series Helical-Bevel gear units, an optional
tear-drop shaped side -mounted torque arm (D) is available.
See user manual U10600.
A metric xing bolt is preferred for fastening the torque arm
(K) to the machine support bracket.
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL & BEVEL REDUCER LUBRICATION
1. Importance of proper lubrication
Proper gearbox lubrication is essential in order to reduce
friction, heat, and component wear. Lubricants reduce heat
and wear by inserting a protective uid boundary between
mating parts and preventing direct metal to metal contact.
Lubricants also help prevent corrosion and oxidation, mini-
mize foam, improve heat transfer, optimize reducer efciency,
absorb shock loads and reduce noise.
Most NORD reducers are shipped from the factory with a
pre-determined oil Il level in accordance to the specied
reducer size and mounting position.
2. Standard oil type
The following tables indicate the standard oil ll type used.
Please see user manual U11000 for more specic information
and for optional helical and bevel gear lubricants:
Serviceable Gear Units
Helical In-line
Standard Oil Fill:
ISO VG 220, Mineral Oil
Clincher Parallel-Shaft
Right-Angle Bevel
NORDBLOC
Series In-line
NORDBLOC
.1 Series In-line
Standard Series In-line
I MPORTANT NOTE
For shipping purposes, the following large Clincher gear
units are supplied without oil:
Clincher Sizes SK11282, SK11382 and SK12382
Maintenance-free / Lubricated For Life Gear Units
Clincher sizes SK0182NB,
SK0282NB & SK1382NB
Standard Oil Fill:
ISO VG220 SHC/PAO
Synthetic Oil
NORDBLOC
Sizes SK172,
SK272, SK371F, SK372, SK373,
SK320
I MPORTANT NOTE
Maintenance-free units are supplied as sealed units with no
vent-plug. Consult NORD prior to ordering if interested in
ordering any of the above sizes as serviceable gear units.
I MPORTANT NOTE
Consult the sticker adjacent to the ll plug to determine
the type of lubricant installed at the factory. Some units
have special lubricants designed to operate in certain
environments or intended to extend the service life or
service temperature range of the lubricant. If in doubt
about which lubricant is needed for a certain applica-
tion, please contact NORD Gear.
3. Lubrication replacement
If the gear unit is lled with mineral oil, the lubricant should
be replaced at least after every 10,000 operating hours or
after every two years. If the gear unit is lled with synthetic
oil, the lubricant should be replaced at least after every
20,000 operating hours or after every four years. Often gear
reducers are exposed to extreme ambient conditions, hostile
environments, wet conditions, or dirty and dusty operating
areas. Especially in these situations, it is important to estab-
lish a condition-based oil service interval.
4. Oil viscosity
Viscosity, or the oils resistance to shear under load, is often
considered the single most important property of any gear oil.
Often one will consider making a viscosity correction to
the oil to improve the performance when operating the
gear unit at low temperature or high temperature.
In cases of extreme load conditions, gear pairs and antifric-
tion bearings may be more susceptible to sliding or scufng
wear. In these operating conditions, it may also be ben-
ecial to consider an increased lubrication viscosity and/or
a lubrication with improved antiwear additive packages.
I MPORTANT NOTE
The user should consult with their primary lubrication
supplier before considering changes in oil type or viscosity.
5. Maximum oil sump temperature limit
To prevent reducer overheating, the reducers maximum oil
sump temperature limit must not be exceeded for prolonged
periods of operation (up to 3 hours continuous operation
depending upon reducer size).
Oil Type Maximum Oil Temperature Limit
NORD AGMA 9005-D94
Mineral 80-85C (176-185F) 95C (203F)
Synthetic 105C (220F) 107C (225F)
I MPORTANT NOTE
Use caution when specifying gear reducers for high tem-
perature service. If there is concern about exceeding the
allowable safe operating temperatures, please consult
NORD to discuss alternatives.
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL & BEVEL REDUCER LUBRICATION
6. The importance of routine oil analysis
Routine oil analysis, sound lubrication practices, and good
tracking of oil performance trends will help establish prop-
er lubrication maintenance and change-out intervals. To
maximize equipment reliability, NORD Gear generally recom-
mends a condition-based lubrication maintenance program.
One may take exceptions to this general recommendation
on sealed-for-life or maintenance-free gear units or smaller
and less costly gear units. In these instances, the replacement
cost of the gear unit is often small compared to the costs
associated with this type of oil analysis program.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
NORD suggests replacing the gear oil if oil analysis indicates
any of the following:
Viscosity has changed by approximately 10% or more.
Debris particles (silicon, dust, dirt or sand) exceed 25 ppm.
Iron content exceeds 150-200 ppm.
Water content is greater than 0.05% (500 ppm).
The total acid number (TAN) tests indicate a signicant
level of oxidative break-down of the oil, and a critical
reduction in performance; If the TAN number measured
changes by more than 5% over the new oil, then an
oil change would be recommended.
7. Mounting position and oil ll quantity
All NORD Gear reducers are shipped from the factory with
a pre-determined oil Il level in accordance to the specied
reducer size and mounting position. For additional
information, please see the seperate mounting position
diagrams and the corresponding oil ll quantity tables for
the specied gear unit.
The gearbox nametag will indicate the mounting position
that was provided. For mounting orientations other than
shown in the mounting position charts, please consult NORD
Gear.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Actual oil volume can vary slightly depending upon the
gear case size, mounting and ratio. Prior to commissioning
the reducer, check the oil-ll level using the reducers oil-
level plug and drain or add additional oil as needed. The
minimum acceptable oil level is 0.15 in (4mm) below the oil
level hole.
8. Oil plug locations
to the specied mounting position. All standard plugs are
metric and utilize sealing gaskets between the head of the
plug and the reducer housing.
9. Drain and ll-level plugs
All reducer drain plugs are metric socket head cap screws. For
easier identication, it is NORDs standard practice to provide
a hex-head screw for the ll-level plug. For ease of draining
the used oil from the gear reducer, use the socket head screw
located at the lowest part of the gearbox.
Drain Plug Fill Level Plug
10. Vent plug locations
Reducer venting allows for air pressure differences that occur
during operation, between the inner space of the reducer
and the atmosphere, while ensuring leak-free operation. The
AUTOVENT is standard for all vented gear units, unless oth-
erwise noted.
AUTOVENT - The AUTOVENT helps prevent bearing and
gear damage by behaving like a check valve to block the
entry of foreign material (water, dust, corrosives, etc.). The
breather opens at approximately 2-3 psi during operation
and closes tightly as the gearbox cools. This option is perfect
for humid conditions and wash-down environments, help-
ing to maintain proper oil cleanliness, and reducing foaming
and oxidation. NORD may choose to offer one of two style
options as shown in Figure 1. The Type 2 AUTOVENT comes
closed upon delivery with a transportation sealing plug (see
Warning).
Figure 1 AUTOVENT Types
Type 1 Type 2 with transportation plug
Open Vent - An optional open vent can be supplied by NORD.
The open vent comes closed upon delivery with a transporta-
tion sealing plug (see Warning).
WARNI NG

To prevent build-up of excessive pressure, sealed vents
must be activated as shown prior to gear unit start up.
Sealed vent Activated vent
Filtered Vent - NORD may offer an optional ltered vent,
which allows gases to permeate, but does not allow dust and
debris to pass through the vent.
U10750 - 2 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
VL2 & VL3
EXTENDED BEARING LUBRICATION
U10760 - 1 of 1
1. VL2 Spread Bearing Design
NORD offers reinforced output shaft bearings with
increased bearing distance. The lower bearing is
a oversized, double row spherical bearing, which
absorbs high overhung and thrust loads while provid-
ing a longer bearing service life. The spherical roller
bearing is especially useful in compensating for align-
ment errors in long agitator shafts. The VL2 spread
bearing design is commonly used for shredders,
mixers, overhead conveyors or applications requiring
increased bearing load carrying capacities. Included
with the VL2 design is a grease tting for the lower
bearing and a removable plug to allow excess grease to
purge from the bearing cavity.
Quadrilip Sealing System y
Oil Slinger
Dry Cavity
Spherical
Rol
p
ler Bearing
Output
Flan
p
ge
Grease rr Pa PP cked kk
Double Lip Seal
Sight
Tube
gg Grease Fitting
C
NORD Gear Limited
2. VL3 Spread Bearing Design with Oil Safe Dry Cavity
The VL3 dry cavity design adds additional oil leak protective measures to the VL2 spread bearing design. NORDs
Quadralip
TM
sealing system prevents oil from leaking from the gearbox into the VL2 ange. If in any case oil
does leak past the Quadralip
TM
seals, it would ow down to the oil slinger mounted onto the shaft. As the shaft
rotates, the oil will sling off into the dry cavity. A sight tube is provided for dry cavity inspection. At the bottom
of the spread bearing ange is greased packed, double lip seal.
3. Service Guidelines for the Extended Bearing Flange
The spherical roller bearing on the extended bearing housing should be re-greased with 0.75 to 1.0 ounces (20-25
grams) of grease after every 2,500 hours of service or at least every 6 months. Prior to re-greasing the screw plug
located opposite to the grease nipple should be unscrewed. After re-greasing the screw plug must be reinstalled
and tightened. The extended bearing is factory assembled with the proper amount and type of grease. The type
of grease supplied depends upon the type of oil specied at time of order.
Bearing Grease Options
Reducer Oil Type Grease Type Thickener Type NLGI Grade Ambient Temperature Range Manufacture Brand / Type
Mineral Standard Li-Complex NLGI 2 -30 to 60 C (-22 to 140 F) Mobil Grease XHP222
Synthetic High-Temperature Polyurea NLGI 2 -25 to 80 C (-13 to 176 F) Mobil / Polyrex EP 2
Food-Grade Food-Grade Al-Complex NLGI 2 -25 to 40 C (-13 to 104 F) Mobil / FM222
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Grease compatibility depends upon the type of thickener or soap complex used, the base oil type
suspended within the thickener, and the type of additives used. The user should check with the
lubrication supplier before making substitutions in brand and type in order to assure compatibility and to
avoid causing possible damage to the extended bearing.
(VL3)
(VL3)
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM REDUCER LUBRICATION
1. Importance of proper lubrication
Lubricants also help prevent corrosion and oxidation,
minimize foam, improve heat transfer, optimize reducer ef-
ciency, absorb shock loads and reduce noise.
NORD helical-worm reducers are shipped from the factory
with a pre-determined oil Il level in accordance to the
specied reducer size and mounting position.
NORD helical worm gear reducers are lled with ISO VG 680
synthetic-hydrocarbon/polyalphaolen (SHC/PAO) worm gear
oil.
SHC/PAO worm gear oils have good high and low
temperature stability, are compatible with most paint
and seal types, and are miscible with mineral oils.
SHC/PAO worm gear oils also contain a small amount of
organic ester and other antiwear (AW) packages to
offer improved lubrication conditions, especially in the
worm mesh, where a sideways sliding motion prevails.
and for optional helical worm lubricants.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
In worm gears avoid using extreme pressure (EP) gear oils
containing sulfur-phosphorous chemistries; these additives
can react adversely with bronze worm gears, and acceler-
ate wear.
I MPORTANT NOTE
Consult the sticker adjacent to the ll plug to determine
the type of lubricant installed at the factory. Some units
have special lubricants designed to operate in certain en-
vironments or intended to extend the service life or ser-
vice temperature range of the lubricant. If in doubt about
which lubricant is needed for a certain application, please
contact NORD Gear.
3. Lubrication replacement
The helical-worm gear oil should be replaced at least after
every 20,000 operating hours or after every four years. Often
gear reducers are exposed to extreme ambient conditions,
hostile environments, wet conditions, or dirty and dusty op-
erating areas. Especially in these situations, it is important to
establish a condition-based oil service interval.
4. Efciency
Helical worm gears reach efciencies up to 92% and are gen-
erally much more efcient than worm-only gear units. How-
ever, it is important to consider the following, when using
worm gears.
Worm gears reach their peak rated efciency, after they
undergo a natural run-in process (up to 25 hours operating
time at maximum rated load). Catalog published power
and torque gures are based upon the rated efciency
after the run-in is complete.
Worm gears have naturally lower startup efciencies com-
pared to operating efciencies. As input speed increases
the enhanced hydrodynamic effects of the oil result in less
tooth friction and increased worm gear efciency.
I MPORTANT NOTE
Worm gear reducers applied in cold temperature service,
may require increased motor power for the following
reasons:
Lower operating temperatures, cause lubrication viscosity
to increase in both the gearbox and in the moving areas
of the driven machine.
Worm-gears have naturally lower start-up efciencies
compared to operating efciencies.
In extreme cases, one might need to consider increasing
the motor power and lowering the oil viscosity
5. Oil Viscosity
wear. In these operating conditions, it may also be ben-
I MPORTANT NOTE
The user should consult with their primary lubrication sup-
plier before considering changes in oil type or viscosity.
periods of operation (up to 3 hours continuous operation de-
pending upon reducer size).
NORD AGMA 9005-D94
Synthetic 105C (220F) 107C (225F)
I MPORTANT NOTE
Use caution when specifying gear reducers for high
temperature service. If there is concern about exceeding
the allowable safe operating temperatures, please consult
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM REDUCER LUBRICATION
7. The importance of routine oil analysis
Routine oil analysis, sound lubrication practices, and good
tracking of oil performance trends will help establish prop-
er lubrication maintenance and change-out intervals. To
maximize equipment reliability, NORD Gear generally recom-
mends a condition-based lubrication maintenance program.
One may take exceptions to this general recommendation
on sealed-for-life or maintenance-free gear units or smaller
and less costly gear units. In these instances, the replacement
cost of the gear unit is often small compared to the costs
associated with this type of oil analysis program.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
NORD suggests replacing the gear oil if oil analysis indicates
any of the following:
Viscosity has changed by approximately 10% or more.
Debris particles (silicon, dust, dirt or sand) exceed 25 ppm.
Iron content exceeds 150-200 ppm.
Water content is greater than 0.05% (500 ppm).
The total acid number (TAN) tests indicate a signicant
level of oxidative break-down of the oil, and a critical
reduction in performance; If the TAN number measured
changes by more than 5% over the new oil, then an
oil change would be recommended.
8. Mounting position and oil ll quantity
All NORD Gear reducers are shipped from the factory with
a pre-determined oil Il level in accordance to the specied
reducer size and mounting position. For additional
information, please see the seperate mounting position
diagrams and the corresponding oil ll quantity tables for
the specied gear unit.
The gearbox nametag will indicate the mounting position
that was provided. For mounting orientations other than
shown in the mounting position charts, please consult NORD
Gear.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
gear case size, mounting and ratio. Prior to commissioning
the reducer, check the oil-ll level using the reducers oil-
level plug and drain or add additional oil as needed. The
minimum acceptable oil level is 0.15 in (4mm) below the oil
level hole.
9. Oil plug locations
to the specied mounting position. All standard plugs are
metric and utilize sealing gaskets between the head of the
plug and the reducer housing.
10. Drain and ll-level plugs
All reducer drain plugs are metric socket head cap screws. For
easier identication, it is NORDs standard practice to provide
a hex-head screw for the ll-level plug. For ease of draining
the used oil from the gear reducer, use the socket head screw
located at the lowest part of the gearbox.
Drain Plug Fill Level Plug
11. Vent plug locations
Reducer venting allows for air pressure differences that occur
during operation, between the inner space of the reducer
and the atmosphere, while ensuring leak-free operation. The
AUTOVENT is standard for all vented gear units, unless oth-
erwise noted.
AUTOVENT - The AUTOVENT helps prevent bearing and
gear damage by behaving like a check valve to block the
entry of foreign material (water, dust, corrosives, etc.). The
breather opens at approximately 2-3 psi during operation
and closes tightly as the gearbox cools. This option is perfect
for humid conditions and wash-down environments, help-
ing to maintain proper oil cleanliness, and reducing foaming
and oxidation. NORD may choose to offer one of two style
options as shown in Figure 1. The Type 2 AUTOVENT comes
closed upon delivery with a transportation sealing plug (see
Warning).
Figure 1 AUTOVENT Types
Type 1 Type 2 with transportation plug
Open Vent - An optional open vent can be supplied by NORD.
The open vent comes closed upon delivery with a transporta-
tion sealing plug (see Warning).
WARNI NG

To prevent build-up of excessive pressure, sealed vents
must be activated as shown prior to gear unit start up.
Filtered Vent - NORD may offer an optional ltered vent,
which allows gases to permeate, but does not allow dust and
debris to pass through the vent.
U10770 - 2 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
MINICASE
WORM
REDUCER LUBRICATION
U10790 - 1 of 1
1. Importance of proper gearbox lubrication
Lubricants also help prevent corrosion and oxidation,
minimize foam, improve heat transfer, optimize reducer
efciency, absorb shock loads and reduce noise.
2. Maintenance free design
NORD MINICASE worm gear reducers are designed to be
maintenance-free and are supplied completely sealed. They
are factory oil-lled with a pre-determined oil Il amount
in accordance to the specied reducer size and mounting
position. The synthetic lubrication used is suitable for the life
of the product so the MINICASE is inherently maintenance
free.
NORD MINICASE worm gear reducers are lled with ISO VG
680 synthetic-hydrocarbon/polyalphaolen (SHC/PAO) worm
gear oil.
SHC/PAO worm gear oils have good high and low
temperature stability, are compatible with most paint and
seal types, and are miscible with mineral oils.
SHC/PAO worm gear oils also contain a small amount of
organic ester and other antiwear (AW) packages to
offer improved lubrication conditions, especially in the
worm mesh, where a sideways sliding motion prevails.
and for optional MINICASE worm lubricants.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
In worm gears avoid using extreme pressure (EP) gear oils
containing sulfur-phosphorous chemistries; these additives
can react adversely with bronze worm gears, and acceler-
ate wear.
4. Efciency
It is important to consider the following, when using worm
gears.
time at maximum rated load). Catalog published power
and torque gures are based upon the rated efciency
after the run-in is complete.
Worm gears have naturally lower startup efciencies com-
pared to operating efciencies. As input speed increases
I MPORTANT NOTE
Worm gear reducers applied in cold temperature service,
may require increased motor power for the following rea-
sons:
the motor power and/or lowering the oil viscosity.
5. Oil Viscosity
wear. In these operating conditions, it is also may be ben-
I MPORTANT NOTE
The user should consult with their primary lubrication sup-
plier before considering changes in oil type or viscosity.
periods of operation (up to 3 hours continuous operation de-
pending upon reducer size).
NORD AGMA 9005-D94
Synthetic 105C (220F) 107C (225F)
I MPORTANT NOTE
Use caution when specifying gear reducers for high tem-
perature service. If there is concern about exceeding the
allowable safe operating temperatures, please consult
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
FLEXBLOC
WORM REDUCER LUBRICATION

1. Importance of proper gearbox lubrication
Proper gearbox lubrication is essential in order to reduce friction,
heat, and component wear. Lubricants reduce heat and wear by
inserting a protective uid boundary between mating parts
and preventing direct metal to metal contact. Lubricants also
help prevent corrosion and oxidation, minimize foam, improve
heat transfer, optimize reducer efciency, absorb shock loads
and reduce noise.
2. FLEXBLOC - Sealed or vented options available
FLEXBLOC worm gear modules are designed to operate sealed
or vented. They are factory oil lled for any mounting congu-
ration with a pre-determined oil level (See User Manual U13300).
There are four factors that need to be considered when deciding
to use a sealed unit versus a vented unit.
A. If the duty cycle is intermittent, the run times are short, and
any build-up of internal pressure or temperature is low to
modest, the sealed unit option can be used.
B. If running continuous under moderate to high load, worm
gears generate moderate to high operating temperature and
a build-up of internal pressure. In these instances a vented
option is usually suggested.
C. By design radial shaft seals produce a hydrodynamic pumping
action to help push lubricant back into the gear unit. This
causes the unit to ingest some air. Tests have shown that this
only causes a small pressure increase (1-2 psi) but when com-
bined with factor B this minimal pressure can seem signicant.
D. When the environment is contaminated with water, dirt,
etc., which can be ingested into the breather, increased
wear of bearings and gearing, and lubrication break-
down, can result. In these instances the sealed option or
an AUTOVENT
should be considered.
Typical Execution Sealed maintenance free design
The FLEXBLOC is supplied completely sealed and the units lu-
brication is considered suitable for the life of the product, so it is
inherently maintenance free.
Optional Execution A Field Installable Vent Kit Is Ordered
When ordered, NORD can provide eld installable vent kit op-
tion for most all FLEXBLOC Gear units.
Open Vent Kit
P/N 22008004 (Vent)
P/N 25308121 (Gasket)
Autovent
: P/N 22008050 (Includes Gasket)

WARNI NG

To prevent build-up of excessive pressure, sealed vents must
be activated as shown prior to gear unit start up.
FLEXBLOC worm gear reducers are oil-lled as follows:
FLEXBLOC inch hollow-bore modules are factory-lled with
an ISO VG220 food grade synthetic polyglycol lubricant
(suitable for NSF-H1 incidental contact).
FLEXBLOC metric hollow-bore modules are factory lled
with an ISO VG220 polyglycol lubricant (unless special ordered).
concerning FLEXBLOC lubricants.
4. Efciency
It is important to consider the following, when ordering worm
gears.
time at maximum rated load). Catalog published power and
torque gures are based upon the rated efciency after the
run-in is complete.
Worm gears have naturally lower startup efciencies
compared to operating efciencies. As input speed increases
I MPORTANT NOTE
Worm gear reducers applied in cold temperature ser-
vice, may require increased motor power for the following
reasons:
the motor power and lowering the oil viscosity
5. Oil Viscosity
wear. In these operating conditions, it also may be ben-
I MPORTANT NOTE
The user should consult with their primary lubrication supplier
before considering changes in oil type or viscosity.
To prevent reducer overheating, the reducers maximum oil sump
temperature limit must not be exceeded for prolonged periods
of operation (up to 3 hours continuous operation depending
upon reducer size).
NORD AGMA 9005-D94
Synthetic 105C (220F) 107C (225F)
I MPORTANT NOTE
Use caution when specifying gear reducers for high tempera-
ture service. If there is concern about exceeding the allowable
safe operating temperatures, please consult NORD to discuss
alternatives.
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
EXPANSION CHAMBERS
INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
U10830 - 1 of 2
Installation Instructions
Sometimes NORD requires the use of an oil expansion
chamber when the motor or reducer input is mounted
vertically. Consult your NORD catalog for additional in-
formation and application considerations.

1. Secure the gear reducer in the proper mounting
position for the application and remove the vent
plug from the gear reducer. The hose assembly kit
(21) will be tted to the reducer using the housing
port provided.
2. When using the larger 2.7 and 5.4 liter chambers,
screw the adapter tting (22) into the reducer hous-
ing port. Use all sealing gaskets provided.
3. Mount the overow tank (20) at the highest
location from the reducer, as permitted by the
hose assembly kit (21). Typical mounting congu-
rations are represented below. Use one of the input
covers mounting bolts, to mount the chamber
support leg to the reducer.

DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS
DRIVESYSTEMS
4. Be sure to use the proper ttings. Assemble one
end of the vent-hose assembly (21) to bottom of the
chamber and one-end to the reducer.
5. Secure the vent-plug (23) and gasket (24) that is sup-
plied with the kit to the top of the expansion chamber.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Remove the protective rubber element from the
supplied vent prior to use so that an open-vent is
formed on top of the overow tank. Avoid using a
pressurized AUTOVENT breather on the overow
tank since this may create an undesired pressure-vac-
uum in the overow tank.
Expansion Chamber Kit Dimensions & Parts List
Kit Part Number: 28390390 - 0.7 Liter Oil Expansion Chamber
Kit P/N A B C D E F Units
28390390
(0.7 Liter)
3.94 1.97 0.53 0.20 8.50 19.69 inch
100 50 13.5 5 216 500 mm
Item Part Number Description
20 28300390 Overow Tank - 0.7 Liter
21 28310020 Flexible Vent Hose Assembly -
Includes: Hose, metal gaskets &
2 Hollow Bolts (1 Bolt. - M12 X 1.5 and 1 Pc. - G1/4)
22 None Adapter Fitting
23 22012004 Normal Style Vent Plug (M12 X 1.5, DIN 910)
24 25312150 Vent Plug Gasket (12 X 15.5 X 1.5)
28390400
(2.7 Liter)
5.91 4.92 0.69 0.20 15.22 27.56 inch
150 125 17.5 5 386.5 700 mm
21 28310030
Flexible Vent Hose Assy -
2 Hollow Bolts (2 Pcs. - G1/4)
22 22024030 Adapter Fitting (M24 X 1.5 to G1/4)
28390410
(5.4 Liter)
7.09 3.54 0.69 0.20 15.18 31.50 inch
180 90 17.5 5 385.5 800 mm
21 28310040
Flexible Vent Hose Assy -
2 Hollow Bolts (2 Pcs. - G1/4)
22 22030030 Adapter Fitting (M30 X 1.5 to G1/4)
Please see page 2 for gearbox compatability
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
EXPANSION CHAMBERS
INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
U10830 - 2 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
Sub-Assembly P/N 28390380 for NORDBLOC
.1 gear units with M10x1 air vent.

1x DIN 7643
M10x1
283 00380
1x DIN 7603A Cu
10x16x1
253 10166
1x Ring
10x14x5
283 00370
1xDIN
9021 8,4
227 10840
Assembly of the expansion unit at the gear unit. Types SK 572.1/573.1, SK 672.1/673.1
Vent Hose Sub-Assembly
88-106 lb-in
For motor sizes 63, 71, 80, 90,
100 & 112
Motor attachment bolt

Motor Sizes 63, 71 & 80:

Assembly vent-hose to port as
shown.
Motor Sizes 90,100 & 112:
Assembly vent-hose to port as
shown.
Expansion Chamber Compatability Chart
Helical In-line NORDBLOC NORDBLOC.1 Clincher Helical-Bevel Part Number [lb]
SK 42/43
SK 52/53
SK 63
SK472/473
SK572/573
SK672/673
SK772/773
SK872/873
SK972/973
SK572.1/573.1*
SK672.1/673.1*
SK 4282/4382
SK 5282/5382
SK 6382
SK 9042.1/9043.1
SK 9052.1/9053.1
28390390 11.0
SK 62
SK 72/73
SK 6282
SK 7282/7382
SK 9072.1
SK 9082.1
28390400 13.2
SK 82/83
SK 92/93
SK 102/103
SK 8282/8382 SK 9086.1
SK 9092.1
SK 9096.1
28390410 15.4
* Need to additionally order part #28390380 which is sub-assembly shown below.
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL & BEVEL REDUCER
LUBRICATION TYPES
Oil Formulation Codes
MIN-EP - Mineral Oil with EP Additive
PAO-EP - Synthetic Polyalphaolen Oil with EP Additive
PAO - Synthetic Polyalphaolen Oil
PG - Synthetic Polyglycol Oil
FG - Food-Grade Oil
FG-PAO - Food-Grade, Synthetic Poyalphaolen Oil
FG-PG - Food-Grade, Synthetic Polyglycol Oil
Lubrication Notes
Avoid using (EP) gear oils in worm gears that contain
sulfur-phosphorous chemistries, as these additives can
react adversely with bronze worm gears and accelerate
wear.
Food grade lubricants must be in compliance with FDA 212
CFR 178.3570 and qualify as a NSF-H1 lubricant. Please
consult with lubrication manufacturer for more information.
When making a lubrication change, check with the
lubrication supplier to assure compatibility and to obtain
recommended cleaning or ushing procedures.
Do not to mix different oils with different additive pack-
ages or different base oil formulation types. Polyglycol (PG)
oils are not miscible with other oil types and should never
be mixed with mineral oil or polyalphaolen (PAO)
synthetic oil.
NORD Gear Limited
Lubrication Tables Helical and Bevel Gear Units
Standard Oil Lubricants
ISO Viscosity Oil Type Ambient Temperature Range Manufacturer Brand/Type Notes
VG220
MIN-EP 0 to 40C (32 to 104) Mobilgear 600XP220
PAO -35 to 60C (-31 to 140F) Mobil SHC630
FG -5 to 40C (23 to 104F) Fuchs FM220
Optional Oil Lubricants
VG460
PAO -35 to 80C (-31 to 176F) Mobil SHC 634 -
FG-PAO -35 to 80C (-31 to 176F) Mobil/Cibus SHC460 -
VG220 FG-PAO -35 to 60C (-31 to 140F) Mobil/Cibus SHC220 -
VG150 PAO -35 to 25C (-31 to 77F) Mobil SHC629 -
Grease Options (applied to greased bearings and seal cavities)
NLGI Grade Grease Type/Thickener Ambient Temperature Range Manufacturer Brand/Type Notes
NLGI 2
Standard (Li-Complex) -30 to 60C (-22 to 140F) Mobil Grease XHP222
High Temp (Polyurea) -25 to 80C (-13 to 176F) Mobil Polyrex EP 2
Food-Grade (AL-Complex) -25 to 40C (-13 to 104F) Mobil Grease FM222
Stocked Lubricants
Standard product on serviceable gear units
Standard product on maintenance free gear units
I MPORTANT NOTES
The Ambient Temperature is intended to be an operation guideline based upon the typical properties of all the
lubricant. The viscosity and other properties of the lubricant change based upon load, speed, ambient conditions, and
reducer operating temperatures. The user should consult with their lubrication supplier & NORD gear before considering
changes in oil type or viscosity.
To prevent reducer overheating, observe the maximum operating oil temperature limits:
Mineral Oil: 80-85 C (176 180 F).
Synthetic Oil: 105 C (225 F).
In the following instances, please consult NORD for specic recommendations:
Gear units will operate in high ambient temperature conditions exceeding 40 C (104 F).
Gear units will operate in cold ambient temperature conditions approaching 0 C (32 F) or lower.
Lower than an ISO VG100 viscosity oil is being considered for a cold-temperature service.
Fluid grease is required for lubricating the gear unit.
Observe the general lubrication guidelines outlined in user manual U10750.
Low-end service temperature limit may vary for a specic lubricant; Please also see the important notes on Page 1.
VG150
MIN-EP 0 to 25C (32 to 77F)
Mobilgear
600XP150
Omala
150
Alpha
SP150
Renolin
EP150
Klberoil
GEM 1-150N
PAO-EP -30 to 25 C (-22 to 77 F)
Mobilgear
SHC150
Omala
HD 150
Alphasyn
EP150
Gearmaster
SYN150/NA
Klbersynth
EG 4-150
PAO -30 to 25 C (-22 to 77 F) Mobil SHC629
Omala
RL 150
Alphasyn
T150
Geralyn
SF150
Klbersynth
GEM 4-150N
PG -25 to 25 C (-13 to 77 F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 150
Tivela
S150
Alphasyn
PG150
Renolin
PG150
Klbersynth
GH 6-150
FG 0 to 25 C (32 to 77 F)
Mobil
DTE FM 150
N/A N/A N/A N/A
FG-PAO -25 to 25 C (-13 to 77 F) N/A N/A N/A
Cassida
GL150
Klberoil
4 UH 1-150N
FG-PG -25 to 25 C (-13 to 77 F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 150
N/A N/A N/A
Klbersynth
UH1 6-150
VG220
MIN-EP 0 to 40C (32 to 104)
Mobilgear
600XP220
Omala
220
Alpha
SP220
Renolin
EP220
Klberoil
GEM 1-220N
PAO-EP -30 to 60 C (-22 to 140 F)
Mobilgear
SHC220
Omala
HD220
Alphasyn
EP220
Gearmaster
SYN220/NA
Klbersynth
EG 4-220
Omala
RL220
Alphasyn
T220
Geralyn
SF220
Klbersynth
GEM 4-220N
PG -25 to 60 C (-13 to 140 F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 220
Tivela
S220
Alphasyn
PG220
Renolin
PG220
Klbersynth GH
6-220
FG 0 to 40C (32 to 104F)
Mobil
DTE FM 220
N/A N/A Fuchs FM220 N/A
FG-PAO -25 to 60 C (-13 to 140 F)
Mobil/Cibus
SHC220
N/A N/A
Cassida
GL220
Klberoil
4 UH 1-220N
FG-PG -25 to 60C (-13 to 140F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 220
N/A N/A
Cassida
WG220
Klbersynth UH
16-220
VG460
MIN-EP 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F)
Mobilgear
600XP460
Omala
460
Alpha
SP460
Renolin
EP460
Klberoil
GEM 1-460N
PAO-EP -20 to 80 C (-4 to 176 F)
Mobilgear
SHC460
Omala
HD460
Alphasyn
EP460
Gearmaster
SYN460/NA
Klbersynth
EG 4-460
PAO -20 to 80 C (-4 to 176 F) Mobil SHC 634
Omala
RL460
Alphasyn
T460
Geralyn
SF460
Klbersynth
GEM 4-460N
PG -20 to 80 C (-4 to 176 F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 460
Tivela
S460
Alphasyn
PG460
Renolin
PG460
Klbersynth
GH 6-460
FG 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F)
Mobil DTE
FM460
N/A N/A
Fuchs
FM460
N/A
FG-PAO -20 to 80 C (-4 to 176 F)
Mobil/Cibus
SHC460
N/A N/A
Cassida
GL460
Klberoil
4 UH 1-460N
FG-PG -20 to 80 C (-4 to 176 F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 460
N/A N/A
Cassida
WG460
Klbersynth
UH1 6-460
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL & BEVEL REDUCER
LUBRICATION TYPES
NORD Gear Limited
Oil Cross-reference Chart
ISO
Viscosity
Oil
Type
Ambient Temperature
Range

Shell
Castrol
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM REDUCER
LUBRICATION TYPES
Lubrication Notes
wear.
be mixed with mineral oil or polyalphaolen (PAO)
synthetic oil.
NORD Gear Limited
Lubrication Tables Helical Worm Gear Units
VG680 PAO 0 to 60C (32 to 140F) Mobil SHC636
VG460
PAO 0 to50C (32 to 122F) Mobil SHC 634 -
FG-PAO 0 to50C (32 to 122F) Mobil/Cibus SHC460 -
NLGI 2
Stocked Lubricants
I MPORTANT NOTES
reducer operating temperatures. The user should consult with their lubrication supplier & NORD Gear before considering
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM REDUCER
LUBRICATION TYPES
NORD Gear Limited
ISO
Viscosity
Oil
Type
Ambient Temperature
Range

Shell
Castrol
VG220
Omala
RL220
Alphasyn
T220
Geralyn
SF220
Klbersynth
GEM 4-220N
PG -25 to 40 C (-13 to 104 F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 220
Tivela
S220
Alphasyn
PG220
Renolin
PG220
Klbersynth GH
6-220
FG-PAO -25 to 40 C (-13 to 104 F)
Mobil/Cibus
SHC220
N/A N/A
Cassida
GL220
Klberoil
4 UH 1-220N
FG-PG -25 to 40C (-13 to 104F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 220
N/A N/A
Cassida
WG220
Klbersynth UH
16-220
VG460
PAO 0 to50C (32 to 122F) Mobil SHC 634
Omala
RL460
Alphasyn
T460
Geralyn
SF460
Klbersynth
GEM 4-460N
PG 0 to50C (32 to 122F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 460
Tivela
S460
Alphasyn
PG460
Renolin
PG460
Klbersynth
GH 6-460
FG-PAO 0 to50C (32 to 122F)
Mobil/Cibus
SHC460
N/A N/A
Cassida
GL460
Klberoil
4 UH 1-460N
FG-PG 0 to50C (32 to 122F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 460
N/A N/A
Cassida
WG460
Klbersynth
UH1 6-460
VG680
PAO 0 to 60C (32 to 140F) Mobil SHC636
Omala
RL680
N/A
Geralyn
SF680
Klbersynth
GEM 4-680N
PG 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 680
Tivela
S680
N/A
Renolin
PG680
Klbersynth
GH 6-680
FG-PAO 0 to 60C (32 to 140F) N/A N/A N/A
Cassida
GL680
Klberoil
4 UH1-680N
FG-PG 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 680
N/A N/A
Cassida
WG680
Klbersynth
UH1 6-680
DRIVESYSTEMS
MINICASE
WORM REDUCER
LUBRICATION TYPES
Lubrication Notes
wear.
be mixed with mineral oil.
NORD Gear Limited
Lubrication Tables MINICASE
Worm Gear Units

VG680 PAO 0 to 40C (32 to 104) Mobil SHC636
VG460
PAO 0 to 40C (32 to 104) Mobil SHC 634 -
FG-PAO 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Mobil/Cibus SHC460 -
NLGI 2
Stocked Lubricants
I MPORTANT NOTES
reducer operating temperatures. The user should consult with their lubrication supplier & NORD Gear before considering
VG220
Omala
RL220
Alphasyn
T220
Geralyn
SF220
Klbersynth
GEM 4-220N
PG -25 to 40 C (-13 to 104 F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 220
Tivela
S220
Alphasyn
PG220
Renolin
PG220
Klbersynth GH
6-220
FG-PAO -25 to 40 C (-13 to 104 F)
Mobil/Cibus
SHC220
N/A N/A
Cassida
GL220
Klberoil
4 UH 1-220N
FG-PG -25 to 40C (-13 to 104F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 220
N/A N/A
Cassida
WG220
Klbersynth UH
16-220
VG460
PAO 0 to 40C (32 to 104) Mobil SHC 634
Omala
RL460
Alphasyn
T460
Geralyn
SF460
Klbersynth
GEM 4-460N
PG 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 460
Tivela
S460
Alphasyn
PG460
Renolin
PG460
Klbersynth
GH 6-460
FG-PAO 0 to 40C (32 to 104F)
Mobil/Cibus
SHC460
N/A N/A
Cassida
GL460
Klberoil
4 UH 1-460N
FG-PG 0 to 40C (32 to 104F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 460
N/A N/A
Cassida
WG460
Klbersynth
UH1 6-460
VG680
PAO 0 to 40C (32 to 104) Mobil SHC636
Omala
RL680
N/A
Geralyn
SF680
Klbersynth
GEM 4-680N
PG 0 to 40C (32 to 104)
Mobil
Glygoyle 680
Tivela
S680
N/A
Renolin
PG680
Klbersynth
GH 6-680
FG-PAO 0 to 40C (32 to 104) N/A N/A N/A
Cassida
GL680
Klberoil
4 UH1-680N
FG-PG 0 to 40C (32 to 104)
Mobil
Glygoyle 680
N/A N/A
Cassida
WG680
Klbersynth
UH1 6-680
DRIVESYSTEMS
MINICASE
WORM REDUCER
LUBRICATION TYPES
NORD Gear Limited
ISO
Viscosity
Oil
Type
Ambient Temperature
Range

Shell
Castrol
DRIVESYSTEMS
FLEXBLOC
WORM REDUCER
LUBRICATION TYPES
Lubrication Notes
wear.
be mixed with mineral oil.
NORD Gear Limited
Lubrication Tables FLEXBLOC
Worm Gear Units

NORD uses a semi automated assembly process to produce the FLEXBLOC
gear unit assemblies. During this process the gear

units are factory lled in accordance with the following table.
Please consult with NORD prior to considering any optional lubricants for the FLEXBLOC
gear unit
ISO Viscosity Oil Type Ambient Temperature Range Manufacturer Brand/Type Unit Type
VG220
FG-PG -25 to 40C (-13 to 104F) Klbersynth UH 1 6-220 Inch
PG -25 to 40 C (-13 to 104 F) Klbersynth GH 6-220 Metric
I MPORTANT NOTES
The Ambient Temperature is intended to be an operation guideline based upon the typical properties of the
reducer operating temperatures. The user should consult with their lubrication supplier before considering changes in oil
type or viscosity.
VG220
Omala
RL220
Alphasyn
T220
Geralyn
SF220
Klbersynth
GEM 4-220N
PG -25 to 40 C (-13 to 104 F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 220
Tivela
S220
Alphasyn
PG220
Renolin
PG220
Klbersynth GH
6-220
FG-PAO -25 to 40 C (-13 to 104 F)
Mobil/Cibus
SHC220
N/A N/A
Cassida
GL220
Klberoil
4 UH 1-220N
FG-PG -25 to 40C (-13 to 104F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 220
N/A N/A
Cassida
WG220
Klbersynth UH
1 6-220
VG460
PAO 0 to 40C (32 to 104) Mobil SHC 634
Omala
RL460
Alphasyn
T460
Geralyn
SF460
Klbersynth
GEM 4-460N
PG 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 460
Tivela
S460
Alphasyn
PG460
Renolin
PG460
Klbersynth
GH 6-460
FG-PAO 0 to 40C (32 to 104F)
Mobil/Cibus
SHC460
N/A N/A
Cassida
GL460
Klberoil
4 UH 1-460N
FG-PG 0 to 40C (32 to 104F)
Mobil
Glygoyle 460
N/A N/A
Cassida
WG460
Klbersynth
UH1 6-460
VG680
PAO 0 to 40C (32 to 104) Mobil SHC636
Omala
RL680
N/A
Geralyn
SF680
Klbersynth
GEM 4-680N
PG 0 to 40C (32 to 104)
Mobil
Glygoyle 680
Tivela
S680
N/A
Renolin
PG680
Klbersynth
GH 6-680
FG-PAO 0 to 40C (32 to 104) N/A N/A N/A
Cassida
GL680
Klberoil
4 UH1-680N
FG-PG 0 to 40C (32 to 104)
Mobil
Glygoyle 680
N/A N/A
Cassida
WG680
Klbersynth
UH1 6-680
DRIVESYSTEMS
FLEXBLOC
WORM REDUCER
LUBRICATION TYPES
NORD Gear Limited
ISO
Viscosity
Oil
Type
Ambient Temperature
Range

Shell
Castrol
DRIVESYSTEMS
STANDARD IN-LINE FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
Standard In-line footed lubrication
All Standard In-line reducers are shipped from NORD with
a pre-determined oil ll level in accordance to the specied
reducer size and mounting position. When lling these gear
units the oil must be measured and added until one estab-
lishes the proper ll quantity. For additional information
please refer to the Oil & vent plug locations documenta-
tion for your specied gear unit
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
For mounting orientations other than shown please consult
NORD Gear. Reducer modications may be required.
U11500 - 1 of 1
Type M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Quarts Liters Quarts Liters Quarts Liters Quarts Liters Quarts Liters Quarts Liters
SK0/SK05 0.140 0.130 0.230 0.220 0.140 0.130 0.230 0.220 0.140 0.130 0.140 0.130
SK000 0.250 0.240 0.430 0.410 0.250 0.240 0.430 0.410 0.250 0.240 0.250 0.240
SK01/SK015 0.230 0.220 0.400 0.380 0.230 0.220 0.400 0.380 0.230 0.220 0.230 0.220
SK010/SK0105 0.400 0.380 0.630 0.600 0.400 0.380 0.630 0.600 0.400 0.380 0.400 0.380
SK20/SK205 0.580 0.550 1.06 1.000 0.580 0.550 1.06 1.000 0.580 0.550 0.580 0.550
SK200/SK2005 0.850 0.800 1.37 1.30 0.850 0.800 1.37 1.30 0.850 0.800 0.850 0.800
SK25/SK255 0.530 0.500 1.06 1.000 0.530 0.500 1.06 1.000 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500
SK250/SK2505 1.48 1.40 1.59 1.50 1.48 1.40 1.59 1.50 1.48 1.40 1.48 1.40
SK30/SK305 0.740 0.700 1.48 1.40 0.740 0.700 1.48 1.40 0.740 0.700 0.740 0.700
SK300/SK3005 1.48 1.40 1.59 1.50 1.48 1.40 1.59 1.50 1.48 1.40 1.48 1.40
SK33/335 0.850 0.800 1.69 1.60 0.850 0.800 1.69 1.60 0.850 0.800 0.850 0.80
SK330/SK3305 1.59 1.50 1.67 1.58 1.59 1.50 1.67 1.58 1.59 1.50 1.59 1.50
NORD Gear Limited
M6
M2
M3
M5
M4
M1
DRIVESYSTEMS
STANDARD IN-LINE FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK0/SK05 F 0.140 0.130 0.230 0.220 0.140 0.130 0.230 0.220 0.140 0.130 0.140 0.130
SK000 F 0.250 0.240 0.430 0.410 0.250 0.240 0.430 0.410 0.250 0.240 0.250 0.240
SK01/SK015 F 0.230 0.220 0.400 0.380 0.230 0.220 0.400 0.380 0.230 0.220 0.230 0.220
SK010/SK0105 F 0.400 0.380 0.630 0.600 0.400 0.380 0.630 0.600 0.400 0.380 0.400 0.380
SK20/SK205 F 0.370 0.350 0.630 0.600 0.370 0.350 0.630 0.600 0.370 0.350 0.370 0.350
SK200/SK2005 F 0.630 0.600 1.10 1.04 0.630 0.600 1.10 1.04 0.630 0.600 0.630 0.600
SK25/SK255 F 0.530 0.500 1.06 1.000 0.530 0.500 1.06 1.000 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500
SK250/SK2505 F 1.48 1.40 1.59 1.50 1.48 1.40 1.59 1.50 1.48 1.40 1.48 1.40
SK30/SK305 F 0.740 0.700 1.48 1.40 0.740 0.700 1.48 1.40 0.740 0.700 0.740 0.700
SK300/SK3005 F 1.48 1.40 1.59 1.50 1.48 1.40 1.59 1.50 1.48 1.40 1.48 1.40
SK33/335 F 0.850 0.800 1.69 1.60 0.850 0.800 1.69 1.60 0.850 0.800 0.850 0.800
SK330/SK3305 F 1.59 1.50 1.67 1.58 1.59 1.50 1.67 1.58 1.59 1.50 1.59 1.50
NORD Gear Limited
Standard In-line anged lubrication
All Standard In-line reducers are shipped from NORD with
a pre-determined oil ll level in accordance to the specied
reducer size and mounting position. When lling these gear
units the oil must be measured and added until one estab-
lishes the proper ll quantity. For additional information
please refer to the Oil & vent plug locations documenta-
tion for your specied gear unit
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
M6
M3
M5
M4
M1
M2
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
Helical In-line footed lubrication
The following NORD Gear reducers are shipped from the
factory with a pre-determined oil ll level in accordance
to the specied reducer size and mounting position. For
additional information, please refer to the Oil Plug & Vent
Locations documentation for your gear unit.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
gear case size, mounting and ratio. Prior to commission-
ing the reducer, check the oil-ll level using the reducers
oil level plug and drain or add addition oil as needed. The
minimum acceptable oil level is 0.15 in (4mm) below the
oil level hole.
U11700 - 1 of 1
M6
M1
M2
M4
M5
M3
SK02 0.160 0.150 0.630 0.600 0.740 0.700 0.630 0.600 0.420 0.400 0.420 0.400
SK03 0.320 0.300 1.06 1.000 0.850 0.800 0.950 0.900 0.630 0.600 0.630 0.600
SK11E 0.260 0.250 0.530 0.500 0.580 0.550 0.420 0.400 0.370 0.350 0.370 0.350
SK12 0.260 0.250 0.790 0.750 0.900 0.850 0.790 0.750 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500
SK13 0.630 0.600 1.32 1.25 1.16 1.10 1.27 1.20 0.740 0.700 0.740 0.700
SK21E 0.630 0.600 1.27 1.20 1.27 1.20 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000
SK22 0.530 0.500 1.90 1.80 2.11 2.00 1.90 1.80 1.43 1.35 1.43 1.35
SK23 1.37 1.30 2.54 2.40 2.43 2.30 2.48 2.35 1.69 1.60 1.69 1.60
SK31E 1.16 1.10 2.85 2.70 2.33 2.20 2.43 2.30 1.80 1.70 1.80 1.70
SK32 0.950 0.900 2.64 2.50 3.17 3.00 3.07 2.90 2.11 2.00 2.11 2.00
SK33N 1.69 1.60 3.07 2.90 3.38 3.20 3.91 3.70 2.43 2.30 2.43 2.30
SK41E 1.80 1.70 2.75 2.60 3.49 3.30 2.64 2.50 2.75 2.60 2.75 2.60
SK42 1.37 1.30 4.76 4.50 4.76 4.50 4.55 4.30 3.38 3.20 3.38 3.20
SK43 3.17 3.00 5.92 5.60 5.50 5.20 6.98 6.60 3.81 3.60 3.81 3.60
SK51E 2.33 2.20 4.65 4.40 4.97 4.70 4.23 4.00 3.59 3.40 3.59 3.40
SK52 2.64 2.50 7.40 7.00 7.19 6.80 7.19 6.80 5.39 5.10 5.39 5.10
SK53 4.76 4.50 9.20 8.70 8.14 7.70 9.20 8.70 6.34 6.00 6.34 6.00
SK62 6.87 6.50 15.86 15.00 13.74 13.00 16.91 16.00 15.86 15.00 15.86 15.00
SK63 13.74 13.00 15.32 14.50 15.32 14.50 16.91 16.00 13.74 13.00 13.74 13.00
SK72 10.57 10.00 24.31 23.00 19.03 18.00 27.48 26.00 24.31 23.00 24.31 23.00
SK73 21.66 20.50 21.14 20.00 23.78 22.50 28.53 27.00 21.14 20.00 21.14 20.00
SK82 14.80 14.00 37.00 35.00 28.54 27.00 46.51 44.00 33.82 32.00 33.82 32.00
SK83 31.71 30.00 32.76 31.00 35.93 34.00 39.10 37.00 34.88 33.00 34.88 33.00
SK92 26.43 25.00 77.16 73.00 49.68 47.00 80.33 76.00 54.96 52.00 54.96 52.00
SK93 56.02 53.00 73.99 70.00 62.04 59.00 76.10 72.00 51.79 49.00 51.79 49.00
SK102 38.05 36.00 83.50 79.00 69.76 66.00 107.81 102.00 75.05 71.00 75.05 71.00
SK103 78.19 74.00 75.05 71.00 78.21 74.00 102.52 97.00 70.82 67.00 70.82 67.00
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK02 F 0.260 0.250 0.630 0.600 0.630 0.600 0.630 0.600 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500
SK03 F 0.530 0.500 0.850 0.800 0.950 0.900 1.16 1.10 0.850 0.800 0.850 0.800
SK11E F 0.320 0.300 0.370 0.350 0.530 0.500 0.320 0.300 0.420 0.400 0.420 0.400
SK12 F 0.370 0.350 0.900 0.850 0.950 0.900 0.950 0.900 0.630 0.600 0.630 0.600
SK13 F 0.900 0.850 1.27 1.20 1.27 1.20 1.27 1.20 1.000 0.950 1.000 0.950
SK21E F 0.530 0.500 1.48 1.40 1.16 1.10 0.740 0.700 0.950 0.900 0.950 0.900
SK22 F 0.740 0.700 2.11 2.00 2.11 2.00 1.90 1.80 1.64 1.55 1.64 1.55
SK23 F 1.59 1.50 2.75 2.60 2.64 2.50 2.96 2.80 2.96 2.80 2.96 2.80
SK31E F 0.850 0.800 1.37 1.30 1.74 1.65 1.16 1.10 2.11 2.00 2.11 2.00
SK32 F 1.37 1.30 3.07 2.90 3.49 3.30 3.28 3.10 2.54 2.40 2.54 2.40
SK33N F 2.01 1.90 3.59 3.40 3.70 3.50 4.65 4.40 2.75 2.60 2.75 2.60
SK41E F 1.06 1.000 2.75 2.60 2.96 2.80 1.69 1.60 3.49 3.30 3.49 3.30
SK42 F 1.90 1.80 4.65 4.40 4.76 4.50 4.23 4.00 3.91 3.70 3.91 3.70
SK43 F 3.70 3.50 6.02 5.70 5.29 5.00 6.45 6.10 4.33 4.10 4.33 4.10
SK51E F 1.90 1.80 3.70 3.50 4.33 4.10 3.17 3.00 4.02 3.80 4.02 3.80
SK52 F 3.17 3.00 7.19 6.80 6.55 6.20 7.82 7.40 5.92 5.60 5.92 5.60
SK53 F 5.50 5.20 8.88 8.40 7.40 7.00 9.41 8.90 7.08 6.70 7.08 6.70
SK62 F 7.40 7.00 15.86 15.00 14.80 14.00 19.55 18.50 16.91 16.00 16.91 16.00
SK63 F 14.26 13.50 14.80 14.00 16.38 15.50 19.02 18.00 14.80 14.00 14.80 14.00
SK72 F 10.57 10.00 24.31 23.00 19.55 18.50 29.60 28.00 24.31 23.00 24.31 23.00
SK73 F 23.25 22.00 23.78 22.50 24.31 23.00 29.06 27.50 21.14 20.00 21.14 20.00
SK82 F 15.86 15.00 39.11 37.00 30.65 29.00 47.57 45.00 36.47 34.50 36.47 34.50
SK83 F 32.76 31.00 35.93 34.00 36.99 35.00 42.28 40.00 35.93 34.00 35.93 34.00
SK92 F 27.48 26.00 77.16 73.00 49.68 47.00 82.45 78.00 54.96 52.00 54.96 52.00
SK93 F 56.02 53.00 73.99 70.00 62.04 59.00 78.21 74.00 51.79 49.00 51.79 49.00
SK102 F 42.28 40.00 85.62 81.00 69.76 66.00 109.93 104.00 76.10 72.00 76.10 72.00
SK103 F 72.93 69.00 82.44 78.00 82.44 78.00 104.64 99.00 70.82 67.00 70.82 67.00
M6
M1
M2
M4
M5
M3
NORD Gear Limited
Helical In-line anged lubrication
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 0182NB 0.420 0.400 0.580 0.550 0.630 0.600 0.580 0.550 0.370 0.350 0.370 0.350
SK 0282NB 0.740 0.700 1.06 1.000 0.850 0.800 1.16 1.10 0.950 0.900 0.950 0.900
SK 1282 0.950 0.900 1.37 1.30 0.950 0.900 1.27 1.20 1.000 0.950 1.000 0.950
SK 1382NB 1.37 1.30 2.43 2.30 1.48 1.40 2.22 2.10 2.11 2.00 2.01 1.90
SK 2282 1.74 1.65 2.54 2.40 2.01 1.90 2.11 2.00 1.90 1.80 1.90 1.80
SK 2382 1.80 1.70 2.75 2.60 2.01 1.90 3.28 3.10 1.59 1.50 1.59 1.50
SK 3282 3.33 3.15 4.33 4.10 3.44 3.25 4.33 4.10 3.33 3.15 3.33 3.15
SK 3382 4.33 4.10 5.18 4.90 3.49 3.30 5.92 5.60 3.49 3.30 3.49 3.30
SK 4282 4.97 4.70 6.45 6.10 5.02 4.75 5.71 5.40 4.97 4.70 4.97 4.70
SK 4382 6.24 5.90 7.19 6.80 5.18 4.90 8.77 8.30 5.18 4.90 5.18 4.90
SK 5282 7.93 7.50 9.30 8.80 7.93 7.50 9.30 8.80 7.61 7.20 7.61 7.20
SK 5382 13.21 12.50 12.68 12.00 7.08 6.70 14.80 14.00 8.77 8.30 8.77 8.30
SK 6282 17.97 17.00 14.80 14.00 12.68 12.00 18.50 17.50 10.57 10.00 14.80 14.00
SK 6382 17.44 16.50 13.74 13.00 10.15 9.60 19.03 18.00 14.80 14.00 13.21 12.50
SK 7282 26.42 25.00 22.20 21.00 21.14 20.00 28.54 27.00 16.91 16.00 22.20 21.00
SK 7382 23.25 22.00 21.14 20.00 16.91 16.00 26.42 25.00 24.31 23.00 20.08 19.00
SK 8282 39.11 37.00 34.88 33.00 31.71 30.00 43.34 41.00 32.77 31.00 32.77 31.00
SK 8382 35.94 34.00 33.82 32.00 26.42 25.00 40.17 38.00 37.00 35.00 31.71 30.00
SK 9282 78.22 74.00 73.99 70.00 58.14 55.00 76.10 72.00 63.42 60.00 62.36 59.00
SK 9382 77.16 73.00 73.99 70.00 47.56 45.00 78.22 74.00 68.70 65.00 63.42 60.00
SK 10282 95.13 90.00 95.13 90.00 42.28 40.00 95.13 90.00 63.42 60.00 86.67 82.00
SK 10382 89.84 85.00 105.67 100.00 77.16 73.00 105.70 100.00 84.56 80.00 84.56 80.00
SK 11282* 174.40 165.00 169.12 160.00 153.26 145.00 206.12 195.00 105.70 100.00 147.98 140.00
SK 11382* 169.12 160.00 163.84 155.00 147.98 140.00 221.97 210.00 163.84 155.00 142.70 135.00
SK 12382* 169.12 160.00 163.84 155.00 147.98 140.00 221.97 210.00 163.84 155.00 142.70 135.00
* For shipping purposes the larger Clincher

gear units are supplied without oil.
Oil quantities shown are for the gearbox only. When the OT (oil tank) option is used, the oil must be lled to the level shown on the
dipstick which is located inside of the oil tank. Even when the gear unit is lled by NORD, the user MUST add more oil untill the oil is
lled to the proper level.
NORD Gear Limited
M1
M2
M4
M5
M3
M6
CLINCHER
lubrication
Unless otherwise noted below, the following NORD Gear
reducers are shipped from the factory with a pre-determined
oil ll level in accordance to the specied reducer size and
mounting position. For additional information, please refer
to the Oil Plug & Vent Locations documentation for your
gear unit.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 9012.1 0.740 0.700 1.69 1.60 2.01 1.90 2.54 2.40 1.27 1.20 1.80 1.70
SK 9013.1 1.27 1.20 2.11 2.00 2.32 2.20 3.17 3.00 1.48 1.40 2.01 1.90
SK 9016.1 0.740 0.700 1.69 1.60 2.01 1.90 2.54 2.40 1.27 1.20 1.80 1.70
SK 9017.1 1.27 1.20 2.11 2.00 2.32 2.20 3.17 3.00 1.48 1.40 2.01 1.90
SK 9022.1 1.37 1.30 2.75 2.60 3.70 3.50 4.44 4.20 2.11 2.00 2.96 2.80
SK 9023.1 2.54 2.40 3.17 3.00 4.02 3.80 5.60 5.30 2.32 2.20 3.28 3.10
SK 9032.1 1.80 1.70 5.07 4.80 6.76 6.40 7.08 6.70 4.33 4.10 5.39 5.10
SK 9033.1 3.49 3.30 6.97 6.60 7.40 7.00 8.24 7.80 4.54 4.30 5.39 5.10
SK 9042.1 4.65 4.40 9.19 8.70 10.57 10.00 10.36 9.80 7.19 6.80 7.93 7.50
SK 9043.1 4.86 4.60 10.78 10.20 11.31 10.70 13.53 12.80 5.49 5.20 7.08 6.70
SK 9052.1 6.87 6.50 16.91 16.00 20.08 19.00 22.72 21.50 11.62 11.00 16.38 15.50
SK 9053.1 10.57 10.00 17.96 17.00 21.13 20.00 25.57 24.20 12.15 11.50 17.44 16.50
SK 9062.1 10.57 10.00 29.06 27.50 33.81 32.00 38.04 36.00 19.02 18.00 25.36 24.00
SK 9072.1 10.57 10.00 29.06 27.50 33.81 32.00 38.04 36.00 19.02 18.00 25.36 24.00
SK 9082.1 17.96 17.00 54.42 51.50 66.04 62.50 75.55 71.50 34.87 33.00 49.14 46.50
SK 9086.1 30.64 29.00 77.14 73.00 89.82 85.00 107.78 102.00 50.72 48.00 65.51 62.00
SK 9092.1 43.32 41.00 165.90 157.00 179.64 170.00 181.75 172.00 84.54 80.00 95.10 90.00
SK 9096.1 73.97 70.00 197.60 187.00 205.00 194.00 268.40 254.00 115.18 109.00 160.62 152.00
Oil Levels shown apply to base models and gear units ending in LX, AX, & VX.
NORD Gear Limited
M6
M2
M3
M5
M4
M1
90.1 Helical-bevel footed lubrication
gear unit.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 9012.1 0.740 0.700 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.54 2.40 1.27 1.20 1.80 1.70
SK 9013.1 1.27 1.20 2.43 2.30 2.32 2.20 3.17 3.00 1.48 1.40 2.01 1.90
SK 9016.1 0.740 0.700 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.54 2.40 1.27 1.20 1.80 1.70
SK 9017.1 1.27 1.20 2.43 2.30 2.32 2.20 3.17 3.00 1.48 1.40 2.01 1.90
SK 9022.1 1.37 1.30 2.75 2.60 3.70 3.50 4.44 4.20 2.11 2.00 2.96 2.80
SK 9023.1 2.54 2.40 3.17 3.00 4.02 3.80 5.60 5.30 2.32 2.20 3.28 3.10
SK 9032.1 2.01 1.90 5.49 5.20 6.76 6.40 7.71 7.30 3.49 3.30 5.39 5.10
SK 9033.1 4.02 3.80 6.02 5.70 7.29 6.90 8.98 8.50 3.80 3.60 5.92 5.60
SK 9042.1 3.80 3.60 10.25 9.70 12.05 11.40 12.15 11.50 6.87 6.50 8.66 8.20
SK 9043.1 6.02 5.70 10.78 10.20 15.53 14.70 15.53 14.70 6.97 6.60 10.14 9.60
SK 9052.1 7.93 7.50 17.44 16.50 21.13 20.00 23.78 22.50 12.15 11.50 19.02 18.00
SK 9053.1 13.21 12.50 19.02 18.00 22.72 21.50 28.00 26.50 13.74 13.00 17.96 17.00
SK 9062.1 12.68 12.00 29.06 27.50 34.87 33.00 40.68 38.50 20.08 19.00 27.47 26.00
SK 9072.1 12.68 12.00 29.06 27.50 34.87 33.00 40.68 38.50 20.08 19.00 27.47 26.00
SK 9082.1 22.19 21.00 57.06 54.00 69.74 66.00 84.54 80.00 40.15 38.00 54.95 52.00
SK 9086.1 38.04 36.00 82.42 78.00 96.16 91.00 106.73 101.00 56.00 53.00 80.31 76.00
SK 9092.1 42.27 40.00 137.37 130.00 162.73 154.00 184.92 175.00 86.65 82.00 96.16 91.00
SK 9096.1 84.54 80.00 197.60 187.00 203.94 193.00 271.57 257.00 119.41 113.00 164.84 156.00
Oil Levels shown apply to base models and gear units ending in AZ, AF, VZ, & VF.
NORD Gear Limited
M6
M2
M3
M5
M4
M1
90.1 Helical-bevel anged lubrication
gear unit.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
VF Unit Shown
DRIVESYSTEMS
92 SERIES HELICAL-BEVEL FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 92072 0.420 0.400 0.630 0.600 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500 0.420 0.400 0.420 0.400
SK 92172 0.580 0.550 0.950 0.900 1.000 0.950 1.16 1.10 0.790 0.750 0.660 0.620
SK 92372 0.950 0.900 1.37 1.30 1.53 1.45 1.69 1.60 1.27 1.20 1.27 1.20
SK 92672 1.90 1.80 3.70 3.50 3.38 3.20 3.59 3.40 2.75 2.60 2.75 2.60
SK 92772 2.43 2.30 4.76 4.50 4.86 4.60 5.60 5.30 4.33 4.10 4.33 4.10
Oil Levels shown apply to base models and gear units ending in LX, AX, & VX.
NORD Gear Limited
92 Helical-bevel footed lubrication
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
M6
M2
M3
M5
M4
M1
DRIVESYSTEMS
92 SERIES HELICAL-BEVEL FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 92072 0.420 0.400 0.630 0.600 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500 0.420 0.400 0.420 0.400
SK 92172 0.530 0.500 0.970 0.920 0.920 0.870 1.11 1.05 0.790 0.750 0.690 0.650
SK 92372 1.22 1.15 1.59 1.50 1.27 1.20 1.80 1.70 1.22 1.15 1.22 1.15
SK 92672 1.64 1.55 2.96 2.80 2.64 2.50 3.49 3.30 2.54 2.40 2.54 2.40
SK 92772 2.91 2.75 4.65 4.40 4.76 4.50 5.81 5.50 3.70 3.50 3.70 3.50
Oil Levels shown apply to gear units ending in AZ, AF, VZ, & VF.
NORD Gear Limited
92 Helical-bevel anged lubrication
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
VF Unit Shown
M6
M2
M3
M5
M4
M1
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 02040 0.480 0.450 0.630 0.600 0.630 0.600 0.630 0.600 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500
SK 02050 0.420 0.400 1.27 1.20 0.740 0.700 1.22 1.15 0.740 0.700 0.740 0.700
SK 13050 1.000 0.950 1.64 1.55 1.16 1.10 1.53 1.45 1.000 0.950 1.000 0.950
SK 12063 0.630 0.600 1.80 1.70 1.27 1.20 1.64 1.55 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000
SK 13063 0.900 0.850 2.43 2.30 1.69 1.60 2.11 2.00 1.32 1.25 1.32 1.25
SK 12080 0.850 0.800 2.75 2.60 1.80 1.70 2.85 2.70 1.80 1.70 1.80 1.70
SK 13080 1.80 1.70 3.38 3.20 2.22 2.10 3.59 3.40 2.06 1.95 2.06 1.95
SK 32100 1.69 1.60 5.81 5.50 3.59 3.40 5.71 5.40 3.38 3.20 3.38 3.20
SK 33100 2.22 2.10 8.03 7.60 4.23 4.00 7.19 6.80 3.91 3.70 3.91 3.70
SK 42125 2.96 2.80 11.63 11.00 6.55 6.20 10.89 10.30 6.13 5.80 6.13 5.80
SK 43125 8.24 7.80 14.80 14.00 7.61 7.20 14.27 13.50 7.08 6.70 7.08 6.70
NORD Gear Limited
Helical-worm footed lubrication
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM SOLID SHAFT/FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 02040 VF 0.530 0.500 0.850 0.800 0.790 0.750 0.630 0.600 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500
SK 02050 VF 0.480 0.450 1.48 1.40 0.950 0.900 1.32 1.25 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000
SK 13050 VF 0.950 0.900 1.90 1.80 1.22 1.15 1.85 1.75 1.32 1.25 1.32 1.25
SK 12063 VF 0.530 0.500 1.69 1.60 1.48 1.40 1.90 1.80 1.59 1.50 1.59 1.50
SK 13063 VF 1.000 0.950 2.22 2.10 1.74 1.65 2.27 2.15 1.85 1.75 1.85 1.75
SK 12080 VF 1.000 0.950 3.38 3.20 3.28 3.10 3.91 3.70 2.64 2.50 2.64 2.50
SK 13080 VF 1.48 1.40 4.44 4.20 3.54 3.35 4.44 4.20 2.91 2.75 2.91 2.75
SK 32100 VF 1.59 1.50 7.50 7.10 5.18 4.90 7.50 7.10 4.65 4.40 4.65 4.40
SK 33100 VF 2.43 2.30 8.03 7.60 5.81 5.50 8.24 7.80 5.12 4.85 5.12 4.85
SK 42125 VF 3.49 3.30 11.83 11.20 6.45 6.10 10.99 10.40 7.19 6.80 7.19 6.80
SK 43125 VF 4.54 4.30 13.63 12.90 7.50 7.10 12.79 12.10 8.14 7.70 8.14 7.70
NORD Gear Limited
Helical-worm solid shaft/anged lubrication
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM HOLLOW SHAFT
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 02040 0.420 0.400 0.850 0.800 0.690 0.650 0.630 0.600 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500
SK 02050 0.480 0.450 1.16 1.10 0.950 0.900 1.16 1.10 0.850 0.800 0.850 0.800
SK 13050 0.900 0.850 1.85 1.75 1.32 1.25 1.43 1.35 1.22 1.15 1.22 1.15
SK 12063 0.530 0.500 1.53 1.45 1.27 1.20 1.48 1.40 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10
SK 13063 0.950 0.900 2.22 2.10 1.64 1.55 2.22 2.10 1.53 1.45 1.53 1.45
SK 12080 0.950 0.900 3.28 3.10 3.17 3.00 3.17 3.00 2.33 2.20 2.33 2.20
SK 13080 1.80 1.70 3.96 3.75 3.80 3.60 3.80 3.60 2.69 2.55 2.69 2.55
SK 32100 1.59 1.50 5.49 5.20 4.02 3.80 5.60 5.30 4.02 3.80 4.02 3.80
SK 33100 2.22 2.10 6.45 6.10 5.07 4.80 6.97 6.60 4.44 4.20 4.44 4.20
SK 42125 3.38 3.20 13.63 12.90 6.45 6.10 11.10 10.50 6.66 6.30 6.66 6.30
SK 43125 5.07 4.80 14.27 13.50 7.82 7.40 15.32 14.50 8.45 8.00 8.45 8.00
Oil Levels shown apply to gear units ending in AZ, AF.
NORD Gear Limited
Helical-worm hollow shaft lubrication
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
AF Unit Shown
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORDBLOC
FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 172 0.370 0.350 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500
SK 272 0.630 0.600 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000
SK 273 0.660 0.620 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10
SK 372 0.630 0.600 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000
SK 373 0.580 0.550 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10
SK 472 1.06 1.000 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.11 2.00 1.90 1.80 1.90 1.80
SK 473 1.37 1.30 2.64 2.50 2.22 2.10 2.54 2.40 2.22 2.10 2.22 2.10
SK 572 1.06 1.000 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.11 2.00 1.90 1.80 1.90 1.80
SK 573 1.37 1.30 2.64 2.50 2.22 2.10 2.54 2.40 2.22 2.10 2.22 2.10
SK 672 1.48 1.40 3.59 3.40 3.28 3.10 3.33 3.15 1.53 1.45 3.33 3.15
SK 673 1.90 1.80 4.02 3.80 3.38 3.20 3.59 3.40 3.06 2.90 3.17 3.00
SK 772 2.11 2.00 3.49 3.30 3.70 3.50 4.44 4.20 2.85 2.70 3.49 3.30
SK 773 2.64 2.50 4.76 4.50 3.91 3.70 4.86 4.60 3.49 3.30 3.49 3.30
SK 872 3.91 3.70 10.14 9.60 9.62 9.10 7.71 7.30 4.97 4.70 8.46 8.00
SK 873 6.60 6.20 8.88 8.40 7.93 7.50 9.62 9.10 7.93 7.50 7.93 7.50
SK 972 6.87 6.50 16.91 16.00 16.59 15.70 15.53 14.70 8.98 8.50 14.80 14.00
SK 973 11.63 11.00 16.70 15.80 13.74 13.00 16.91 16.00 14.06 13.30 13.74 13.00
NORD Gear Limited
NORDBLOC
footed lubrication
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
M6
M2
M3
M5
M4
M1
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORDBLOC
FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
Mounting
Position
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
SK 172 F 0.370 0.350 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500 0.530 0.500
SK 272 F 0.630 0.600 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000
SK 273 F 0.660 0.620 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10
SK 372 F 0.630 0.600 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000 1.06 1.000
SK 373 F 0.580 0.550 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10
SK 472 F 1.06 1.000 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 1.59 1.50
SK 473 F 1.32 1.25 2.54 2.40 2.22 2.10 2.64 2.50 2.22 2.10 2.22 2.10
SK 572 F 1.06 1.000 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 1.59 1.50
SK 573 F 1.32 1.25 2.54 2.40 2.22 2.10 2.64 2.50 2.22 2.10 2.22 2.10
SK 672 F 1.22 1.15 3.59 3.40 2.85 2.70 2.96 2.80 1.32 1.25 2.85 2.70
SK 673 F 1.80 1.70 4.02 3.80 3.17 3.00 3.38 3.20 3.17 3.00 3.17 3.00
SK 772 F 1.69 1.60 3.49 3.30 3.70 3.50 3.49 3.30 3.28 3.10 3.28 3.10
SK 773 F 2.43 2.30 5.29 5.00 3.81 3.60 4.76 4.50 4.12 3.90 4.12 3.90
SK 872 F 3.70 3.50 9.51 9.00 8.35 7.90 8.14 7.70 4.12 3.90 7.61 7.20
SK 873 F 5.29 5.00 9.30 8.80 8.03 7.60 8.46 8.00 8.46 8.00 8.46 8.00
SK 972 F 6.87 6.50 15.86 15.00 13.74 13.00 14.27 13.50 6.87 6.50 12.68 12.00
SK 973 F 10.89 10.30 17.44 16.50 13.74 13.00 16.91 16.00 14.80 14.00 14.80 14.00
NORD Gear Limited
NORDBLOC
anged lubrication
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
M6
M2
M3
M5
M4
M1
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORDBLOC
.1 FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 072.1 0.169 0.160 0.338 0.320 0.222 0.210 0.243 0.230 0.190 0.180 0.210 0.200
SK 172.1 0.285 0.270 0.624 0.590 0.444 0.420 0.529 0.450 0.338 0.320 0.412 0.390
SK 372.1 0.480 0.450 1.11 1.05 0.790 0.750 1.06 1.000 0.630 0.600 0.690 0.650
SK 373.1 0.480 0.450 1.11 1.05 0.791 0.750 1.06 1.000 0.630 0.600 0.690 0.650
SK 572.1 0.790 0.750 2.01 1.90 1.59 1.50 2.11 2.00 1.16 1.10 1.22 1.15
SK 573.1 0.790 0.750 2.00 1.90 1.59 1.50 2.11 2.00 1.16 1.10 1.22 1.15
SK 672.1 1.16 1.10 2.75 2.60 2.27 2.15 2.85 2.70 1.64 1.55 1.74 1.65
SK 673.1 1.16 1.10 2.75 2.60 2.27 2.15 2.85 2.70 1.64 1.55 1.74 1.65
SK 772.1 1.22 1.15 3.86 3.65 2.38 2.25 3.33 3.15 1.43 1.35 2.27 2.15
SK 773.1 2.06 1.95 3.70 3.50 3.38 3.20 3.06 2.90 2.38 2.25 3.12 2.95
SK 872.1 2.75 2.60 8.45 8.00 5.60 5.30 7.40 7.00 2.96 2.80 4.86 4.60
SK 873.1 4.28 4.05 8.03 7.60 7.24 6.85 6.92 6.55 5.28 5.00 6.92 6.55
SK 972.1 4.76 4.50 13.63 12.90 8.56 8.10 13.42 12.70 4.86 4.60 8.24 7.80
SK 973.1 7.82 7.40 12.89 12.20 11.73 11.10 12.26 11.60 8.45 8.00 11.52 10.90
NORD Gear Limited
M6
M2
M3
M5
M4
M1
NORDBLOC
.1 footed lubrication
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORDBLOC
.1 FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 072.1 F 0.169 0.160 0.338 0.320 0.222 0.210 0.243 0.230 0.190 0.180 0.210 0.200
SK 172.1 F 0.285 0.270 0.624 0.590 0.444 0.420 0.529 0.450 0.338 0.320 0.412 0.390
SK 372.1 F 0.480 0.450 1.11 1.05 0.790 0.750 1.06 1.000 0.630 0.600 0.690 0.650
SK 373.1 F 0.480 0.450 1.11 1.05 0.791 0.750 1.06 1.000 0.630 0.600 0.690 0.650
SK 572.1 F 0.790 0.750 2.01 1.90 1.59 1.50 2.11 2.00 1.16 1.10 1.22 1.15
SK 573.1 F 0.790 0.750 2.00 1.90 1.59 1.50 2.11 2.00 1.16 1.10 1.22 1.15
SK 672.1 F 1.16 1.10 2.75 2.60 2.27 2.15 2.85 2.70 1.64 1.55 1.74 1.65
SK 673.1 F 1.16 1.10 2.75 2.60 2.27 2.15 2.85 2.70 1.64 1.55 1.74 1.65
SK 772.1 F 1.22 1.15 3.86 3.65 2.38 2.25 3.33 3.15 1.43 1.35 2.27 2.15
SK 773.1 F 2.06 1.95 3.70 3.50 3.38 3.20 3.06 2.90 2.38 2.25 3.12 2.95
SK 872.1 F 2.75 2.60 8.45 8.00 5.60 5.30 7.40 7.00 2.96 2.80 4.86 4.60
SK 873.1 F 4.28 4.05 8.03 7.60 7.24 6.85 6.92 6.55 5.28 5.00 6.92 6.55
SK 972.1 F 4.76 4.50 13.63 12.90 8.56 8.10 13.42 12.70 4.86 4.60 8.24 7.80
SK 973.1 F 7.82 7.40 12.89 12.20 11.73 11.10 12.26 11.60 8.45 8.00 11.52 10.90
M6
M1
M2
M4
M5
M3
NORD Gear Limited
NORDBLOC
.1 anged lubrication
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
oil level hole.
DRIVESYSTEMS
MINICASE
FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 1SM31 0.130 0.120 0.130 0.120 0.130 0.120 0.130 0.120 0.130 0.120 0.130 0.120
SK 1SM40 0.230 0.220 0.230 0.220 0.230 0.220 0.230 0.220 0.230 0.220 0.230 0.220
SK 2SM40 0.350 0.330 0.350 0.330 0.350 0.330 0.380 0.360 0.350 0.330 0.350 0.330
SK 1SM50 0.260 0.250 0.260 0.250 0.260 0.250 0.260 0.250 0.260 0.250 0.260 0.250
SK 2SM50 0.370 0.350 0.370 0.350 0.370 0.350 0.440 0.420 0.370 0.350 0.370 0.350
SK 1SM63 0.440 0.420 0.440 0.420 0.440 0.420 0.440 0.420 0.440 0.420 0.440 0.420
SK 2SM63 0.560 0.530 0.560 0.530 0.560 0.530 0.670 0.630 0.560 0.530 0.560 0.530
NORD Gear Limited
MINICASE
footed lubrication
All MINICASE
worm-gear reducers are shipped from NORD

with a pre-determined oil ll level in accordance to the speci-
ed reducer size and mounting position. The MINICASE
series of worm gear reducers are completely sealed. The
units lubrication is suitable for the life of the product so it is
All MINICASE
worm-gear reducers are lled with a synthetic

hydrocarbon or polyalphaolen (SHC/PAO) oil and utilize
synthetic bearing and seal grease. This ensures proper opera-
tion throughout the full lifetime of the units.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
DRIVESYSTEMS
MINICASE
FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
SK 1SM31 0.140 0.130 0.140 0.130 0.140 0.130 0.140 0.130 0.140 0.130 0.140 0.130
SK 1SM40 0.250 0.240 0.250 0.240 0.250 0.240 0.250 0.240 0.250 0.240 0.250 0.240
SK 2SM40 0.360 0.340 0.360 0.340 0.360 0.340 0.400 0.380 0.360 0.340 0.360 0.340
SK 1SM50 0.290 0.270 0.290 0.270 0.290 0.270 0.290 0.270 0.290 0.270 0.290 0.270
SK 2SM50 0.390 0.370 0.390 0.370 0.390 0.370 0.480 0.450 0.390 0.370 0.390 0.370
SK 1SM63 0.480 0.450 0.480 0.450 0.480 0.450 0.480 0.450 0.480 0.450 0.480 0.450
SK 2SM63 0.630 0.600 0.630 0.600 0.630 0.600 0.770 0.730 0.630 0.600 0.630 0.600
Oil Levels shown apply to gear units ending in VF, VZ, AF, & AZ.
NORD Gear Limited
MINICASE
anged lubrication
All MINICASE
worm-gear reducers are shipped from NORD

with a pre-determined oil ll level in accordance to the speci-
ed reducer size and mounting position. The MINICASE
series of worm gear reducers are completely sealed. The
units lubrication is suitable for the life of the product so it is
All MINICASE
worm-gear reducers are lled with a synthetic

hydrocarbon or polyalphaolen (SHC/PAO) oil and utilize
synthetic bearing and seal grease. This ensures proper opera-
tion throughout the full lifetime of the units.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
VF Unit Shown
DRIVESYSTEMS
FLEXBLOC

OIL FILL QUANTITIES
FLEXBLOC lubrication
The following FLEXBLOC worm gear modules are designed
to be maintenance-free and are typically supplied completely
sealed. They are factory oil lled for any mounting congu-
ration with a pre-determined oil level. The units lubrication
is suitable for the life of the product so it is inherently main-
tenance free.
FLEXBLOC inch hollow-bore modules are factory-lled
with a food grade synthetic polyglycol lubricant (suitable
for NSF-H1 incidental contact).
FLEXBLOC metric hollow-bore modules are factory-
lled with a standard polyglycol lubricant (unless special
ordered).
NORD can provide a eld installable vent option for most all
FLEXBLOC Gear units, with exception to the SK1SI31 unit.
For additional information, please refer to the FLEXBLOC
Oil Plug & Vent Locations documentation.
U13300 - 1 of 1
NORD Gear Limited
Lubricant synthetic: CLP PG 220
Type SK 1SI31 SK 1SI40 SK 1SI50 SK 1SI63 SK 1SI75
Quantity
30 ml
1.0 oz
55 ml
1.9 oz
95 ml
3.2 oz
180 ml
6.0 oz
360 ml
12 oz
Temperature Range -20F to +60F (-4C to +140C)
DRIVESYSTEMS
STANDARD IN-LINE
OIL PLUG & VENT LOCATIONS
= Vent
= Oil Plug
Oil plug connections
All reducers are shipped from the factory with a pre-determined oil ll level in accordance to the specied reducer size and
mounting position. For mounting orientations other than shown please consult NORD Gear. New plug locations may be
required.
NORD Gear Limited

SK 0
SK 01
SK 20
SK 25
SK 30
SK 33
M1
B3/B5
M2
V6/V3
M5
B6/B5II
M3
B8/B5I
M4
V5/V1
M6
B7/B5III

SK 010
SK 200
SK 250
SK 300
SK 330
M1
B3/B5
M2
V6/V3
M5
B6/B5II
M3
B8/B5I
M4
V5/V1
M6
B7/B5III
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug
M1
B3/B5
M2
V6/V3
M5
B6/B5II
M3
B8/B5I
M4
V5/V1
M6
B7/B5III
SK 11E
SK 21E
SK 31E
SK 41E
SK 51E
M1
B3/B5
M2
V6/V3
M5
B6/B5II
M4
V5/V1
M3
B8/B5I
M6
B7/B5III
SK 02
SK 12
SK 22
SK 32
SK 42
SK 52
M1
B3/B5
M2
V6/V3
M5
B6/B5II
M3
B8/B5I
M4
V5/V1
M6
B7/B5III
SK 03
SK 13
SK 23
SK 33N
SK 43
SK 53
M1
B3/B5
M2
V6/V3
M5
B6/B5II
M3
B8/B5I
M4
V5/V1
M6
B7/B5III
SK 62
SK 72
SK 82
SK 92
SK 102
SK 63*
SK 73*
SK 83*
SK 93*
SK 103*
*
*
Prior to commissioning the reducer, check the oil-ll level using the reducers oil-level plug and drain or add additional oil as
needed. The minimum acceptable oil level is 0.15 in (4mm) below the oil level hole. For mounting orientations other than
shown please consult NORD Gear. New plug locations may be required.
NORD Gear Limited
* Oil level for 3 stage gear units.
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug
NORD Gear Limited
M1
H1
M2
H6
M5
H4
M3
H2
M4
H5
M6
H3
SK 1282
SK 2282
SK 3282
SK 4282
SK 5282
SK 2382
SK 3382
SK 4382
SK 5382
M1
H1
M2
H6
M5
H4
M3
H2
M4
H5
M6
H3
SK 6282
SK 7282
SK 8282
SK 6382*
SK 7382*
SK 8382*
M1
H1
M2
H6
M5
H4
M3
H2
M4
H5
M6
H3
*
* Oil level for 3 stage gear units
SK 9282
SK 10282
SK 11282
SK 9382*
SK 10382*
SK 11382*
SK 12382*
Oil fill level should be verified using the dip stick
located in the oil tank for the M4/H5 position.
M1
H1
M2
H6
M5
H4
M3
H2
M4
H5
M6
H3
*
* Oil level for 3 stage gear units

DRIVESYSTEMS
92 SERIES HELICAL-BEVEL
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug
NORD Gear Limited
M1
B3
M2
B6
M5
V5
M3
B8
M4
B3I
M6
V6
SK 92072
SK 92172
SK 92372
SK 92672
SK 92772
M1
H1/B5I
M2
H4/B5
M5
H5/V1
M4
H3/B5II
M6
H6/V3
SK 92072
SK 92172
SK 92372
SK 92672
SK 92772
M
H6/
M3
H2/B5III
Foot Mount Shaft/Flange Mount
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug
NORD Gear Limited
M3
H2/B5III
SK 9012.1
SK 9016.1
SK 9022.1
SK 9032.1
SK 9042.1
SK 9052.1
SK 9072.1
SK 9082.1
SK 9086.1
SK 9092.1
SK 9096.1
M1
H1/B5I
M2
H4/B5
M5
H5/V1
M4
H3/B5II
M6
H6/V3
SK 9013.1
SK 9017.1
SK 9023.1
SK 9033.1
SK 9043.1
SK 9053.1
M1
H1/B5I
M2
H4/B5
M5
H5/V1
M3
H2/B5III
M4
H3/B5II
M6
H6/V3
M1
B3
M2
B6
M5
V5
M3
B8
M6
V6
M4
B3I
SK 9012.1
SK 9016.1
SK 9022.1
SK 9032.1
SK 9042.1
SK 9052.1
SK 9072.1
SK 9082.1
SK 9086.1
SK 9092.1
SK 9096.1
M1
B3
M2
B6
M5
V5
M3
B8
M4
B3I
M6
V6
SK 9013.1
SK 9017.1
SK 9023.1
SK 9033.1
SK 9043.1
SK 9053.1
Foot Mount Foot Mount
Shaft/Flange Mount Shaft/Flange Mount
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug
NORD Gear Limited
M1
B3
M2
B6
M5
V5
M4
B3I
M6
V6
M3
B8
SK 02040
M1
H1/B5I
M2
H4/B5
M5
H5/V1
M3
H2/B5III
M4
H3/B5II
M6
H6/V3
SK 02040
Foot Mount Shaft/Flange Mount
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Drain
NORD Gear Limited
M1
B3
M2
B6
M5
V5
M3
B8
M4
B3I
M6
V6
SK 12050
SK 12063
SK 12080
SK 32100
SK 42125
SK 02050
SK 13050
SK 13063
SK 13080
SK 33100
SK 43125
M1
B3
M2
B6
M5
V5
M3
B8
M4
B3I
M6
V6
M1
B3/B5
M2
V6/V3
M5
B6/B5II
M3
B8/B5I
M4
V5/V1
M6
B7/B5III
SK 12050
SK 12063
SK 12080
SK 32100
SK 42125
SK 02050
M1
H1/B5I
M2
H4/B5
M5
H5/V1
M3
H2/B5III
M4
H3/B5III
M6
H6/V3
SK 13050
SK 13063
SK 13080
SK 33100
SK 43125
Foot Mount Foot Mount
Shaft/Flange Mount Shaft/Flange Mount
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORDBLOC

= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug
NORD Gear Limited
SK 772
SK 773
SK 872
SK 873
SK 972
SK 973
SK 472
SK 473
SK 572
SK 573
SK 672
SK 673
M1
B3
M2
B6
M5
V5
M4
B3I
M6
V6
M3
B8
M1
H1/B5I
M2
H4/B5
M5
H5/V1
M3
H2/B5III
M4
H3/B5II
M6
H6/V3
SK 772
SK 773
SK 872
SK 873
SK 972
SK 973
SK 472
SK 473
SK 572
SK 573
SK 672
SK 673
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORDBLOC
.1
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug
NORD Gear Limited
SK 072.1
SK 172.1
M1
B3/B5
M2
V6/V3
M5
B6/B5II
M3
B8/B5I
M4
V5/V1
M6
B7/B5III
SK 072.1 F
SK 172.1 F
M1
H1/B5I
M2
H4/B5
M5
H5/V1
M3
H2/B5III
M4
H3/B5III
M6
H6/V3
SK 372.1
SK 572.1
SK 672.1
SK 373.1
SK 573.1
SK 673.1
M1
B3/B5
M2
V6/V3
M5
B6/B5II
M3
B8/B5I
M4
V5/V1
M6
B7/B5III
SK 372.1 F
SK 572.1 F
SK 672.1 F
SK 373.1 F
SK 573.1 F
SK 673.1 F
M1
H1/B5I
M2
H4/B5
M5
H5/V1
M3
H2/B5III
M4
H3/B5III
M6
H6/V3
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORDBLOC
.1
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug
NORD Gear Limited
* Oil fill level for three stage gear units.
SK 772.1
SK 773.1*
SK 872.1
SK 873.1*
SK 972.1
SK 973.1*
*
*
*
*
M1
B3/B5
M2
V6/V3
M5
B6/B5II
M3
B8/B5I
M4
V5/V1
M6
B7/B5III
SK 772.1 F
SK 773.1 F*
SK 872.1 F
SK 873.1 F*
SK 972.1 F
SK 973.1 F*
*
*
*
*
M1
H1/B5I
M2
H4/B5
M5
H5/V1
M3
H2/B5III
M4
H3/B5III
M6
H6/V3
DRIVESYSTEMS
FLEXBLOC

VENT LOCATIONS
Vent locations
NORD can provide a vent kit option for all FLEXBLOC gear units.
Open Vent Kit P/N 22008004 (Vent)
P/N 25308121 (Gasket)
AUTOVENT
P/N 22008050 (Includes Gasket)

STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
The FLEXBLOC worm gear unit is intended to be mounted in one of six positions as shown. For mounting positions other than
shown, please consult NORD Gear prior to comissioning the gear drive unit.
NORD Gear Limited
= Vent
SK 1SI40
M1
H1
M2
H4
M5
H5
M3
H2
M4
H3
M6
H6
SK 1SI50
SK 1SI63
SK 1SI75
P1
P1
P1
P2
P2
P2
SK 1SI31
WARNI NG

To prevent build-up of excessive pressure, sealed vents must
be activated as shown prior to gear unit start up.

M1
P1
M2
M6
P2
M3
M4
M5
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
STANDARD IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 0 - SK 33 Helical Gear Unit
1 Output shaft
2 Key
3 Shaft seal
5 Output shaft bearing, normal
5A Output shaft bearing, reinforced
6 Output shaft bearing
7 Seal
8 Vent screw
9 Shim
10 Driven gear
11 Key
12 Circlip
14 Driving pinion
15 Gear case
16 Pinion shaft, bearing
17 Driven pinion
18 Key
19 Driving gear
20 Seal
21 Plug
22 Gear case cover
23 Pinion shaft bearing
24 Shim
25 Hexagon bolt
26 Washer
27 Spiral pin
30 Seal
31 Shim
32 Seal
900 Rotor with shaft,plain
901 Rotor with shaft,gearcut
902 End shield A
904 Shaft seal
905 Bearing A
906 Bearing shim
907 Terminal box frame
908 Terminal box cover
909 Terminal box frame gasket
910 Terminal box cover gasket
911 Terminal board
914 Cable entry gland
916 Stator case
918 Key
924 Collar bolt
925 Hexagonal nut
929 Bearing B
932 Endshield B
938 Second motor shaft end*
939 Fan
940 Fan cover
941 Key
942 Circlip
943 Key
947 Circlip
948 Circlip
949 Oval at-head bolt
950 Oval at-head bolt
* Optional Part
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
STANDARD IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 010 - SK 330 Third Stage Reduction Gear
14 Driving pinion
20 Seal
21 Plug
27 Spiral pin
30 Seal
38 Key
52 Spiral pin
53 Spiral pin
54 Intermediate shaft, gearcut
55 Hexagon bolt
56 Washer
57 Seal
58 Seal
59 Plug
60 Intermediate shaft, plain
61 Grooved ball bearing
63 Key
64 Shim
65 Driving gear
66 Driving pinion
68 Gear case 3rd.-red.
69 Gear case cover
70 Hexagon bolt
71 Washer
74 Seal
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
STANDARD IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 0 - SK 330 IEC Input
34 Socket head bolt
38 Key
80 Input shaft
81 Circlip
83 Circlip
85 IEC adaptor
86 Input shaft bearing
87 Shaft seal
88 Input shaft bearing
90 Pinion shaft
92 Shim
103 Coupling
106 Set screw
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
STANDARD IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 0 - SK 330 Solid Shaft Input (W)
34 Socket head bolt
35 Shim
38 Key
40 Input bearing housing
42 Grooved ball bearing, normal
42A Grooved ball bearing, reinforced
43 Shaft seal
44 Key
45 Circlip
46 Circlip
47 Circlip
48 Input shaft, gearcut
49 input shaft, plain
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
43
20
8
7
26
17
16
12
11
10
9
34
35
25
24
22
21
5
918
28
6
919
35
990
34
35
TYPE "AS"
TYPE "A"
CUT PINION
SHAFT
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
18
5 Gear
6 Pinion
7 Output Shaft
8 Key
9 Oil Seal
10 Oil Seal
11 Snap Ring
12 Anti-Friction Bearing
16 Spacer
17 Vent Plug
18 Seal
20 Key
21 Spacer
24 Shim
25 Snap Ring
26 Flanged Eye Bolt
28 Gasket
34 Drain Plug
35 Gasket
43 Gearcase
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
990 Oil Level Plug
SK 11E - SK 51E Foot Mount
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
918
919
5 Gear
6 Pinion
7 Output Shaft
8 Key
9 Oil Seal
10 Oil Seal
11 Snap Ring
16 Spacer
17 Vent Plug
18 Seal
20 Key
21 Spacer
24 Shim
25 Snap Ring
26 Flanged Eye Bolt
28 Gasket
34 Drain Plug
35 Gasket
43 Gearcase
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
SK 11E - SK 51E Foot Mount
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK02 - SK52 Foot Mount
1 Gear
2 Pinion Shaft
5 Gear
6 Pinion
7 Output Shaft
8 Key
9 Oil Seal
10 Oil Seal
11 Snap Ring
13 NILOS Ring*
16 Spacer
17 Vent Plug
18 Seal
20 Key
23 Thrust Washer
24 Shim
25 Snap Ring
26 Flanged Eye Bolt
28 Gasket
33 Key
34 Drain Plug
35 Gasket
36 Spacer
39 Snap Ring
40 Bore Plug
41 Shim
43 Gearcase
44 Snap Ring
47 Shim
49 Snap Ring
130 Shim
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
990 Oil Level Plug
918
28
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
CUT PINION
SHAFT
1
2
5
11
39
37
43
36
31
47
49
17
26
40
10
9
34
35
35
990
TYPE "AS"
41
44
6
919
8
7
20
12
16
24
25
22
33
TYPE "A"
18
23
130
13*
* Conditionally used part
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
1 Gear
2 Pinion Shaft
5 Gear
6 Pinion
7 Output Shaft
8 Key
9 Oil Seal
10 Oil Seal
11 Snap Ring
13 NILOS Ring*
16 Spacer
17 Vent Plug
18 Seal
20 Key
23 Thrust Washer
24 Shim
25 Snap Ring
26 Flanged Eye Bolt
28 Gasket
33 Key
34 Drain Plug
35 Gasket
36 Spacer
39 Snap Ring
40 Bore Plug
41 Shim
43 Gearcase
44 Snap Ring
47 Shim
49 Snap Ring
130 Shim
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
1 Gear
2 Pinion Shaft
5 Gear
6 Pinion
7 Output Shaft
8 Key
9 Oil Seal
10 Oil Seal
11 Snap Ring
13 NILOS ring
14 Gasket
15 Inspection Cover
16 Spacer
17 Vent Plug
18 Seal
19 Bolt
20 Key
21 Spacer
23 Thrust Washer
24 Shim
25 Snap Ring
26 Flanged Eye Bolt
27 Bolt
28 Gasket
29 Spacer
30 Input Cover
32 Gasket
33 Key
34 Drain Plug
35 Gasket
36 Spacer
39 Snap Ring
40 Bore Plug
41 Shim
42 Thrust Washer
43 Gearcase
131 NILOS Ring
132 NILOS Ring
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
990 Oil Level Plug
5
16
31
20
8
11
1
23
21
22
25
24
39
41
38
40
2
37
36
29
918
6
919
CUT PINION
SHAFT
10
9
34
35
35
990
33
43
7
26
17
19
15
14
32
30
27
28
12
13
TYPE "AS"
TYPE "A"
PRESS ON
PINION SHAFT
18
42
131
132
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
1 Gear
2 Pinion Shaft
5 Gear
6 Pinion
7 Output Shaft
8 Key
9 Oil Seal
10 Oil Seal
11 Snap Ring
13 NILOS ring*
14 Gasket
15 Inspection Cover
16 Spacer
17 Vent Plug
18 Seal
19 Bolt
20 Key
21 Spacer
23 Thrust Washer
24 Shim
25 Snap Ring
26 Flanged Eye Bolt
27 Bolt
28 Gasket
29 Spacer
30 Input Cover
32 Gasket
33 Key
34 Drain Plug
35 Gasket
36 Spacer
39 Snap Ring
40 Bore Plug
41 Shim
42 Thrust Washer
43 Gearcase
131 NILOS Ring*
132 NILOS Ring*
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15100 - 7 of 12
918
28
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
61
48
4
29
30
63
62
27
58
45
54
59
60
57
55
53
46
52
6
56
CUT PINION
SHAFT
919
3
46
32
SK03 - SK53 Third Stage Reduction Gear
3 Gear
4 Pinion
6 Pinion
27 Bolt
28 Gasket
29 Spacer
30 Third Reduction Gearcase
32 Gasket
46 Key
52 Snap Ring
53 Key
54 Snap Ring
55 Intermediate Shaft, Plain
56 Intermediate Shaft, Gearcut
57 Snap Ring
58 Snap Ring
59 Shim
60 Snap Ring
61 Snap Ring
62 Oil Plug
63 Gasket
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15100 - 8 of 12
SK03 - SK53 Using Third Stage Reduction Gear
3 Gear
4 Pinion
6 Pinion
27 Bolt
28 Gasket
29 Spacer
32 Gasket
46 Key
52 Snap Ring
53 Key
54 Snap Ring
57 Snap Ring
58 Snap Ring
59 Shim
60 Snap Ring
61 Snap Ring
62 Oil Plug
63 Gasket
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15100 - 9 of 12
16
20
8
11
39
38
40
2
10
9
34
35
35
990
33
43
7
26
17
19
15
14
32
30
27
12
13
TYPE "AS"
TYPE "A"
1
23
21
22
25
24
918
6
919
CUT PINION
SHAFT
28
PRESS ON
PINION SHAFT
3
36
49
45
5
29
48
47
46
4
44
51
50
18
37
131
133
41
1 Gear
2 Pinion Shaft
3 Gear
4 Pinion Shaft
5 Gear
6 Pinion
7 Output Shaft
8 Key
9 Oil Seal
10 Oil Seal
11 Snap Ring
13 NILOS Ring
14 Gasket
15 Inspection Cover
16 Spacer
17 Vent Plug
18 Seal
19 Bolt
20 Key
21 Spacer
23 Thrust Washer
24 Shim
25 Snap Ring
26 Flanged Eye Bolt
27 Bolt
28 Gasket
29 Spacer
30 Input Cover
32 Gasket
33 Key
34 Drain plug
35 Gasket
36 Spacer
39 Snap Ring
40 Bore Plug
41 Shim
43 Gearcase
44 Snap Ring
46 Key
47 Shim
48 Bearing
49 Snap Ring
50 Thrust Washer
51 Snap Ring
131 NILOS Ring
133 NILOS Ring
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
990 Oil Level Plug
SK63 - SK103 Third Stage Reduction Housing
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15100 - 10 of 12
3 Gear
4 Pinion Shaft
5 Gear
6 Pinion
28 Gasket
29 Spacer
30 Input Cover
32 Gasket
33 Key
34 Drain plug
35 Gasket
44 Snap Ring
46 Key
47 Shim
48 Bearing
49 Snap Ring
50 Thrust Washer
51 Snap Ring
133 NILOS Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15100 - 11 of 12
2
5
124
39
37
36
31
47
49 40
41
44
6
919
12
16*
24
25
22
33
918
28
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
CUT PINION
SHAFT
1
43
119
120
121*
114
115
116
109
TYPE "A"
117
118
13*
1 Gear
2 Pinion Shaft
5 Gear
6 Pinion
13 Nilos Ring*
16 Spacer*
24 Shim
25 Snap Ring
28 Gasket
33 Key
36 Spacer
39 Snap Ring
40 Bore Plug
41 Shim
43 Gearcase
44 Snap Ring
47 Shim
49 Snap Ring
109 Oil Seal
114 Intermediate Flange
115 Lock Washer
116 Bolt
117 Lock Washer
118 Bolt
121 Bearing Sleeve*
124 Snap Ring
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
SK12/02 - SK103/52 Input Compound Reduction
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15100 - 12 of 12
13 Nilos Ring*
16 Spacer*
25 Snap Ring
109 Oil Seal
115 Lock Washer
116 Bolt
117 Lock Washer
118 Bolt
119 Intermediate Shaft,
Plain
120 Intermediate Shaft,
Gearcut
121 Bearing Sleeve*
124 Snap Ring
SK12/02 - SK103/52 Input Compound Reduction
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15200 - 1 of 12
SK 0182NB - SK 5282
201 Gear
202 Pinion Shaft
205 Gear
206 Pinion
207 Output Shaft
208 Key
209 Oil Seal
210 Oil Seal
211 Snap Ring
212 Shim
214 Gasket
215 Inspection Cover
217 Vent Plug
218 Gasket
219 Bolt
220 Key
221 Snap Ring
224 Retaining Washer
225 Lock Washer
226 Bolt
229 Thrust Washer
231 Snap Ring
232 Gasket
233 Key
234 Drain Plug
235 Gasket
236 Thrust Washer
239 Snap Ring
240 Bore Plug
241 Shim
242 Thrust Washer
243 Gearcase
261 Nilos Ring*
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
219
235
234
215
214
243
210
209
225
224
226
222
221
207
220
201
232
206
207
208
220
205
237
236
229
231
209
213
210
211
212
202
233
239
240
238
242
217
919
CUT PINION
SHAFT
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
918
TYPE "AS"
TYPE "A"
241
TYPE "AS" TYPE "A"
218
261*
261*
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15200 - 2 of 12
SK 0182NB - SK 5282
201 Gear
202 Pinion Shaft
205 Gear
206 Pinion
207 Output Shaft
209 Oil Seal
210 Oil Seal
211 Snap Ring
212 Shim
214 Gasket
217 Vent Plug
218 Gasket
219 Bolt
220 Key
221 Snap Ring
225 Lock Washer
226 Bolt
229 Thrust Washer
231 Snap Ring
232 Gasket
233 Key
234 Drain Plug
235 Gasket
236 Thrust Washer
239 Snap Ring
240 Bore Plug
241 Shim
242 Thrust Washer
243 Gearcase
261 Nilos Ring*
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15200 - 3 of 12
SK 0282NB + SK 6282 - SK 11282
201 Gear
202 Pinion Shaft
205 Gear
206 Pinion
207 Output Shaft
208 Key
209 Oil Seal
210 Oil Seal
211 Snap Ring
212 Shim
214 Gasket
217 Vent Plug
218 Gasket
219 Bolt
220 Key
221 Snap Ring
225 Lock Washer
226 Bolt
227 Bolt
228 Gasket
230 Input Cover
231 Snap Ring
232 Gasket
233 Key
234 Drain Plug
235 Gasket
236 Thrust Washer
239 Snap Ring
240 Bore Plug
241 Shim
242 Thrust Washer
243 Gear case
261 Nilos Ring*
262 Nilos Ring*
263 Nilos Ring*
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
219
235
234
215
214
243
222
221
207
220
201
207
208
220
205
237
236
231
209
213
211
212
217
TYPE "AS"
TYPE "A"
210
230
227
(7 PLACES)
232
202
233
239
240
238
242
241
206
919
228
210
209
225
224
226
TYPE "AS"
TYPE "A"
CUT PINION
SHAFT
918
PRESS ON
PINION SHAFT
218
262*
261*
261*
263*
223
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15200 - 4 of 12
SK 0282NB + SK 6282 - SK 11282
201 Gear
202 Pinion Shaft
205 Gear
206 Pinion
207 Output Shaft
208 Key
209 Oil Seal
210 Oil Seal
211 Snap Ring
212 Shim
214 Gasket
217 Vent Plug
218 Gasket
219 Bolt
220 Key
221 Snap Ring
223 Bore Plug
225 Lock Washer
226 Bolt
227 Bolt
228 Gasket
230 Input Cover
232 Gasket
233 Key
234 Drain Plug
235 Gasket
236 Thrust Washer
239 Snap Ring
240 Bore Plug
241 Shim
242 Thrust Washer
243 Gear case
250 Bore Plug
261 Nilos Ring*
262 Nilos Ring*
263 Nilos Ring*
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15200 - 5 of 12
918
28
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
61
48
4
29
30
63
62
27
58
45
54
59
60
57
55
53
46
52
6
56
CUT PINION
SHAFT
919
3
46
32
SK 2382 - SK 5382 Third Stage Reduction Housing
3 Gear
4 Pinion
6 Pinion
27 Bolt
28 Gasket
29 Spacer
32 Gasket
46 Key
52 Snap Ring
53 Key
54 Snap Ring
57 Snap Ring
58 Snap Ring
59 Shim
60 Snap Ring
61 Snap Ring
62 Oil Plug
63 Gasket
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15200 - 6 of 12
SK 2382 - SK 5382 Third Stage Reduction Housing
3 Gear
4 Pinion
6 Pinion
27 Bolt
28 Gasket
29 Spacer
32 Gasket
46 Key
52 Snap Ring
53 Key
54 Snap Ring
57 Snap Ring
58 Snap Ring
59 Shim
60 Snap Ring
61 Snap Ring
62 Oil Plug
63 Gasket
203 Gear
204 Pinion Shaft
234 Oil Plug
235 Gasket
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15200 - 7 of 12
SK 1382 NB + SK 6382 - SK12382
219
235
234
215
214
243
222
221
207
220
201
207
208
220
203
237
236
229
209 213
211
212
217
TYPE "AS"
TYPE "A"
210
230
227
(7 PLACES)
232
202
233
239
240
238
242
241
206
919
254
210
209
225
224
226
TYPE "AS"
TYPE "A"
205
248
249
247
228
204
246
244
250
245
247
CUT PINION
SHAFT
918
PRESS ON
PINION SHAFT
264*
263*
223
261*
218
262*
261*
201 Gear
202 Pinion Shaft
203 Gear
204 Pinion Shaft
205 Gear
206 Pinion
207 Output Shaft
208 Key
209 Oil Seal
210 Oil Seal
211 Snap Ring
212 Shim
214 Gasket
217 Vent Plug
218 Gasket
219 Bolt
220 Key
221 Snap Ring
223 Bore Plug
225 Lock Washer
226 Bolt
227 Bolt
228 Gasket
229 Thrust Washer
230 Input Cover
232 Gasket
233 Key
234 Drain Plug
235 Gasket
236 Thrust Washer
239 Snap Ring
240 Bore Plug
241 Shim
242 Thrust Washer
243 Gearcase
244 Snap Ring
246 Key
247 Shim
249 Spacer
250 Bore Plug
254 Thrust Washer
261 Nilos Ring*
262 Nilos Ring*
263 Nilos Ring*
264 Nilos Ring*
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15200 - 8 of 12
SK 1382 NB + SK 6382 - SK12382
203 Gear
204 Pinion Shaft
205 Gear
206 Pinion
207 Output Shaft
208 Key
223 Bore Plug
229 Thrust Washer
244 Snap Ring
246 Key
247 Shim
249 Spacer
250 Bore Plug
254 Thrust Washer
261 Nilos Ring*
262 Nilos Ring*
263 Nilos Ring*
264 Nilos Ring*
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15200 - 9 of 12
2
5
124
39
37
36
31
47
49 40
41
44
6
919
12
16*
24
25
22
33
918
28
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
CUT PINION
SHAFT
1
43
119
120
121*
114
115
116
109
TYPE "A"
117
118
13*
1 Gear
2 Pinion Shaft
5 Gear
6 Pinion
13 Nilos Ring*
16 Spacer*
24 Shim
25 Snap Ring
28 Gasket
33 Key
36 Spacer
39 Snap Ring
40 Bore Plug
41 Shim
43 Gearcase
44 Snap Ring
47 Shim
49 Snap Ring
109 Oil Seal
115 Lock Washer
116 Bolt
117 Lock Washer
118 Bolt
121 Bearing Sleeve*
124 Snap Ring
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
SK1282/02 - SK11382/52 Multi-stage Reduction Unit
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15200 - 10 of 12
SK 1282/02 - SK 11382/52
12 Anti-friction Bearing
13 Nilos Ring*
16 Spacer
25 Snap Ring
109 Oil Seal
115 Lock Washer
116 Bolt
117 Lock Washer
118 Bolt
121 Bearing Sleeve
124 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15200 - 11 of 12
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
243
232
CUT PINION
SHAFT
206
919
918
207
208
220
223
223
216
253
252
252
SK 0182NB - SK 11282 & SK 1382 - SK 11382
206 Pinion
207 Output Shaft
208 Key
216 Flange
220 Key
223 Bore Plug
232 Gasket
243 Gearcase
252 Rubber Buffer
253 Bolt
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
CLINCHER

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15200 - 12 of 12
SK 0182NB - SK 11282 & SK 1382 - SK 11382
207 Output Shaft
208 Key
216 Flange
223 Bore Plug
251 Shrink Disc
252 Rubber Buffer
253 Bolt
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORD Gear Limited
CLINCHER
VL2 & VL3

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
207A Hollow Output Shaft
207 Solid Output Shaft
207S Shrink Disk Hollow Shaft
209 (3) Seal
210 (3) Seal
211 (1) Snap Ring
213 Bearing
216A Flange
221(3) Snap Ring
222 Bearing
251 Shrink Disk
253 Screw
261 NILOS Ring
270 Shaft Cover
271 Shaft Cover Screw
272B Dowel Pin
277 Drain Plug (VL2)
277 Oil Level Indicator (VL3)
278 Plug Gasket
279 Oil Slinger (VL3)
282 Seal
284 Spacer
287 (3) Seal
289 Grease Fitting
295 O-Ring
298 (3) Bushing
Parallel Helical Clincher VL2 & VL3
(1) = Needed for 2282/3282
(2) = Needed for 3282/3382
(3) = Varies By Unit
216A 279
295
213
287(3)
298(3)
287
211(1)
221(2)
289
282
277
278
261
207A
207
209(3)
222
284
209(3)
210(3)
270
271
272B 253
270
271A
251
207S
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
708
706
756
720
710
709
TYPE "A"
711
712
713
716
707
TYPE "AS"
717
719
743
714
734
735
747
745
748
703
746
765
919
766
715
722
721
712
723
705
990
735
918
732
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
CUT PINION
SHAFT
734
735 702
740
741
737
703
729
731
733
773
774
775
770
750
739
741
742
738
775
770
773
774
736
701
718
760*
761*
761*
760*
701 Output Gear
702 Pinion Shaft
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
708 Key
709 Oil Seal
710 Oil Seal
711 Snap Ring
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
717 Vent screw
718 Gasket
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
723 Bore Plug
729 Thrust Washer
731 Snap Ring
732 Gasket
733 Key
734 Oil Plug
735 Gasket
736 Snap Ring
739 Snap Ring
740 Bore Plug
741 Shim
742 Thrust Washer
743 Gearcase
746 Key
747 Shim
750 Bore Plug
756 Flanged Eye Bolt
760 Nilos Ring*
761 Nilos Ring*
765 Slotted Round Nut
766 Tab Lock Washer
770 Backstop (If Equipped)
773 Key (w/Backstop)
774 Snap Ring
(w/Backstop)
775 Thrust Washer
(w/Backstop)
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
990 Oil Level Plug
SK 9012.1 - SK 9096.1 Foot Mounted
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15300 - 2 of 10
701 Output Gear
702 Pinion Shaft
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
708 Key
709 Oil Seal
710 Oil Seal
711 Snap Ring
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
717 Vent
718 Gasket
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
723 Bore Plug
729 Thrust Washer
731 Snap Ring
732 Gasket
733 Key
734 Oil Plug
735 Gasket
736 Snap Ring
739 Snap Ring
740 Bore Plug
741 Shim
742 Thrust Washer
743 Gearcase
746 Key
747 Shim
750 Bore Plug
760 Nilos Ring*
761 Nilos Ring*
766 Tab Lock Washer
774 Snap Ring
(w/Backstop)
775 Thrust Washer
(w/Backstop)
SK 9012.1 - SK 9096.1 Foot Mounted
* *
* *
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15300 - 3 of 10
710
709
TYPE "A"
TYPE "AS"
706
702
740
741
737
717
719
714
747
745
748
703
746
765
766
715
703
729
731
705
733
918
732
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
CUT PINION
SHAFT
734
735
773
774
919
718
775
770
756
743
708
720
707
701
713
711
712
735
734
735
721
712
716
722
750
739
741
742
738
723
744
753
775
770
773
774
736
990
760*
761*
749
761*
760*
SK 9012.1 - SK 9096.1 - Flange Mounted
701 Output Gear
702 Pinion Shaft
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
708 Key
709 Oil Seal
710 Oil Seal
711 Snap Ring
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
717 Vent Plug
718 Gasket
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
723 Bore Plug
729 Thrust Washer
731 Snap Ring
732 Gasket
733 Key
734 Oil plug
735 Gasket
736 Snap Ring
739 Snap Ring
740 Bore Plug
741 Shim
742 Thrust Washer
743 Gearcase
744 Flange
746 Key
747 Shim
749 Dowel Pin
750 Bore Plug
753 Bolt
760 Nilos Ring*
761 Nilos Ring*
766 Tab Lock Washer
774 Snap Ring
(w/Backstop)
775 Thrust Washer
(w/Backstop)
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
990 Oil Level Plug
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15300 - 4 of 10
SK 9012.1 - SK 9096.1 - Flange Mounted
701 Output Gear
702 Pinion Shaft
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
708 Key
709 Oil Seal
710 Oil Seal
711 Snap Ring
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
717 Vent Plug
718 Gasket
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
723 Bore Plug
729 Thrust Washer
731 Snap Ring
732 Gasket
733 Key
734 Oil plug
735 Gasket
736 Snap Ring
739 Snap Ring
740 Bore Plug
741 Shim
742 Thrust Washer
743 Gearcase
744 Flange
746 Key
747 Shim
750 Bore Plug
753 Bolt
760 Nilos Ring*
761 Nilos Ring*
766 Tab Lock Washer
770 Backstop*
774 Snap Ring
(w/Backstop)
775 Thrust Washer
(w/Backstop)
*
* *
*
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15300 - 5 of 10
706
717
719
714
747
745
748
703
746
765
766
715
705
918
732
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
CUT PINION
SHAFT
734
735
919
753
752
718
713
711
712
710
709
TYPE "A"
TYPE "AS"
724
725
726
735
734
735
756
743
707
720
710
709
TYPE "A"
721
712
716
TYPE "AS"
722
701
702
740
741
737
703
729
731
733
773
774
775
770
750
739
741
742
738
775
770
773
774
736
990
761*
760*
761*
760*
SK 9012.1 - SK 9096.1 - Shaft Mounted
701 Gear
702 Pinion Shaft
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
709 Oil Seal
710 Oil Seal
711 Snap Ring
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
717 Vent Plug
718 Gasket
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
725 Lock Washer
726 Bolt
729 Thrust Washer
731 Snap Ring
732 Gasket
733 Key
734 Oil plug
735 Gasket
736 Snap Ring
739 Snap Ring
740 Bore Plug
741 Shim
742 Thrust Washer
743 Gearcase
746 Key
747 Shim
750 Bore Plug
752 Torque Arm
753 Bolt
760 Nilos Ring*
761 Nilos Ring*
766 Tab Lock Washer
774 Snap Ring
(w/Backstop)
775 Thrust Washer
(w/Backstop)
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
990 Oil Level Plug
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15300 - 6 of 10
SK 9012.1 - SK 9096.1 - Shaft Mounted
701 Gear
702 Pinion Shaft
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
709 Oil Seal
710 Oil Seal
711 Snap Ring
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
717 Vent Plug
718 Seal
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
724 Washer
725 Lock Washer
726 Bolt
729 Thrust Washer
731 Snap Ring
732 Gasket
733 Key
734 Oil plug
735 Gasket
736 Snap Ring
739 Snap Ring
740 Bore Plug
741 Shim
742 Thrust Washer
743 Gearcase
746 Key
747 Shim
750 Bore Plug
751 Shrink Disc
752 Torque Arm
753 Bolt
755 Rubber Buffer
760 Nilos Ring*
761 Nilos Ring*
766 Tab Lock Washer
770 Backstop*
774 Snap Ring
(w/Backstop)
775 Thrust Washer
(w/Backstop)
*
*
*
*
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15300 - 7 of 10
918
28
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
61
48
4
29
30
63
62
27
58
45
54
59
60
57
55
53
46
52
6
56
CUT PINION
SHAFT
919
3
46
32
SK9013.1 - SK9053.1 Third Stage Reduction Gear
3 Gear
4 Pinion
6 Pinion
27 Bolt
28 Gasket
29 Spacer
32 Gasket
46 Key
52 Snap Ring
53 Key
54 Snap Ring
57 Snap Ring
58 Snap Ring
59 Shim
60 Snap Ring
61 Snap Ring
62 Oil Plug
63 Gasket
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15300 - 8 of 10
SK9013.1 - SK9053.1 Third Stage Reduction Gear
3 Gear
4 Pinion
27 Bolt
28 Gasket
29 Spacer
32 Gasket
46 Key
52 Snap Ring
53 Key
54 Snap Ring
57 Snap Ring
58 Snap Ring
59 Shim
60 Snap Ring
61 Snap Ring
62 Oil Plug
63 Gasket
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15300 - 9 of 10
2
5
124
39
37
36
31
47
49 40
41
44
6
919
12
16*
24
25
22
33
918
28
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
CUT PINION
SHAFT
1
43
119
120
121*
114
115
116
109
TYPE "A"
117
118
13*
SK9062.1/32 - SK9092.1/52 Input Compound Reduction
1 Gear
2 Pinion Shaft
5 Gear
6 Pinion
13 Nilos Ring*
16 Spacer*
24 Shim
25 Snap Ring
28 Gasket
33 Key
36 Spacer
39 Snap Ring
40 Bore Plug
41 Shim
43 Gearcase
44 Snap Ring
47 Shim
49 Snap Ring
109 Oil Seal
115 Lock Washer
116 Bolt
117 Lock Washer
118 Bolt
121 Bearing Sleeve*
124 Snap Ring
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15300 - 10 of 10
11 Bearing
13 Nilos Ring*
16 Spacer*
25 Snap Ring
109 Oil Seal
115 Lock Washer
116 Bolt
117 Lock Washer
118 Bolt
121 Bearing Sleeve *
124 Snap Ring
SK9062.1/32 - SK9092.1/52 Input Compound Reduction
* *
*
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORD Gear Limited
Helical Bevel VL2 & VL3
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
707 Hollow Output Shaft
707A Output Shaft
707S Shrink Disk Hollow Shaft
709 Seal
710 Seal
711 Snap Ring
713 Bearing
722 Bearing
724 Fixing Kit
744 Flange VLII & VLIII
749 Dowel Pin
751S Shrink Disk
753 Screw
754 Shaft Cover
755 Shaft Cover Screw
777 Drain Plug (VLII)
777 Oil Indicator (VLIII Only)
781 Axial Shim
782 Seal
784 Spacer VLIII
787 Seal
789 Grease Fitting
791 O-Ring
795 Oil Slinger (VLIII Only)
797 NILOS Ring
Helical Bevel VL2 & VL3
722 797 784 782 795 744
791
781
787
707A
707
713
789
777
709
710
753 749
755
754
724
755
754S 751S
707S
DRIVESYSTEMS
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15400 - 1 of 7
712
713
707
703
720
714
715
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
743
721
716
712
722
723
TYPE "AS"
711
703
747
745
748
705
746
706
919
767
CUT PINION
SHAFT
728
918
743
734
735
710
719
708
765
766
742
SK 92072 Foot Mounted
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
708 Key
710 Oil Seal
711 Snap Ring
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
723 Bore Plug
728 Gasket
734 Oil Plug
735 Gasket
742 Thrust Washer
743 Gear case
746 Key
747 Shim
765 Slotted Nut
766 Tab Lock Washer
767 Bolt
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15400 - 2 of 7
712
713
703
714
715
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
716
722
TYPE "AS"
711
703
747
745
748
705
746
706
919
767
CUT PINION
SHAFT
728
918
734
735
710
719
743
707
721
TYPE "AS"
710
752
753
749
744
743
765
766
720
751
754
755
724
SK 92072 Flange or Shaft Mounted
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
710 Oil Seal
711 Snap Ring
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
724 Fixing Element Kit
728 Gasket
734 Oil Plug
735 Gasket
743 Gearcase
744 Flange
746 Key
747 Shim
749 Grooved Pin
751 Shrink Disc
752 Rubber Buffer
753 Bolt
754 Cover
755 Bolt
766 Tab Lock Washer
767 Bolt
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15400 - 3 of 7
SK 92072
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
708 Key
710 Oil Seal
711 Snap Ring
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
723 Bore Plug
728 Gasket
741 Shim
742 Thrust Washer
743 Gear case
744 Flange
746 Key
747 Shim
749 Grooved Pin
751 Shrink Disc Connector
752 Rubber Buffer
753 Socket Head Screw
754 Shrink Disc Cover
766 Tab Lock Washer
767 Bolt
DRIVESYSTEMS
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15400 - 4 of 7
710
711
712
707
TYPE "AS"
708
720
703
745
748
741
705
742
766
746
765
731
747
767
769
732
730
728
743
714
715
719
723
721
722
703
716
712
739
713
CUT PINION
SHAFT
918
706
919
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
747
SK 92172 - SK92772 Foot Mounted
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
708 Key
710 Oil Seal
711 Snap Ring
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
723 Bore Plug
728 Gasket
730 Input Cover
731 Snap Ring
732 Gasket
739 Snap Ring
741 Shim
742 Thrust Washer
743 Gearcase
746 Key
747 Shim
765 Shim
766 Snap Ring
767 Bolt
769 Bolt
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15400 - 5 of 7
709
703
745
748
741
705
742
766
746
765
731
747
767
769
732
730
728
743
714
721
722
703
716
712
739
CUT PINION
SHAFT
918
706
919
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
747
TYPE "A"
715
719
713
712
711
TYPE "A"
710
TYPE "AS"
753
749
744
707
708
720
TYPE "AS"
709
710
SK 92172 - SK92772 Solid Shaft + Flange Mount
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
708 Key
709 Oil Seal
710 Oil Seal
711 Snap Ring
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
728 Gasket
730 Input Cover
731 Snap Ring
732 Gasket
739 Snap Ring
741 Shim
742 Thrust Washer
743 Gearcase
744 Flange
746 Key
747 Shim
749 Grooved Pin
753 Bolt
765 Shim
766 Snap Ring
767 Bolt
769 Bolt
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15400 - 6 of 7
709
721
712
TYPE "A"
703
745
748
741
705
742
766
746
765
731
747
767
769
732
730
728
714
715
719
721
722
703
716
712
739
713
CUT PINION
SHAFT
918
706
919
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
707
710
TYPE "AS"
710
TYPE "AS"
709
TYPE "A"
751
753
749
744
743
753
752
720
747
724
754
755
SK 92172 - SK92772 Flange or Shaft Mount
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
709 Oil Seal
710 Oil Seal
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
728 Gasket
730 Input Cover
731 Snap Ring
732 Gasket
739 Snap Ring
741 Shim
742 Thrust Washer
743 Gearcase
744 Flange
746 Key
747 Shim
749 Grooved Pin
752 Torque Arm
753 Bolt
754 Cover
755 Bolt
765 Shim
766 Snap Ring
767 Bolt
769 Bolt
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15400 - 7 of 7
SK 92172 - SK 92772
703 Bevel Gearset
705 Gear
706 Pinion
707 Output Shaft
708 Key
709 Oil Seal
710 Oil Seal
711 Snap Ring
712 Shim
714 Gasket
716 Spacer
719 Bolt
720 Key
721 Snap Ring
723 Sealing Plug
728 Gasket
730 Gearbox Cover
731 Snap Ring
732 Gasket
739 Snap Ring
741 Shim
742 Thrust Washer
743 Gearcase
744 Flange
746 Key
747 Shim
749 Grooved Pin
752 Torque Arm
753 Bolt
754 Cover
755 Bolt
766 Tab Lock Washer
767 Bolt
769 Hexagonal Screw
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15500 - 1 of 11
TYPE "AS"
325
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
306
919
CUT PINION
SHAFT
309
312
311
313
333
308
320
307
301
313
311
312
321
336
337
334
305
332
329
302
918
315
314
319
324
318
990
318
317
323
318
316
337
336
334
335
328
SK 02040 - SK 42125 Foot Mounted
301 Worm Wheel
302 Worm
305 Gear
306 Pinion
307 Output Shaft
308 Key
309 Oil Seal
311 Snap Ring
312 Shim
314 Gasket
316 Drain Plug
317 Vent Plug
318 Gasket
320 Key
321 Bore Plug
324 Gearcase
325 Gasket
328 Bore Plug
329 Thrust Washer
332 Snap Ring
333 Key
334 Snap Ring
335 Shim
336 Thrust Washer
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
990 Oil Level Plug
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15500 - 2 of 11
301 Worm Wheel
302 Worm
305 Gear
306 Pinion
307 Output Shaft
308 Key
309 Oil Seal
311 Snap Ring
312 Shim
314 Gasket
316 Drain Plug
317 Vent Plug
318 Gasket
320 Key
321 Bore Plug
324 Gearcase
325 Gasket
328 Bore Plug
329 Thrust Washer
332 Snap Ring
333 Key
334 Snap Ring
335 Shim
336 Thrust Washer
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15500 - 3 of 11
TYPE "AS"
325
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
306
919
CUT PINION
SHAFT
309
311
313
337
336
334
328
333
308
320
307
301
313
311
321
336
337
334
305
332
329
302
315
314
318
319
324
318
323
918
312
312
335
316
317
318
316
318
990
318
316
SK 02040 - SK 42125 Flange Mounted
301 Worm Wheel
302 Worm
305 Gear
306 Pinion
307 Output Shaft
308 Key
309 Oil Seal
311 Snap Ring
312 Shim
314 Gasket
316 Drain Plug
317 Vent Plug
318 Gasket
320 Key
321 Bore Plug
324 Gearcase
325 Gasket
328 Bore Plug
329 Thrust Washer
332 Snap Ring
333 Key
334 Snap Ring
335 Shim
336 Thrust Washer
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
990 Oil Level Plug
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15500 - 4 of 11
301 Worm Wheel
302 Worm
305 Gear
306 Pinion
307 Output Shaft
308 Key
309 Oil Seal
311 Snap Ring
312 Shim
314 Gasket
316 Drain Plug
317 Vent Plug
318 Gasket
320 Key
321 Bore Plug
324 Gearcase
325 Gasket
328 Bore Plug
329 Thrust Washer
332 Snap Ring
333 Key
334 Snap Ring
335 Shim
336 Thrust Washer
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15500 - 5 of 11
311
315
314
317
319
323
301
309
337
336
334
335
328
333
302
325
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
306
919
CUT PINION
SHAFT
336
337
334
305
332
329
918
313
312
310
318
TYPE "A"
340
341
342
307
320
324
TYPE "AS"
TYPE "AS"
313
312
311
309
TYPE "A"
310
322
318
316
318
990
318
316
318
316
SK 02040 - SK 42125 Shaft Mounted
301 Worm Wheel
302 Worm
305 Gear
306 Pinion
307 Output Shaft
309 Oil Seal
310 Oil Seal
311 Snap Ring
312 Shim
314 Gasket
316 Drain Plug
317 Vent Plug
318 Gasket
320 Key
322 Spacer
324 Gearcase
325 Gasket
328 Bore Plug
329 Thrust Washer
332 Snap Ring
333 Key
334 Snap Ring
335 Shim
336 Thrust Washer
341 Lock Washer
342 Bolt
350 Flange
351 Bolt
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
990 Oil Level Plug
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15500 - 6 of 11
SK 02040 - SK 42125 Shaft Mounted
301 Worm Wheel
302 Worm
305 Gear
306 Pinion
307 Output Shaft
309 Oil Seal
310 Oil Seal
311 Snap Ring
312 Shim
314 Gasket
316 Drain Plug
317 Vent Plug
318 Gasket
320 Key
322 Spacer
324 Gearcase
325 Gasket
328 Bore Plug
329 Thrust Washer
332 Snap Ring
333 Key
334 Snap Ring
335 Shim
336 Thrust Washer
341 Lock Washer
342 Bolt
350 Flange
351 Bolt
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15500 - 7 of 11
918
28
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
61
48
4
29
30
63
62
27
58
45
54
59
60
57
55
53
46
52
6
56
CUT PINION
SHAFT
919
3
46
32
3 Gear
4 Pinion
6 Pinion
27 Bolt
28 Gasket
29 Spacer
32 Gasket
46 Key
52 Snap Ring
53 Key
54 Snap Ring
57 Snap Ring
58 Snap Ring
59 Shim
60 Snap Ring
61 Snap Ring
62 Oil Plug
63 Gasket
918 Key
919 Snap Ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15500 - 8 of 11
3 Gear
4 Pinion
27 Bolt
28 Gasket
29 Spacer
32 Gasket
46 Key
52 Snap Ring
53 Key
54 Snap Ring
57 Snap Ring
58 Snap Ring
59 Shim
60 Snap Ring
61 Snap Ring
62 Oil Plug
63 Gasket
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15500 - 9 of 11
346
345
347
SK13050 - SK43125 Torque Arm
345 Torque Arm 346 Bolt 347 Bushing
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15500 - 10 of 11
SK13050 - SK43125 Torque Arm
345 Torque Arm 346 Bolt 347 Bushing
DRIVESYSTEMS
HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15500 - 11 of 11
SK13050 - SK43125
307 Output Shaft
308 Key
309 Oil Seal
346 Screw
350 Flange
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORDBLOC

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15600 - 1 of 4
10 Driven gear
11 Pinion shaft
12 Driving gear
13 Driving pinion
30 Gearcase
33 Input cover
40 Output shaft
42 Key
65 Shaft seal
80 Spacer
91 Gasket
96 Gasket
113 Oil plug
114 Gasket
118 Bolt
120 Key
124 Shim
125 Snap ring
127 Bolt
134 Vent plug
135 Gasket
146 Key
147 Shim
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORDBLOC

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15600 - 2 of 4
9 Flange
10 Driven gear
11 Pinion shaft
12 Driving gear
13 Driving pinion
30 Gearcase
33 Input cover
40 Output shaft
42 Key
65 Shaft seal
67 O-Ring
80 Spacer
91 Gasket
96 Gasket
113 Oil plug
114 Gasket
118 Bolt
120 Key
124 Shim
125 Snap ring
127 Bolt
134 Vent plug
135 Gasket
146 Key
147 Shim
153 Bolt
154 Grooved dowel pin
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORDBLOC

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15600 - 3 of 4
10 Driven gear
11 Pinion shaft
12 Driving gear
13 Driving pinion
14 Driving gear
15 Pinion shaft
30 Gearcase
33 Input cover
34 Gear case cover
40 Output shaft
42 Key
65 Shaft seal
72 Bore plug
80 Spacer
81 Spacer
82 Spacer
83 Thrust washer
84 Thrust washer
85 Thrust washer
90 Gasket
91 Gasket
96 Gasket
111 Snap ring
112 Shim
113 Oil plug
114 Gasket
118 Bolt
119 Bolt
120 Key
123 Thrust washer
124 Shim
125 Snap ring
127 Bolt
133 Key
134 Vent plug
135 Gasket
139 Snap ring
140 Shim
141 Shim
142 Thrust washer
143 Thrust washer
146 Key
147 Shim
149 Snap ring
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORDBLOC

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
NORD Gear Limited
U15600 - 4 of 4
9 Flange
10 Driven gear
11 Pinion shaft
12 Driving gear
13 Driving pinion
14 Driving gear
15 Pinion shaft
30 Gearcase
33 Input cover
34 Gearcase cover
40 Output shaft
42 Key
65 Shaft seal
66 Shaft seal
67 O-Ring
72 Bore plug
80 Spacer
81 Spacer
82 Spacer
83 Thrust washer
84 Thrust washer
85 Thrust washer
90 Gasket
91 Gasket
96 Gasket
111 Snap ring
112 Shim
113 Oil plug
114 Gasket
118 Bolt
119 Bolt
120 Key
123 Thrust washer
124 Shim
125 Snap ring
127 Bolt
133 Key
134 Vent plug
135 Gasket
139 Snap ring
140 Shim
141 Shim
142 Thrust washer
143 Thrust washer
146 Key
147 Shim
149 Snap ring
153 Bolt
154 Grooved dowel pin
DRIVESYSTEMS
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
This section identies some of the most common issues involved with NORD Gear speed reducers , and provides
recommendations to assist you in dening and answering your questions as you work with our products. You may also
contact our Engineering/Application departments if your questions are not answered in the table below.
U19000 - 1 of 1
Problem With the Reducer Possible Causes Suggested Remedy
Runs Hot
Overloading
Load exceeds the capacity of the
reducer
Check rated capacity of reducer, replace
with unit of sufcient capacity or reduce
the load.
Improper lubrication
Insufcient lubrication
Check lubricant level and adjust up to
recommended levels
Excessive lubrication
Check lubricant level and adjust down to
recommended levels.
Wrong lubrication
Flush out and rell with correct lubricant
as recommended
Runs Noisy
Loose foundation bolts
Weak mounting structure
Inspect mounting of reducer. Tighten
loose bolts and/or reinforce mounting and
structure.
Loose hold down bolts Tighten bolts
Failure of bearings
May be due to lack of lubricant
Replace bearing. Clean and ush reducer
and ll with recommended lubricant.
Overload Check rated capacity of reducer.
Insufcient lubricant
Level of lubricant in reducer not
properly maintained.
Check lubricant level and adjust to factory
recommended level.
Output shaft
does not turn
Internal parts are
broken or missing
Overloading of reducer can cause
damage
Replace broken parts. Check rated
capacity of reducer.
Key missing or sheared off on
input shaft.
Replace key.
Coupling loose or disconnected
Properly allign reducer and coupling.
Tighten coupling.
Oil Leakage
Worn seals
Caused by dirt or grit entering
seal.
Replace seals. Autovent may be clogged.
Replace or clean.
Unit runs hot or leaks
Overlled reducer
Check lubricant level and adjust to
recommended level.
Vent clogged.
Clean or replace, being sure to prevent any
dirt from falling into the reducer.
Incorrect ll level
Improper mounting position, such
as wall or ceiling mount of
horizontal reducer.
Check mounting position on the name tag
& verify with mounting chart in manual.
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTORS - AC INDUCTION,
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
1. Overview
This user manual applies to NORD Motor products and it pro-
vides general information for motor operation, installation,
maintenance, inspection, repair, and trouble shooting, which
is relevant to most of the motor products shipped by NORD.
Information and instructions provided in this manual, safety
and commissioning information and all other manuals appli-
cable to any items supplied by NORD must be observed.
This instruction manual is not intended to include compre-
hensive details and information related to all possible design
variations or accessories options available with NORD motors.
If there is any uncertainty about specic procedures, instruc-
tions or motor details, then please refer these questions to
NORD for additional information or clarication.
Before installing, operating, or performing maintenance on
any electrical motor become familiar with the following:
The detailed operating instructions and wiring diagrams.
All applicable national, local and system-specic
regulations, codes and practices.
The national / regional regulations governing safety and
accident prevention.
The proper use of any tools, transportation or hoisting
equipment, and safety equipment needed to complete
the installation.
To avoid serious injury or possible damage to the
equipment or machine, compliance with all safety and
information notes is mandatory!
WARNI NG

All work involved in the transport, connection, commis-
sioning and maintenance of any NORD product must be
carried out by qualied and responsible technicians. All
applicable national, regional, and local work regulations
and safety requirements must also be complied with.
NORD assumes no liability for personal injury, accidental
death, or equipment damage and malfunctions resulting
from failure to comply with installation or operating in-
structions, safety notes, or any work regulations and laws!
WARNI NG

To avoid electrocution, injury or death, make certain the
motor is properly grounded, completely de-energized and
brought to a no-voltage condition prior to working on any
electrical connections.
2. Motor Types
NORD AC electric induction motors described in this manual
generally include the following types:
Single speed or two-speed design.
Three phase alternating current or single phase design.
Enclosure types: TEFC, TENV, and TEBC.
3. Enclosure Types
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).
TEFC motor designs rely on fan that is mounted on the mo-
tors rotor shaft so the cooling capacity can vary based upon
the motors operating speed.
Totally enclosed, non-ventilated (TENV)
The TENV motor designs rely purely on convection cooling
and they have no fan. Often TENV designs are labeled for
intermittent or periodic duty or at a lower power rating than
is typical for the given motor frame size.
Totally enclosed, blower cooled (TEBC)
The TEBC design uses separate blower or ventilator fan, with
its own low wattage motor and a separate power supply, to
provide continuous airow and cooling. The blower can be
used to extend the speed range of the motor and allow ex-
treme slow speed operation without causing a concern for
overheating. Blower data is provided in Table 6, page 11.
4. Voltage and Frequency Variation
Voltage and frequency variations are based upon the assump-
tion that the nameplate horsepower will not be exceeded and
that the motor temperature may increase. Standard allow-
able deviations are based upon the type of motor labeling.
NEMA and CSA Labeled Motors
Variations are based upon the nominal utilization voltage,
and not the service (supply) voltage as per ANSI C84.1.
Service Voltages Utilization Voltages
120V, 208V, 240V, 480V, 600V 115V, 200V, 230V, 460V, 575V
Voltage variation at rated frequency = 10%.
Frequency variations at rated voltage = 5%.
Combined voltage/frequency variation = 5%.
CE Labeled Motors
Per IEC 60038, allowable service voltage variations on in the
current system, compared to the previous system, are as in-
dicated.
Previous Service Voltages Current Service Voltages
220V, 380V, 660V 230V, 400V, 690V +6/-10%
240V, 415V 230V, 400V +10/-6%
Per EN 60034-1 a 5% voltage variation and a 2%
frequency variation can be tolerated.
The allowed variations are based upon the voltage
(or voltage range) indicated on the motor nameplate.
U30000 - 1 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
5. Motor Nameplate Information
The motor nameplate and the display of technical information may vary slightly depending upon the global standard/s that
the motor conforms to and the efciency level. Please reference the examples below.

Hz rpm
V
INS
rpm
ENCL
DUTY SF
EFF
No.
Mtr
PH
% PF
CODE
LR 112560
US C
E 191510
C
www.nord.com
Hz
A
NEMA
V
AMB
FR
Hp
IP
kW
A
DP
Nm VDC VAC Brake
Hz rpm
V
INS
rpm
ENCL
DUTY SF
EFF
No.
Mtr
PH
% PF
CODE
LR 112560
US C
E 191510
C
www.nord.com
Hz
A
NEMA
V
AMB
FR
Hp
IP
kW
A
DP
Nm VDC VAC Brake
Type SK
Mot Nr
Th Cl F IP S
EN 60034 (H)
V A
kW 1/min
~
COS Hz
MB= Nm, AC V ~ ,DC V=
0
8
5
0
2
0
3
-
0
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 2 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
Field Denition
Model / Type
Number of Phases
Order Number
Serial Number
Insulation Class
IP (Ingress Protection) Enclosure Rating
Duty Cycle
Ambient Temperature Rating (C)
Enclosure Type
Motor Frequency (Hz)
Voltage Rating (V)
Current Rating (A)
Rated Power (HP or kW)
Field Denition
Power Factor
Motor Frame Size
Full Load Speed (rpm or 1/min
2
)
Efciency
NEMA Code Letter
Service Factor
Current Rating (If Service Factor 1.15)
Operating Voltage Rage (A)
Current Rating at Operating Voltage Range (A)
Service Factor at Operating Voltage Range (A)
Brake Rating (Nm)
Brake Supply Voltage (VAC)
Brake Coil Voltage (VDC)
Table 1. Nameplate Data
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 3 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
6. Motor Options And Nomenclature
NORD offers many options for its motors. The option code will be shown in the motor nomenclature.
Below are commonly used options.
Code Description Code Description
AICM Additional Internal Insulation Coating Applied OL TENV Motor Without Fan / With Cover
BRE With Brake OL/H TENV Motor - Without Fan & Cover
EAR Single Phase, Start Cap/Run Cap P Premium Efcient Motors
ECR Single Phase, Start Cap/Run Cap Increased SF RD Canopy Cover
EHB Single Phase, Run Capacitor Only RDD Double Canopy Cover
EP Epoxy Dipped Windings RG Brake Corrosion Protected
F Blower Cooling Fan - 3ph & 1ph RLS Backstop
FC Blower Cooling Fan - 1ph SH Motor Space Heater
FHL Brake Lockable Manual Release SR Brake Dust Protected
H Energy Efcient TF Thermistor
HL Brake Manual Hand Release TW Thermostat
IG Incremental Encoder VN 10:1 Constant Torque Rated Motor
IP66 IP66 Environmental Protection VR 5:1 Constant Torque Rated Motor
IR Brake Current Sensing Relay VW 20:1 Constant Torque Rated Motor
KB Condensation Holes - Removable Plugs VZ-F 1000+:1 Constant Torque Rated Motor
KD Condensation Holes - Open WE 2nd Motor Shaft End
MIK Brake Microswitch WU High Slip Rotor
MS Power Plug Connector Z High Inertia Motor Fan
Motor Nomenclature
100L / 4 BRE 40 ...
Frame Size
Number of Poles
Brake
Ordering Examples
100 Frame Motor with 4 poles, Brake, 100 Nm with
a hand release lever, corrosion protected brake,
and a current sensing relay.
160L 2 BRE 40 FHL SR
Brake
40 Nm Brake Torque
Locking Hand Release Lever
Dust & Corrosion Prot.
63 Frame Energy efcient motor with 4 poles,
Brake, 40 Nm with a locking hand release lever
and dust & corrosion protection.
Brake Size Nm
Other Options
100L 4 BRE 100 HL RG
Brake
100 Nm Brake Torque
Hand Release Lever
Corrosion Protection
4 Poles
Motor Frame Size
2 Poles
Motor Frame Size
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 4 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
7. Application Conditions
Standard NORD motors are designed to operate in dusty or
moist environments and have anti-fungal, thermal class F in-
sulation.
Enclosure Protection Rating = IP55 (minimum).
Maximum Installation Height = 3300 ft (1000 m).
Ambient Temperature = -4 to 104F (-20 to 40 C).
Tropical-proof, Thermal Class F insulation.
The protection level and maximum ambient temperature are
stated on the motor nameplate.
I MPORTANT NOTE
NORD can provide motors for an expanded range of appli-
cations and service conditions including higher protection
levels, extreme ambient conditions and, higher altitudes.
WARNI NG

Consult NORD for recommendations if motors are oper-
ated under extreme loading conditions, exposed to high
inertia loads, or need to operate under unusually high
cycling conditions with high starting and stopping fre-
quency.
WARNI NG

Special design and assembly considerations are needed if
NORD motors are subject to any of the following condi-
tions:
Outdoor installation with motor in a vertical position.
Direct contact with aggressive or corrosive materials
(acids, bases, salts, certain gases, etc.).
Exposure to extreme high or low temperatures, high
relative humidity, condensation moisture or very wet
environments.
Subject to extreme material build-up on the unit (dirt,
dust, sand, etc.).
Hazardous Locations (risk of re or explosion).
8. Transportation
During transportation observe the following:
Make sure that all eyebolts and lifting lugs are tight and
rmly against their supporting surface.
Use all the lifting eyes that are intentionally supplied with
the motor.
Lift only at designed points.
Protect the mounting surface from possible damage
during transportation.
Always use sufciently rated handling equipment, lift
mechanisms and lifting straps.
With heavier objects or unbalanced loads, it may be ap-
propriate to use more than one lifting point or an
additional strap or sling to assure safe transportation of
the assembly. This is especially true of assembled
gearmotors and motorized reducers.
Once the NORD motor or assembly is properly installed,
remove the transportation xtures completely or make
certain they are properly re-secured and tightened.
WARNI NG

Transportation Use of Lifting Devices
To avoid death, serious injury or equipment damage
Hoisting lugs or lifting eyes attached to the motor are
designed for the weight of the motor only! Do not
attach any additional loads!
The motor must only be transported and lifted using
the lifting eyes, in a position that is appropriate for its
type of construction. Otherwise, it could fall over or slip
in the lifting tackle.
During suspended transport, two straps must be able to
carry the entire load weight safely.
When required use additional, suitable means of
support for transportation, installation or removal.
Always secure the support equipment to prevent it
from slipping.
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 5 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
9. Storage
If the motor is not in service, store it according to the follow-
ing conditions:
Store the motor in a clean, dry, dirt-free, vibration free
area.
Storage temperatures of 10C (50F) to 50C (120F) must
be maintained.
Relative humidity must not exceed 60%.
If vibration in the area exceeds 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) at 60
hertz, then vibration isolation pads are suggested to
prevent brinelling of the bearings.
Treat the unprotected shaft end and mating ange
surfaces with a corrosion inhibitor that can be cleaned off
prior to commissioning.
Before placing the motor into service, visually inspect the
motor exterior for evidence of deterioration during
storage. Turn the motor shaft by hand to make sure the
shaft turns freely.
Motor space heaters, when provided, are to be connected
and energized whenever there is a possibility that the
storage ambient conditions will reach the dew point.
Space heaters are optional. Remove motor from the
storage container when the heater is energized.
If the motor needs to be stored for extended periods, or
if it is stored in less than favorable conditions, it is
recommend that the winding insulation resistance be
checked prior to commissioning (page 7).
Even if stored in favorable conditions, the antifriction
motor bearings and motor shaft seals may need to be
replaced if the storage period is more than 4 years.
10. Safety Considerations
When installing, servicing or replacing electric motors it is im-
portant to be working in a voltage-free state. Observe the
following safety rules.
Five Safety Rules
1. Disconnect the system. Disconnect the auxiliary circuits
(brakes, space heaters, etc.).
2. Prevent reconnection (follow safe lock-out/tag-out practices).
3. Make sure that the equipment is at zero voltage.
4. Make certain the equipment is properly grounded and
short-circuited.
5. Cover or isolate nearby components that are still
electrically live.
To energize the system, apply the measures in reverse order.
Qualied Personnel
All work involved in the transport, connection, commission-
ing and maintenance of any NORD product must be carried
out by qualied and responsible technicians.
For the purpose of this documentation, a qualied personnel
is taken to mean a person or people who fulll the following
requirements:
Through appropriate training and experience, they are
able to recognize and avoid risks and potential dangers in
their particular eld of activity.
They have been instructed to carry out work on the
machine by the appropriate person responsible.
They are responsible for knowing and complying with all
applicable national, regional, and local work regulations
and safety requirements.
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 6 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
10. Safety Considerations Ctd.
General Warnings and Cautions
WARNI NG

To avoid electrocution, injury or death, make certain all
electrical devices (motors, brakes, variable frequency
drives, etc.) are properly grounded, completely de-en-
ergized, and brought to a no-voltage condition prior to
working on any electrical connections. Remember that
most of these devices carry potentially dangerous energy
levels for a period of time after power is removed. Always
follow proper lock-out/tag-out procedures.
WARNI NG

Electrical machines contain dangerous voltage levels, elec-
trically live parts, rotating surfaces and hot surfaces. To
prevent injury, death or possible equipment damage al-
ways observe the following:
Keep all safety covers and guards in place during oper-
ation. Remove and replace covers in compliance with
the applicable safety regulations.
Allow the machine to cool down before starting any
work on it.
Operate the machines properly.
Perform regular maintenance on the machine.
Secure and guard free-standing shaft extensions.
WARNI NG

Electrically Live Parts
Electrical machines contain electrically live parts. Fatal or
severe injuries and substantial material damage can occur
if the required covers are removed or if the machines are
not handled, operated, or maintained properly.
WARNI NG

Rotating Parts
Electrical machines contain dangerous rotating parts. Fatal
or severe injuries and substantial material damage can oc-
cur if the required covers are removed or if the machines
are not handled, operated, or maintained properly.
WARNI NG

Hot Surfaces
Electrical machines have hot surfaces. Fatal or severe in-
juries and substantial material damage can occur if the
required covers are removed or if the machines are not
handled, operated, or maintained properly. Allow the ma-
chine to cool down before starting any work on it.
WARNI NG

Maintain Proper Cooling
Operating the motor without the intended cooling fan
may cause overheating and result in very hot surfaces, per-
sonal injury and material damage. Never commission a
motor intended to be fan cooled when it is missing the
shaft-driven fan or external blower assembly.
WARNI NG

Condensation Drain Holes (Optional)
Inserting objects into the condensation drain holes can
damage the winding and can result in death, serious injury
and damage to property!
Before opening sealed drain holes, make sure the
motor is in a no-voltage condition. Close the condensa-
tion drain holes before re-commissioning.
Exercise caution around drain holes that are intended
to be left open, especially when the motor is energized.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Before start-up check the following:
All electrical connections are secure, well grounded
and properly made.
The motor is rotating in the correct direction (when
de-coupled from the driven load).
There are no temperature-sensitive parts (cables etc.),
in contact with motor enclosure.
Condensation drain holes are always located at the
lowest point of the motor.
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 7 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
11. Checking the Insulation
Before putting the motor into operation for the rst time,
after a lengthy period of storage or standstill (approx. 6
months), the insulation resistance of the winding should be
checked.
WARNI NG

During and directly after measurement the motor connec-
tion terminals carry hazardous voltages.
A. Control
The insulation resistance of new, cleaned, or repaired motor
windings against the grounded housing and against one an-
other should be > 200 Mega-Ohms.
B. Measurement
Using a Mega-Ohm meter apply a DC voltage of 500 VDC to
the motor winding for a period of 60 seconds and record the
winding insulation resistance compared to ground.
The 500 VDC test voltage is applicable to low voltage
motors up to 1000 VAC.
When performing this test the temperature of the
windings should be 25C 15C (77F 27F).
C. Verication
If the insulation resistance of the winding is less than 50
Mega-Ohms, the cause may be moisture. The windings
should be dried and the test should be repeated.
After any lengthy period of operation the insulation
resistance may drop. So long as the measured value does
not fall below the critical value of 50 Mega-Ohm, the
motor may continue to be operated.
If the measured value falls below the critical 50
Mega-Ohm level, the cause must be established and the
windings or winding sections must be cleaned, dried,
repaired, or replaced as needed.
12. Bearing Lubrication
NORD motor frame sizes 63 up to and including 225 are nor-
mally supplied with internally grease lubricated bearings and
require no lubrication during normal operation.
NORD motor frame sizes 250 and larger are supplied with
grease ttings for re-greasing the motor bearings.
I MPORTANT NOTE
Motors with grease ttings are normally supplied with a
label indicating the grease type used, the suggested re-
lubrication interval, and the amount of new grease to be
applied. General bearing maintence guidelines are listed
in Table 3.
Typical motor bearing grease is an NLGI No. 2 consistency,
high grade product with a polyurea base thickener, synthetic
or blended mineral/synthetic oil, and stabilizing agents to
protect against heat and oxidation.
Table 3 Motor Bearing Maintence Guidelines
Frame Size Power Poles Re-greasing Interval
63-225
0.16-60 HP
(0.12-45 kW)
All Maintence Free
250 to 280
75-125 HP
(55-75 kW)
2 4000 h
4 to 8 8000 h
315
150-250 HP
(132-200 kW)
2 3000 h
4 to 8 6000 h
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
When re-greasing motor bearings do not to mix different
greases without verifying the compatibility with a repu-
table grease lubrication supplier. Mixing incompatible
products can lead to bearing failure.
13. Mechanical Installation
Integral motors, NEMA C-face motors, and IEC ange mount-
ed motors must be rigidly secured to their mating connection
surface using all fastening screws tightened to the proper
bolt torque. It is good practice to apply a medium strength
thread- locking agent (Loctite 242) to the mounting screws.
Foot mounted motors must be securely installed to a rigid
and level foundation or mounting surface to minimize vibra-
tion and maintain alignment between the motor and shaft
load. All mounting hole locations must be utilized. Tighten
all hold down screws or bolts to the proper bolt torque.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Failure to provide a proper mounting surface may cause
vibration, misalignment and bearing damage.
Accurate alignment and proper balancing of output devices
(couplings, belts, pulleys, etc.) is required to assure quite, low
vibration, trouble free operation. When the motor is directly
coupled to a gear drive or a driven machine make sure that
the motor shaft and driven machine shaft are aligned with
one another axially.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Inaccurate alignment may lead to bearing damage, exces-
sive vibrations and shaft breakage.
I MPORTANT NOTE
For motor replacement guidelines see section 20 on page
15 and section 21 on page 16.
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 8 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
14. Electrical Connections
WARNI NG

To avoid electrocution, injury or death, make certain all
electrical devices (motors, brakes, variable frequency
drives, etc.) are properly grounded, completely de-en-
ergized, and brought to a no-voltage condition prior to
working on any electrical connections. Remember that
most of these devices potentially dangerous energy levels
for a period of time after power is removed. Always fol-
low proper lock-out/tag-out procedures.
I MPORTANT NOTE
External motor brakes have their own connection require-
ments as indicated in the appropriate brake instruction
manuals.
WARNI NG

If the motor has an integral brake, make certain there is
no load connected to the driven equipment before releas-
ing the brake. Otherwise serious injury, death, or damage
to the equipment may result.
The supply voltage and frequency must agree with the
motor nameplate data.
Always feed the connecting leads into the terminal box
using appropriate mating cable glands. The mating
connection cables and cable glands should be suitable for
temperatures 194F (90C).
Provide the ends of the connecting leads and ground
lead with cable lugs or curved ring eyelets before connect-
ing them to the terminal board.
Make certain that the wiring connections and arrange-
ment of the terminal board jumpers conform to the
appropriate wiring diagram as provided in the motor
terminal box and/or page 9 of this manual.
Tighten the terminal board screw connections on the on
the main terminal board per the table below.
Table 4 Tightening Torque:
Terminal Board and Grounding Screws
Thread Size Nut Size Tightening Torque
[mm] [lb-ft] [N-m]
M4 7 0.6-0.9 0.8-1.2
M5 8 1.3-1.8 1.8-2.5
M6 10 2.0-3.0 2.7-4
M8 13 4.0-5.9 5.5-8
M10 17 6.6-9.6 9-13
M12 19 11.8-14.8 16-20
Upon nal assembly, the terminal box cover must be
sealed so that it is dust-tight and water-tight.
Table 5 Tightening Torque:
Terminal Box Cover Screws
Thread Size Tightening Torque
[lb-ft] [N-m]
M4 0.6-0.9 0.8-1.2
M5 0.9-1.3 1.2-1.8
M6 1.1-1.8 1.5-2.5
M8 2.2-3.7 3.0-5.0
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 9 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
L3 L1
V2 T5
U2 T4
W2 T6
high voltage
U1 T1
V1 T2
L2
W1 T3
Y
Y
V2 T5
W2 T6
U2 T4
V5 T8
U5 T7
W5 T9
Y
low voltage
L1
L2
L3
U1 T1 W1 T3
V5 T8
U5 T7
W5 T9
V1 T2
high voltage
low voltage
T1 T2 T3
T6 T4 T5
L1 L2 L3
T5
V2
T3
T4 T6
L3 L2 L1
W2 U2
T2 T1
Y
W2 V2 U2
W1 V1 U1
U1 V1 W1
WIRING DIAGRAM
3 PHASE MOTOR
High Voltage
Low Voltage
T4
T1 T2 T3
T5 T6
T7 T8 T9
L1 L2 L3
T6
T9
T3
T5 T4
L3 L2 L1
T7 T8
T2 T1
Y
Y Y
Frames 63-132
230 / 460V, 60Hz, 3 200 / 400V, 50Hz, 3
190 / 380V, 60Hz, 3
Frames 160 +
230 / 460V, 60Hz, 3 200 / 400V, 50Hz, 3
190 / 380V, 60Hz, 3
120094410
460 / 800V, 60Hz, 3 230 / 400V, 50Hz, 3
208 / 360V, 60Hz, 3 400 / 690V, 50Hz, 3
332 / 575V, 60Hz, 3
2 - SPEED MOTORS
SINGLE WINDING (4-2 & 8-4 POLE)
T4
2U
T5
2V
T6
2W
T1 1U T2 1V T3 1W
S
I
N
G
L
E

W
I
N
D
I
N
G
2

-

S
P
E
E
D

M
O
T
O
R
S
T4
2U
T5
2V
T6
2W
T1 1U T2 1V T3 1W
HIGH SPEED
LOW SPEED
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
Customer Supplied
Starter Contacts
2 - SPEED MOTORS
DUAL WINDING (8-2 POLE)
T4
2U
T5
2V
T6
2W
HIGH SPEED
T1
1U
T2
1V
T3
1W
T4
2U
T5
2V
T6
2W
LOW SPEED
T1
1U
T2
1V
T3
1W
D
U
A
L

W
I
N
D
I
N
G
2

-

S
P
E
E
D

M
O
T
O
R
S
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
Frames 160 +
230 / 460V, 60Hz, 3 200 / 400V, 50Hz, 3
190 / 380V, 60Hz, 3
WIRING DIAGRAM
3 PHASE MOTOR
WIRING DIAGRAM
3 PHASE MOTOR
T1 (U1)
T2 (V1)
L2
T3 (W1)
T5 (V2)
T6 (W2)
T4 (U2)
T8 (V3)
T7 (U3)
T9 (W3)
T1 (U1) T3 (W1)
T2 (V1)
T6 (W2)
T4 (U2)
T5 (V2)
T9 (W3)
T7 (U3)
T8 (V3)
Y Y
Y
L1 L3
L1 L2 L3
*J UMPER WIRES NEEDED
WIRING DIAGRAM
3 PHASE MOTOR
high voltage
low voltage
15. Wiring Diagrams
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 10 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
TF OPTION
THERMISTOR
TW OPTION
THERMISTATS
SH OPTION
SPACE HEATER
FC OPTION
BLOWER COOLING FAN
F OPTION
BLOWER COOLING FAN
1
2
0
0
9
5
4
5
0
1
2
0
0
9
5
2
5
0
1
2
0
0
9
5
2
4
0
1
2
0
0
9
5
2
3
0
1
2
0
0
9
5
2
2
0
FROM MOTOR
TERMINAL
BLOCK
TO
CONTROL
DEVICE
* MAX. OPERATING
VOLTAGE 2.5V.
* SWITCH TEMP.
155C
* RESPONSE TIME
< 5 SECONDS
FROM MOTOR
TERMINAL
BLOCK
TO
CONTROL
DEVICE
* NC (NORMALLY CLOSED)
* CONTACTS RATED 1.6A
AT 2.50 VAC
* 6-500 VAC
WORKING RANGE
* AUTOMATIC RESET AT
30

15C TEMP. DROP
FROM MOTOR
TERMINAL
BLOCK
TO
CONTROL
DEVICE
* CAPACITOR IS SUPPLIED
1 PHASE
115V*
50/60 Hz
* CAPACITOR IS SUPPLIED
230V
50 / 60 Hz
OPTION F 1 PH OPTION F 3 PH
380-575V
50 / 60 Hz
220-332V
50 / 60 Hz
15. Wiring Diagrams Ctd.
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 11 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
Motor Frame
60Hz Ratings 50Hz Ratings
Voltage
[V]
Current
[A]
Power
[W]
Voltage
[V]
Current
[A]
Power
[W]
Single Phase Connection - (Delta)
63 100 135 0.23 42 100 135 0.30 42
71 100 135 0.23 47 100 135 0.30 44
80 100 135 0.27 57 100 135 0.30 43
90 100 135 0.46 102 100 135 0.57 78
100 100 135 0.53 105 100 135 0.54 78
112 100 135 0.60 115 100 135 0.55 80
Option FC 115V 50/60Hz 1ph
Motor Frame
60Hz Ratings 50Hz Ratings
Voltage
[V]
Current
[A]
Power
[W]
Voltage
[V]
Current
[A]
Power
[W]
Single phase connection - (Delta)
63 230 277 0.11 38 230 277 0.10 27
71 230 277 0.12 41 230 277 0.10 28
80 230 277 0.13 44 230 277 0.11 29
90 230 277 0.25 88 230 277 0.26 72
100 230 277 0.28 88 230 277 0.26 70
112 230 277 0.31 107 230 277 0.26 73
132 230 277 0.27 89 230 277 0.29 82
160 - 225 230 277 0.41 140 230 277 0.45 128
Three phase low-voltage connection - (Delta)
63 220 332 0.08 23 220 290 0.10 27
71 220 332 0.08 24 220 290 0.10 30
80 220 332 0.08 25 220 290 0.01 29
90 220 332 0.21 64 220 290 0.28 86
100 220 332 0.21 66 220 290 0.27 86
112 220 332 0.23 70 220 290 0.27 85
132 220 332 0.25 74 220 290 0.32 96
160 - 225 220 322 0.49 165 220 290 0.52 155
Three phase high-voltage connection - (Y)
63 380 575 0.04 23 380 500 0.05 29
71 380 575 0.04 25 380 500 0.05 30
80 380 575 0.04 26 380 500 0.05 29
90 380 575 0.12 62 380 500 0.16 82
100 380 575 0.12 66 380 500 0.16 83
112 380 575 0.13 70 380 500 0.16 82
132 380 575 0.14 75 380 500 0.18 96
160 - 225 380 575 0.28 165 380 500 0.29 155
Option F 3ph & 1ph 220-575V 50/60Hz
16. Motor Accessories
Blower Cooling Fan (Option F & FC)
Connection Diagram Shown on page 10
Option FC is 1-phase, 115V
Option F has capability of 1 phase by connecting a supplied capacitor
Table 6 Option F & FC
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 12 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
16. Motor Accessories Ctd.
Thermostats (Option TW and Option 2TW)
Standard connection Series connected, one per phase
Contact NC (Normally Closed)/ Auto Re-setting
Response Temperature
(Option TW)
311 F (155 C) Shut-Off Device
Response Temperature
(Option 2TW)
311 F (155 C) Shut-Off Device
+ 266F (130 C) Alarm Device
Nominal Current 1.6 Amp at 250 V
Resistance < 50 m
Switch Rebound < 1ms
Insulation Rating 2000 VAC
Cycles 10,000 max
Lead Identication
(inside terminal box)
P1 and P2 or
TB1 and TB2 / 2TB1 and 2TB2
Motor thermostats or bi-metallic switches can be wired di-
rectly into the control circuit without a separate control mod-
ule or tripping device. Thermostats operate on a relatively
high control voltage so they are much less sensitive to volt-
age interference from the main power supply. Often one can
run thermostat leads and motor power leads next to each
other when using the appropriate shielded cable. The in-
staller is responsible to wire the thermostats into the motor
control circuit. The leads may be labeled in a variety of ways
as indicated.
Thermistors (Option TF)
Standard Connection Three devices, series connected,
one per phase
Type Positive temperature coefcient (PTC)
Transition Temperature 150C5 C
Resistance 20 500 (below transition)
> 4 k (above transition)
Reed Current < 1mA
Max Voltage 30V
Lead Identication
(inside terminal box)
P1 and P2 or
TP1 and TP2
With a separate control module or tripping device (ex. Kir-
wan INT69) thermistors are used to sense motor overload/
over temperature conditions by converting the critical oper-
ating temperature limit into large internal resistance change.
Due to their small size, heat sink construction, and high
change in resistance value, minor resistance variations caused
by relatively long lead runs can be tolerated. This feature
also allows for one controller to be used for several tempera-
ture sensing locations. Many variable frequency drives come
with on-board thermistor inputs. NORD does not supply the
thermistor control module.
WARNI NG

Thermostats and Thermistors will automatically reset.
WARNI NG

All wiring must be completed by qualied personal and
adhere to all local codes.
Space Heaters (Option SH)
Connection Diagram shown on Page 9
Space Heaters are mounted directly on the motor winding
The leads are brought into the terminal box and
labeled H1 and H2
They require a separate voltage supply and must not be
energized when the motor is energized
The heaters will keep the winding of the motor
approximately 5C above the surrounding ambient
Table 5. Space Heater Data
Frame Size Wattage Voltages Heater
Strips/MTR
63 & 71 18W
110V
1 230V
460V
80 25W
110V
1 230V
460V
90 112 50W
110V
2 230V
460V
132-180 100W
110V
2 230V
460V
200 & 225 120W
110V
2 230V
460V
Encoder (Option IG)
Most standard encoders will be enclosed inside the fan cover
Incremental, Quadrature, Differential, Marker Channel
IP66 Protection
IG1 = 1024PPR, IG2 = 2048PPR, IG4 = 4096PPR
TTL/RS422, HTL/Push-Pull, Line Driver.
5V or 10-30V available.
Absolute encoders also available.
Seperate encoder wiring instructions are provided by
NORD.
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 13 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
17. Inspection
Inspect the motor after every 500 operating hours.
WARNI NG

If it is necessary to clean the motor exterior, do not use shop air. Shop air can force contaminents into the motor and may
cause parts damage or result in blowing debris causing injury.
Table 8 - Inspection Guidelines
Inspect Check Action
Motor
Exterior
Check the external surfaces for contamination.
Accumulation of dirt and brous deposits must be removed.
Clean the motor external surfaces using clean,
lint-free cloths.
Clean deposits from between cooling ns using a
vacuum cleaner and a stiff-bristled nylon brush.
Check the external surfaces for oil lm and greasy deposits. Clean the oil lm and greasy deposits from the motor
surface using clean, lint-free cloths.
If necessary, moisten the cloth with an approved
non-ammable, residue-free solvent. Do not pour
solvent on the motor.
Check for evidence of damage or overheating. If the motor has physical damage, replace the motor.
Motor
Mountings
Make sure the mounting hardware is secure. If the mounting hardware is not secure, check the
motor/gearbox alignment, and tighten the
mounting hardware.
Motor
Electrical
Connections
Check that all electrical connections are secure. If the electrical connections are not secure,
tighten them.
Check the electrical connections for evidence of arcing. Loose electrical connections can cause arcing, which
is evident by discoloration and charring. If you nd
evidence of arcing, replace the damaged connections.
Insulation
Resistance
Using an ohmmeter, check and record the resistance of
motor winding insulation.
Compare the current resistance reading to
previous readings. If the resistance drops signicantly,
perform an internal inspection for insulation damage
or deterioration.
Motor
Brake
On motors that have a brake, use a feeler gauge to check the
air gap in between the brake pad and the rotor according to
the appropriate user manual.
If the air gap exceeds the maximum allowed for
that brake conguration provided in the manual,
adjust the air gap or replace the brake pad according to
user manual U35000.
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 14 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
18. Parts List
If you are ordering a part, provide the model and order number (table 1, page 2) of your motor. This will determine the
specic part number you need.
Part Number Part Description Qty per Assembly
6 Input Pinion 1
900 Rotor Assembly 1
902 A-Endbell 1
902-1 Screw 4
902-2 Dubo Seal 4
904 Oil Seal 1
905 Bearing 1
906 Preload Spring 1
907 Terminal Box Frame 1
907-1 Screw 4
908 Terminal Box Cover 1
908-1 Screw 4
909 Gasket - Terminal Box Frame 1
910 Gasket - Terminal Box Cover 1
916 Stator 1
918 Key 1
919 Retaining Ring 1
920 Oil Plug 1
920
921
902-1
916
910
907
909
908
960
961
907-1
908-1
905
906
904
902
6
919
TBLK
TBLK-1
902
902-1
923
923
902-1
902-2
902
900 940-1
940
952
939
933
918
932-1
932 947
929
948
900
Part Number Part Description Qty per Assembly
921 Gasket 1
923 Screw 4
929 Bearing 1
932 B-Endbell 1
932-1 Screw 4
933 Oil Seal 1
939 Fan 1
940 Fan Cover 1
940-1 Screw 4
952 Fan Clip 1
960 NPT Thread Adapter 1
961 Plug (includes O-ring) 1
TBLK Terminal Block 1
TBLK-1 Screw, Terminal Block Mounting 2
Jumper Bar (not illustrated) AR
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 15 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
19. Repair
Reference the parts list drawing on page 14 for clarication.
A. Disassemble the motor according to the general
exploded view in PARTS INFORMATION. Disassemble
only as far as necessary to replace the failed parts.
B. Whenever the motor is disassembled, clean all dust and
contamination from the motor interior using a vacuum
cleaner and a soft-bristled nylon brush.
C. The following parts must be replaced if they are removed:
Oil seal (904), Oil seal (933)
Gasket (909), Gasket (910), Gasket (921)
Gasket on plug (961) Self-locking screws
(907-1, 908-1, 923, 932-1, 940-1)
Dubo Seals (902-2)
D. If the following parts are removed, inspect them, and
replace them if they are deformed or damaged:
Retaining ring (919), Retaining ring (947),
Retaining ring (948)
Fan clip (952)
20. Removing and Replacing Integral Motors
Reference the parts list on Page 14 for clarication.
A. Disconnect the power to the electric motor. Make certain
the motor is properly grounded, de-energized and
secured with a lock-out/tag-out device.
B. Drain the oil from the mating gearbox, or rotate the
motor/gearbox assembly so that the motor is up, to
prevent oil from spilling from the gearbox when the
motor is removed.
C. Support the motor and prepare it for removal. Steady the
motor and support it. For larger motors, use of mechani-
cal lifting or support devices to may be appropriate.
D. Remove the fastening screws that hold the motor to the
reducer input.
I MPORTANT NOTE
Most integral motor installations have mounting bolts
accessible from the motor exterior. If the bolts are not
clearly visible, unbolt the input ange from the gearbox.
Remove the bolts securing the motor to the reducer input
ange, and discard the old DUBO sealing rings that were
under the screw heads.
E. Maintain motor shaft alignment and move the motor
directly away from its mounting surface until the motor
shaft and mating input gear clear both the internal gear
mesh and reducer input.
F. Remove and discard the old ange gasket.
G. Clean the gasket faces on the motor and gearbox, making
sure no cleaning debris enters the gearbox.
H. Check the replacement motor to make sure the motor
ange, motor shaft, and motor pinion are identical to the
motor that was removed.
I. Place a new gasket between the gearbox and new motor.
J. Position the motor on the gearbox, making sure the
input pinion meshes with the input gear. Rotate the
motor as necessary to align the bolt holes and seat the
motor ange. Make sure the gasket remains properly
aligned and seated
K. Apply a medium strength thread locking compound to the
bolt threads. Install the bolts and tighten them to the
appropriate torque.
I MPORTANT NOTE
If the motor/gearbox installation uses an input ange,
rst mount the input ange to the motor using the four
mounting bolts and NEW DUBO sealing rings under the
head of each fastening screw. Make sure the fastening
screws are clean and apply new thread sealant if necessary.
L. Check the gearbox oil level in accordance with the appro-
priate User Manual/s. If necessary ll or add oil to the
gearbox.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Do not mix different types of oil!
M. Re-establish the electrical connection to the motor.
N. Observe the subsequent start-up closely to make certain
the equipment is operating properly and there are no seal
or gasket leaks.
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 16 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
21. Removing and Replacing NEMA C-Face or
IEC Fange-Mounted Motors
For further clarication of these instructions, reference the
parts list on Page 14 of this manual.
A. Disconnect the power to the electric motor. Make certain
the motor is properly grounded, de-energized and
secured with a lock-out/tag-out device.
B. Support the motor and prepare it for removal. Steady the
motor and support it. For larger motors, use of mechani-
cal lifting or support devices to may be appropriate.
C. Remove the fastening screws that hold the motor to the
C-face or IEC mounting ange.
D. Maintain motor shaft alignment, and move the motor
directly away from its mounting surface until the motor
shaft and mating coupling clear the mounting ange
surface of the driven equipment.
E. Measure and record the proper placement of the motor
shaft coupling prior to removing it from the old motor.
F. Make sure the new motor shaft, key and key slot are free
of all nicks, burrs, and lubrication or grease.
G. Install the new shaft key on the new motor. If the shaft
key is not captured or if an open-ended key slot is utilized
it is good practice to secure the key into the key slot with
a medium strength thread locking agent or alternatively
one may stake the key in place.
H. Re-install the coupling on the new motor shaft, making
sure the placement of the coupling is in the same location
as it was on the old motor (See Step E).
I. Clean all old gasket material, sealants, contamination, and
corrosion from the ange surface on the driven equipment.
J. If the motor is utilized in a wet or wash down environ-
ment apply a sealing gasket or gasket eliminating com-
pound to the mating ange surface, as would seem most
appropriate for the application.
K. Support the new motor and mount it ush against the
mating ange surface of the driven equipment.
L. Apply a medium strength thread locking agent to the bolt
threads.
M. Install the bolts and tighten them to the appropriate
torque.
N. Re-establish the electrical connection to the motor.
O. Observe the subsequent start-up closely to make certain
the equipment is operating properly.
22. Testing
I MPORTANT NOTE
NORD electric motors do not require periodic testing.
However, if a motor is removed from its installation, NORD
recommends that the motor be checked according to the
following static and dynamic testing procedures before it
is reinstalled. Finding a condition that will require future
repair before the motor is reinstalled decreases the overall
maintenance time.
This section provides general test information and functional
checks for the types of motors covered by this manual. Read
and understand the tests and checks before performing them
on your motor.
Record and date all measurements taken.
If the motor fails any of the test procedures provided below, use
the troubleshooting guide to determine the motor problem.
Static Testing
A. The motor can only be static tested if it is disconnected
from the component it drives and securely mounted on a
xture or mounting plate. These tests are usually con-
ducted when a motor has been removed for any reason
other than failure
B. Turn the motor shaft slowly by hand. Feel and listen for
evidence of a failed bearing, which is indicated by a rough
feel as the shaft rotates, and by noise.
C. Check for smooth rotation, with no evidence of binding or
catching. If the shaft does not rotate smoothly, or binds
or catches, the bearings are worn or failing, lack lubrica-
tion, or are contaminated.
D. Check the motor shaft for side play by applying pressure
at right angles to the shaft in several places around the
circumference. If the shaft moves perceptibly, the front
bearing may be worn.
Dynamic Testing
A. Find the motor voltage and rated load current values as
listed on the motor nameplate.
B. Using a volt-ohmmeter, verify that the motor power supply
is in the correct range.
C. Run the motor with no load. As the motor is operating,
listen for unusual motor noise and check for excessive
vibration. Vibration and motor noise are indications of
bearing contamination, lack of lubrication, damage, or
failure.
D. Use an ammeter to measure the no-load current. Record
the no-load current for comparison with previous
readings, and for reference during future testing.
E. If the motor passes the no-load test, operate the
motor at rated load and check and record the current.
F. Check the motor operating temperature at rated load. If
the motor operates at a higher than normal temperature,
the motor may be damaged, overloaded or failing.
DRIVESYSTEMS
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
U30000 - 17 of 17
NORD Gear Limited
23. Troubleshooting
Fault Likely Cause Corrective Action
Motor fails to start. Motor is mis-wired
Brake is may not be releasing.
Fan guard damaged and contacting fan.
Motor protection device has tripped or
does not switch
1-Ph Capacitor or start switch has failed.
Verify and correct motor wiring.
Troubleshoot brake per User Manual U35000.
Replace damaged fan guard.
Check motor protection device for correct
setting and correct error.
Discharge capacitor and use a volt-ohm meter to
check the capacitor for an open circuit - replace if
needed. Inspect switch and connections. Replace
if contacts look burned or pitted.
Fuses blow or motor
protection faults immediately.
Short circuit in line.
Lines connected incorrectly.
Fuse or circuit breaker tripped.
Motor is overloaded or equipment jammed.
Stator is shorted or went to ground.
Rectify short circuit.
Check circuit diagram and make corrections.
Replace fuse or circuit breaker.
Make sure load is free. Verify motor amp draw
compared to nameplate rating.
A damaged or blown stator will show a burn
mark. Stator must be repaired or replaced.
Motor hums and has high
current consumption
Brake may not be releasing.
Rotor may be rubbing stator.
Defective or incorrect stator winding.
Troubleshoot brake per User Manual U35000.
Send motor to a repair specialist.
Severe speed loss under load
or excessive acceleration time.
Overload.
Excessive voltage drop.
Damaged or failing motor bearings.
Damaged or worn gear unit.
1-Ph Capacitor or start switch has failed.
Check load conditions and make certain system
is unobstructed. Reduce load or consider a
larger motor.
Verify service voltage is within specication.
Check if nearby equipment is affecting incoming
power. Make sure connection harness and wiring
is adequate.
Replace motor bearings.
Replace or repair damaged gear unit.
See instructions under Motor fails to start.
Motor runs the incorrect
direction.
Incorrect wiring. Rewire motor according to system schematic
and/or switch two incoming motor phases.
Motor heats up excessively
or thermal overload
protection trips
Overload.
Ambient temperature is too high.
Inadequate cooling.
Operation is outside the allowed duty cycle.
Motor protection device may be defective.
Excessive supply voltage.
System short or damaged stator.
Make sure load is free. Verify motor amp draw
compared to nameplate rating. Reduce load or
consider a larger motor.
Do not operate above the rated conditions.
Correct cooling air supply. Open and clear cooling
air passages. Retrot with forced ventilator fan
if needed.
Adjust operating duty cycle or contact a specialist
to select a suitable motor or drive.
Replace motor protection device.
Adapt motor supply voltage.
Check for loose, cut or damaged wires. Check
stator winding for defects or burn damage.
Excessive Noise or Vibration Motor bearings contaminated or damaged.
Excessive motor shaft end play.
Misaligned or imbalanced load.
Test motor by itself. If bearings are bad noise may
be heard or roughness detected. Replace
bearings. Add lubrication if bearings have
grease ttings.
Check shaft endplay with motor and system
power disconnected. If shaft movement is
excessive replace motor shaft bearings.
Check all mating shaft connections for proper
alignment and correct all imbalanced load
conditions.
1 Ph Start Capacitor Failures Motor is not coming up to speed quickly enough.
Motor is being cycled frequently
Start switch is defective or damaged.
Verify motor size to load conditions. Motor
should come up to speed in no more than 2-3
seconds.
Verify duty cycle and consult specialist for
recommendations.
Replace start switch.
1 Ph Run Capacitor Failures Possible power surge to motor caused by
transient voltage or lightening.
Excessive ambient temperature.
Install proper surge protection.
Verify ambient conditions do not exceed
nameplate value.
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE
General Instructions
This manual describes general operating and maintenance
guidelines for a majority of brake products shipped by NORD
Gear. This instruction manual is not intended to include a
comprehensive listing of all details or procedures required
for installation, operation and maintenance.
Brakes covered in this manual are manufactured by PRECIMA.
Please feel free to contact NORD with any questions about
the supplied brake components.
Safety Notice
Only qualied personnel should attempt installation, opera-
tion and maintenance of NORD brakes. Read this manual in
its entirety before operating, commissioning, servicing, or as-
sembling the motor brake. If you have a question about a
procedure or are uncertain about any detail, seek clarica-
tion and DO NOT PROCEED!
WARNI NG

This equipment contains high electrical voltage.
Remove and lockout all power from the electric motor
and brake before any work is completed on the brake.
The user is responsible for conforming to all national
and local electrical and safety codes. Wiring practices,
proper grounding, disconnects, and over current
protection, are of particular importance.
Make certain the load is supported when servicing the
brake. Removing power from the brake or removing
the brake from the motor will release the load, which
may cause severe injury or death.
Failure to follow proper procedures and precautions
may result in severe bodily injury or death.
Motor Brake
The standard NORD motor brake is spring-set. When pow-
er is removed and the brake is de-energized (power-off), the
brake springs exert a force against the armature plate in
turn preventing the brake rotor (or brake disc) from rotat-
ing. When the brake coil is energized (power-on), a magnetic
eld builds and pulls the armature plate across the air gap to
the brake casing, which releases the brake rotor and allows
the motor shaft to rotate.
Figure 1: Basic Brake Operation
NORD brakes are DC voltage brakes and in most instances
are supplied with a motor mounted brake rectier for easy
connections to AC power. AC power is taken directly from
the power line or from the terminal block of the motor and
converted to DC by the supplied rectier.
I MPORTANT NOTE
If the motor is connected to a frequency inverter, soft start,
or is a two-speed motor, the AC power must be supplied to
the brake rectier separately from the motor power.
Each NORD motor frame size has a number of brake sizes
available, with different torque capacities.
Brake torque adjustments are possible by changing the
brake spring combinations. In addition, brake sizes from
5-40 Nm (3.7-30 lb-ft) are typically supplied with an addi-
tional spanner-nut adjustment on the back of the brake.
NORD brakes provide a high degree of safety because
when power is removed the brake will automatically set to
hold the load.
The brake rotor or brake disc is environmentally safe and
asbestos-free.
The connection between the rectier and the brake coil is
completed at the factory and the brake air-gap is factory-
set but can be adjusted in the event of wear.
U35000 - 1 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 2 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
Brake Selection
As indicated in the NORD catalog, each NORD motor can be
supplied with a number of brake torque sizes.
NORD relies on the equipment builder to specify appropriate
brake sizing for their application, while giving consideration
to the following:
For most applications, we advise sizing the brake to 1.5 - 2
times the motor rated torque.
For vertical applications, it may be advisable to size the
brake size up to 3 times the motor rated torque.
For some applications, it may be necessary to specify a
reduced brake torque setting to prevent excessive peak
load conditions developed at the reducer output.
On travel drive applications, excessive brake torque may
lead to wheel skid; in addition on crane applications excess
hoist-cable swing can result.
CAUTI ONS

Brake torque - The brake torque is measured with a
mean friction radius of the brake pad surface with a
circumferential speed of 1m/sec (197 fpm).
Brake torque tolerance - For different applications and
operating conditions, brake torque can vary from
+40/-20% compared to the rated brake torque.
Hoisting (lifting/lowering) applications - must have the
brake wired for fast response (DC-switching)
Initial operation & wear-in period - In new condition,
the brake will have a reduced torque of up to 30%.
In order to achieve full rated brake torque, a short run-
in period is required. The run in time will vary
depending on system loads.
The brake rotor or brake pad - must be protected against
foreign matter, oil and grease. Contaminants of this type
can greatly inuence wear and reduce breaking torque.
Brake Torque Adjustment
Brake torque adjustments are possible by changing the brake
spring combinations or by removing springs (Table 1).
In addition, brake sizes from 5-40 Nm (3.7-30 lb-ft) are typi-
cally supplied with a threaded adjustment nut or spanner nut
to allow for additional ne torque adjustments of the brake.
The braking torque can be adjusted by unscrewing the span-
ner nut a number of turns or clicks with a spanner wrench
(Table 2).
Table 1a: Brake Torque Reduction - Spring Removal
"Brake Size" 7 Springs 5 Springs 3 Springs
[Nm] [lb-ft] [Nm] [lb-ft] [Nm] [lb-ft]
BRE 5 5 3.7 3.5 2.6 2 1.5
BRE10 10 7.4 7 5.2 4 3.0
BRE20 20 14.8 14 10.3 8 5.9
BRE40 40 29.5 28 20.7 17 12.5
BRE60 60 44.3 43 31.7 26 19.2
BRE100 100 73.8 70 51.6 42 31.0
BRE150 150 111 107 78.9 65 47.9
On brake sizes 5-150 Nm (3.7-111 lb-ft) full brake torque is
achieved with all (7) springs. The brake springs are placed
in such a manner where there are (3) inner and (4) outer
springs. When adjusting the brake torque, start by removing
the outer springs at opposite corners to prevent uneven
brake wear.
Table 1b: Brake Torque Reduction - Spring Removal
"Brake Size" 8 Springs 6 Springs 4 Springs
[Nm] [lb-ft] [Nm] [lb-ft] [Nm] [lb-ft]
BRE250 250 184 187 138 125 92
BRE400 400 295 300 221 200 148
BRE800 800 590 600 443 400 295
BRE1200 1200 885 900 664 600 443
On brake sizes 250-1200 Nm (184-885 lb-ft) full brake torque
is achieved with all (8) springs. The brake springs are placed
in such a manner where there are (4) inner and (4) outer
springs. When adjusting the brake torque, start by removing
the outer springs at opposite corners to prevent uneven
brake wear.
Table 2: Spanner Nut Adjustment
Brake
Size"
Torque
Reduction
*
Max.
Turns
Minimum
Torque
[Nm] [lb-ft] [Nm] [lb-ft]
BRE 5 0.2 0.15 6 0.8 0.59
BRE10 0.2 0.15 12 1.6 1.18
BRE20 0.3 0.22 12 4.4 3.25
BRE40 1 0.74 9 8.0 5.90
With the minimum number of springs and
maximum number of turns to the spanner nut.
*
Per each turn of the spanner nut
Brake sizes from 5-40 Nm (3.7-30 lb-ft) are typically supplied
with a threaded adjustment nut or spanner nut. Additional
ne torque adjustment can be made by unscrewing the span-
ner nut a number of turns or clicks with a spanner wrench.
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 3 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
Brake Control Rectiers
NORD brake control rectiers convert AC voltage to DC volt-
age. Rectiers are used because most applications require
AC voltage to power the motor, but DC power is required to
power the brake and DC power is not typically available.
NORD brakemotors typically include the rectier located in-
side the terminal box. NORD rectiers can be powered by the
motor terminal block, or by a separate power source.
Rectier Advantages
Individual power source for each brake.
Compact size, mounted inside the terminal box.
Multiple types, voltage options and release/engagement
modes available.
Mountable in a separate control cabinet.
Integral protection against voltage spikes.
Table 3: Rectier Types and Ratings
Type Part No. Input Volt. Rated Output Current
VAC 10% (40C) (75C)
GVE20L
Full-Wave
19141000
(Black)
110-275 1.5 ADC 1.0 ADC
GHE40L
Half-Wave
19141010
(Yellow)
200-480 1.0 ADC 0.5 ADC
GHE50L
Half-Wave
19141020
(Grey)
200-575 1.0 ADC 0.5 ADC
PMG500
Push-Hybrid
19140200
(Black)
200-500 4.0 ADC 2.8 ADC
Full-wave rectier:
The DC output voltage is 90% of the applied input AC voltage.
Half-wave rectier:
The DC output voltage is 45% of the applied input AC voltage.
PMG 500 Push-Hybrid rectier:
The PMG500 push-hybrid rectier is designed to switch
from an initial full-wave mode to a nal half-wave mode.
The PMG 500 rectier can be powered from the motor
terminal block or from its own power source.
I MPORTANT NOTE
The PMG500 rectier is required when utilizing the larger
800 Nm (590 lb-ft) - and 1200 Nm (885 lb-ft) twin-rotor
brakes. In order to prevent rapid wear, NORD recommends
using the PMG500 rectier to overexcite the brake dur-
ing its release. The brake coil should be sized utilizing the
PMG rectier like a half-wave rectier.
Brake Switching Options
The rectiers discussed in this manual can be wired for either
switching the AC power source (input) or the DC voltage
supply (output).
Wiring the DC switching gives the fastest reaction
(de-energize/ brake engagement/stopping) time.
If AC switching is used, the source power can be attached
to the motor brake terminals. Tapping into the motor
terminals gives the slowest de-energize time (stopping),
due to the collapsing time of the motor magnetic eld.
Figure 2: GVE20L, GHE40L, and GHE50L Rectiers
*
RAPID BRAKE REACTION TIME
(DC SWITCHING)
Terminals 1 & 2 - Brake system connection to AC supply voltage
Terminals 3 & 4 -
Installed Jumper for AC switching or
Switch contact (as shown) for DC switching
Terminals 5 & 6 - DC Voltage Connection to the brake coil
*

The normally open contact/s (NO) is not supplied by NORD. It must close
at the same time power is supplied to the brake. The contact must be
capable of switching inductive loads and/or be rated IEC AC3.
Figure 3: PMG 500 Push-Hybrid Rectier

*
(DC SWITCHING)
PMG 500
+
Terminals ~ & ~ - Brake system connection to AC supply voltage
Terminals + & - - DC Voltage Connection to the brake coil
Terminals & -
*

DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 4 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
BRAKE SIZE: BRE 5 BRAKE TORQUE: 5 Nm (3.7 lb-ft) max. BRAKE SIZE: BRE 10 BRAKE TORQUE: 10 Nm (7.4 lb-ft) max.
NORD
Brake P/N
Half-Wave Full-Wave PC VC IC RC NORD
Brake P/N
Half-Wave Full-Wave PC VC IC RC
[VAC] [AAC] [VAC] [AAC] [W] [VDC] [ADC] [] [VAC] [AAC] [VAC] [AAC] [W] [VDC] [ADC] []
19010212 - - - - 22 24 0.92 26.0 19020222 - - - - 28 24 1.17 20.6
19010912 230 0.09 115 0.19 22 105 0.21 500 19020922 230 0.14 115 0.28 33 105 0.32 332
19011902 400 0.05 200 0.11 22 180 0.12 1475 19021902 400 0.07 200 0.15 29 180 0.16 1100
19011912 460 0.05 230 0.10 22 205 0.11 1900 19021922 460 0.06 230 0.11 26 205 0.13 1620
19012212 500 0.04 250 0.08 21 225 0.09 2450 19022222 500 0.06 250 0.12 30 225 0.13 1700
19012512 575 0.04 - - 22 250 0.09 2850 19022522 575 0.05 - - 27 250 0.11 2323
BRAKE SIZE: BRE20 BRAKE TORQUE: 20 Nm (15 lb-ft) max. BRAKE SIZE: BRE40 BRAKE TORQUE: 40 Nm (30 lb-ft) max.
NORD
Brake P/N
Brake P/N
19030222 - - - - 34 24 1.42 16.9 19040232 - - - - 41 24 1.69 14.2
19030922 230 0.18 115 0.35 41 105 0.39 270 19040932 230 0.21 115 0.42 49 105 0.46 226
19031922 400 0.09 200 0.17 34 180 0.19 950 19041902 400 0.11 200 0.22 45 180 0.25 723
19031932 460 0.07 230 0.13 30 205 0.15 1391 19041922 460 0.11 230 0.22 50 205 0.24 840
19032222 500 0.07 250 0.15 36 225 0.16 1391 19042232 500 0.09 250 0.18 44 225 0.20 1150
19032522 575 0.06 - - 35 250 0.14 1780 19042532 575 0.08 - - 44 250 0.18 1425
BRAKE SIZE: BRE 60 BRAKE TORQUE: 60 Nm (44 lb-ft) max. BRAKE SIZE: BRE 100 BRAKE TORQUE: 100 Nm (74 lb-ft) max.
NORD
Brake P/N
Brake P/N
19050252 - - - - 52 24 2.18 11.0 19060252 - - - - 80 24 3.33 7.2
19050952 230 0.27 115 0.54 63 105 0.60 174 19060952 230 0.39 115 0.79 92 105 0.88 120
19051902 400 0.13 200 0.27 54 180 0.30 602 19061902 400 0.21 200 0.42 83 180 0.46 390
19051952 460 0.12 230 0.25 57 205 0.28 740 19061952 460 0.20 230 0.40 91 205 0.44 464
19052252 500 0.10 250 0.20 50 225 0.22 1004 19062252 500 0.16 250 0.32 79 225 0.35 643
19052552 575 0.09 - - 48 250 0.19 1300 19062552 575 0.14 - - 79 250 0.31 795
NORD
Brake P/N
Brake P/N
19070252 - - - - 77 24 3.20 7.5 19080252 - - - - 99 24 4.14 5.8
19070952 230 0.39 115 0.79 92 105 0.88 120 19080952 230 0.51 115 1.03 120 105 1.14 92
19071902 400 0.18 200 0.36 73 180 0.40 445 19081902 400 0.27 200 0.54 108 180 0.60 300
19071952 460 0.15 230 0.31 70 205 0.34 600 19081952 460 0.24 230 0.49 111 205 0.54 380
19072252 500 0.15 250 0.30 76 225 0.34 670 19082252 500 0.20 250 0.40 100 225 0.44 507
19072552 575 0.14 - - 76 250 0.30 825 19081962 575 0.17 - - 95 250 0.38 655
NORD
Brake P/N
Brake P/N
19092252 - - - - 144 24 6.00 4.0 19094252 - - - - 144 24 6.00 4.0
19092952 230 0.62 115 1.24 145 105 1.38 76 19094952 230 0.62 - - 145 105 1.38 76
19093902 400 0.35 200 0.70 141 180 0.78 230 19095902 400 0.27 - - 108 180 0.60 300
19093952 460 0.31 230 0.62 140 205 0.68 300 19095902 460 0.31 - - 140 205 0.68 300
19093962 500 0.29 250 0.57 143 225 0.63 355 19095962 500 0.29 - - 143 225 0.63 355
19093972 575 0.26 - - 142 250 0.57 440
BRAKE SIZE: BRE 1200 BRAKE TORQUE: 1200 Nm (885 lb-ft) max.

I MPORTANT NOTE
NORD
Brake P/N
[VAC] [AAC] [VAC] [AAC] [W] [VDC] [ADC] []
The PMG500 rectier is required when utilizing the larger 800 Nm (590 lb-ft)
- and 1200 Nm (885 lb-ft) twin-rotor brakes. In order to prevent rapid wear,
NORD recommends using the PMG500 rectier to overexcite the brake
during its release. The brake coil should be sized utilizing the PMG rectier
like a half-wave rectier.
19099802 230 0.62 - - 145 105 1.38 76
19099902 400 0.27 - - 108 180 0.60 300
19099902 460 0.31 - - 140 205 0.68 300
Half-Wave [VAC] = AC supply voltage with half-wave rectier Pc [W] = Power to brake coil
Half-Wave [AAC] = AC supply current to half-wave rectier Vc [VDC] = DC brake coil voltage (range -30% to +10%)
Full-Wave [VAC] = DC supply voltage with full-wave rectier Ic [ADC] = DC current top brake coil
Full-Wave [AAC] = AC supply current to full-wave rectier Rc [V] = Brake coil resistance (5%)
When used as a stopping brake, evaluation of brake work is essential. Brake coil data based upon ambient conditions of 20C (68F).
Designed as a holding brake or emergency stop brake only.
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 5 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
General Maintenance
Brake Air Gap
In order to obtain optimal brake performance and maximum
brake life, it is necessary to periodically check and reset the
brake air gap. As the brake rotor wears and decreases in
thickness, the air gap will increase. If the air gap is too large,
the brake coil may not have enough magnetic force to pull
the metal armature disc across the gap and the brake will
drag.
I MPORTANT NOTE
When a complete brake motor is supplied by NORD, the
air gap is already set at the factory. If the brake is ordered
as a part, the air gap must be set in the eld. All brake air
gap adjustments must be made with the brake assembled
onto the motor and power off (brake engaged).
Hand Release Lever (HL)
It is common to supply the NORD brake with a hand release
lever assembly. The hand release lever allows the brake to be
manually released without requiring that the brake be ener-
gized with voltage. The lever has a spring return that allows
the brake to be hand released and returned automatically to
its set position. The handle of the hand release lever can be
unscrewed for easy removal.
Figure 4

I MPORTANT NOTE
When a brake motor with hand-lever is supplied by NORD,
both the hand lever air gap and brake air gap are set at
the factory. When ordered as parts, proper hand-lever and
air gap adjustments must be made in the eld. Hand-lever
adjustments must always be made prior to assembling the
brake to the motor. All brake air gap adjustments must
be made with the brake assembled to the motor and the
power off (brake engaged).
Brake Hand-Lever Installation and Adjustment
Figure 5

Direction of
hand release
Hand lever
Brake Housing
Bolt
Washer
Spring
Pins
y
Hand Lever Air Gap
1. Place the hand-lever over the brake housing (as shown)
and align the pins.
2. Screw the bolts with washer and spring into the pins.
3. Using a feeler gage, adjust the hand-lever air gap per Table 5.
Table 5: Hand-Lever Air Gap Setting
Brake
Size
Dimension y Brake
Size
Dimension y
[mm] [in] [mm] [in]
BRE 5 1 0.040 BRE 100 1.2 0.047
BRE 10 1 0.040 BRE 150 1.2 0.047
BRE 20 1 0.040 BRE 250 1.5 0.059
BRE 40 1 0.040 BRE 400 1.5 0.059
BRE 60 1 0.040 BRE 800 1.5 0.059
BRE 1200 1.5 0.059
I MPORTANT NOTE
When setting the hand-lever gap or dimension y the
magnetic brake coil housing and the anchor plate must be
kept uniform all around.
WARNI NG

To assure proper assembly and proper functioning of
the brake, the hand-lever must be assembled to the
brake, and the hand-lever air gap must be adjusted,
before the brake is assembled to the motor.
Once adjusted properly, the hand-lever air gap setting
should not be altered, even when readjusting the air
gap setting.
Tolerance: + 0.008 in [+ 0.2 mm]
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 6 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
Setting the Brake Air Gap
NORD spring-loaded brakes are virtually maintenance free.
However, the air-gap of the brake rotor or brake disc must
be periodically checked and adjusted. If necessary, the worn
brake rotor must be replaced. Table 6 serves as guide to check
and set the brake air gap as needed.
I MPORTANT NOTE
When a complete brake motor is supplied by NORD, the
air gap is already set at the factory. If the brake is ordered
as a part, the air gap must be set in the eld. All brake air
gap adjustments must be made with the brake assembled
to the motor and the power off (brake engaged).
The brake air gap is checked by placing a feeler gage be-
tween metal anchor plate and the brake coil housing as
shown in Figure 6. This procedure is identical even for the
larger BRE800 and BRE1200 twin rotor brakes.
Figure 6 Setting the Brake Air Gap
MOTOR
END SHIELD
MOTOR
END SHIELD
FIXING
SCREW
SETTING BOLT
(HOLLOW SCREW)
COIL
HOUSING
METAL
ANCHOR PLATE
ARMATURE
PLATE
BRAKE
ROTOR
AIR GAP
AIR GAP
BRAKE
HUB
X
Procedure
1. Loosen the xing screws that attach the brake to the
motors end-shield by approximately half a turn.
2. If required, the brake assembly may be loosened slightly
from the motors end shield by turning the threaded
setting bolts (hollow screws) that surround the xing
screws, counter clockwise, into the brake coil housing.
3. Depending upon whether or not the air gap needs to be
decreased or increased, turn the xing screws accordingly
until the desired nominal air gap (Table 6) is reached, as
measured using the appropriate feeler gauge.
Turning the xing screws clockwise allows the brake coil
housing to be moved towards the anchor plate and
reduces the air gap.
Turning the xing screws counter-clockwise allows the
brake coil housing to be moved away from the anchor
plate and increases the air gap.
4. If the setting bolts (hollow screws) were adjusted as
suggested in Step 2, re-secure the brake coil housing rmly
against the motors end shield by turning the setting bolts
(hollow screws) clockwise, out of the brake coil housing.
5. Tighten the xing screws to the appropriate torque.
6. Re-check and measure the air gap in multiple locations to
check for appropriate spacing. Repeat the steps as needed
until the desired air gap spacing is uniform and consistent
all the way around the brake.
Table 6: Brake Air Gap Settings
Brake
Size
Fixing Screw
Tightening Torque
Nominal Air Gap
Setting
Maximum
Air Gap
[lb-ft] [Nm] [in] [mm] [in] [mm]
BRE 5 2.2 3 0.008 0.2 0.024 0.6
BRE10 4.4 6 0.008 0.2 0.028 0.7
BRE20 7.4 10 0.012 0.3 0.031 0.8
BRE40 7.4 10 0.012 0.3 0.035 0.9
BRE60 18 25 0.012 0.3 0.039 1.0
BRE100 18 25 0.016 0.4 0.043 1.1
BRE150 18 25 0.016 0.4 0.043 1.1
BRE250 37 50 0.020 0.5 0.047 1.2
BRE400 37 50 0.020 0.5 0.047 1.2
BRE800 37 50 0.028 0.7 0.047 1.2
BRE1200 37 50 0.028 0.7 0.047 1.2
Tolerance: + 0.004 in [+ 0.1 mm]
Brake air gap must be re-adjusted before the stated value.
When using the stainless steel friction plate (RG) increase the
nominal air gap to 0.6 mm (0.024 in.).
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 7 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
Brake Rotor (Brake Disc) Wear Assessment
Periodically the brake rotor or brake disc must also be checked
for wear. If the brake rotors wear approaches the minimum
allowed thickness, then the part should be replaced. Use
Table 7 to determine whether or not the brake rotor requires
replacement.
Table 7: Brake Rotor Thickness
Brake Size Nominal Brake Rotor
Thickness
Minimum Brake Rotor
Thickness
[in] [mm] [in] [mm]
BRE 5 0.295 7.5 0.177 4.5
BRE10 0.335 8.5 0.217 5.5
BRE20 0.406 10.3 0.295 7.5
BRE40 0.492 12.5 0.374 9.5
BRE60 0.571 14.5 0.453 11.5
BRE100 0.630 16 0.492 12.5
BRE150 0.709 18 0.571 14.5
BRE250 0.787 20 0.650 16.5
BRE400 0.787 20 0.650 16.5
BRE800 0.787 20 0.650 16.5
BRE1200 0.866 22 0.689 17.5
As new condition.
Worn condition - brake rotor replacement is required!
Brake Pad Replacement (reference to parts list on page 8)
When the brake pad is worn the pad should be replaced to
maintain proper brake operation and ensure safety.
Required Tools
Phillips head screw drivers (fan shroud removal)
External snap ring pliers (fan and brake hub removal).
Large at head screw driver or small pry bar (fan removal)
Metric T-handle wrenches and open-end wrenches.
Procedure
1. Remove the xing screws (946) securing the fan cover (940)
to the motor end-shield (932). If the brake has a hand
release (937), the lever arm should be removed by
unscrewing it.
2. Remove the fan cover (940) and note the position of the
hand release slot if applicable.
3. Remove the snap ring holding the cooling fan (939) and
carefully remove the cooling fan (939), key and second
snap ring (997).
4. If the brake is equipped with a dust boot (992), remove it.
5. Remove the socket head cap screws holding the brake coil
(936) to the motor end-shield (932).
6. Remove the brake coil (936), noting the hand release (937)
and power cable locations.
7. Slide the brake rotor (993) off the brake hub (938) which is
secured to the motor shaft.
8. Clean the brake, install the new brake rotor pad and
reassemble the brake in reverse order of the steps outlined.
Optional Brake Accessories
NORD can supply a variety of brake options and accessories,
of which some of the most common are noted below.
Hand Release Lever (HL)
The hand release lever allows the brake to be manually re-
leased without requiring that the brake be energized with
voltage. The lever has a spring return that allows the brake to
be hand released and returned automatically to its set posi-
tion. The handle of the hand release lever can be unscrewed
for easy removal.

Locking Hand Release Lever (FHL)
This option allows the brake to be manually released and
locked off without requiring voltage to the brake. The lock
mechanism prevents the spring from returning the brake to
a closed state without manual action by the user. The hand
release lever can be unscrewed for easy removal.

Corrosion Protected Brake (RG)
The brake is tted with a stainless steel brake plate to pro-
vide additional corrosion protection in severe and wet envi-
ronments.
Dust & Corrosion Protected Brake (SR)
A rubber-sealing boot is installed on the brake to provide
additional protection in dusty environments. This feature in-
cludes the stainless steel brake plate (RG).
IP66 Brake (IP66)
NORD can also provide an IP66 brake option designed for
a bigger degree of protection against severe environments.
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 8 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
Parts List - Precima Brakes
932
990*
991
992*
993
994
937*
938
946
995 996
936 997
939
940
a Airgap
Normal Design, Enclosure IP55 with following options:
RG Stainless Steel Disc (Item 990)
SR Dust Boot-includes Option RG (Item 992)
HL Hand Release (Item 937)
971 990 998 999
Optional Brake with optional IP66 enclosure
932 Non-drive end shield
936 Brake coil
937 Manual brake lever optional
938 Brake hub
939 Fan
940 Fan cover
946 Fixing screw
971 O-ring - optional
990 Friction plate - optional
991 Setting bolt
992 Dust protection ring
993 Brake rotor
994 Armature plate
995 Spring
996 Pressure plate adjustment**
997 Adjustable ring **
998 Bushing/seal - optional
999 V-ring - optional
** Only for brakes that are 5 Nm to 40 Nm
Table 8: Spare Parts
Brake
Size
NORD Motor
Frame
Brake Rotor
[Item 993]
Brake Hub
[Item 938]
Brake Hub
Bore / (Style)
Hand Release
(HL) [Item 937]
Stainless Disc
(RG) [Item 990]
Dust Boot
(SR) [Item 992]
BRE5 63/71/80 19120042 19100112 15 mm (hex) 19150042 19130042 19110042
BRE10 63/71 19120082 19100212 15 mm (hex) 19150082 19130082 19110082
BRE10 80/90 19120082 19100222 20 mm (hex) 19150082 19130082 19110082
BRE20 80/90/112 19120162 19100322 20 mm (hex) 19150162 19130162 19110162
BRE20 100 19120162 19100332 25 mm (hex) 19150162 19130162 19110162
BRE40 90/100 19120322 19100452 25 mm (spline) 19150322 19130322 19110402
BRE40 112 19120402 19100442 30 mm (hex) 19150322 19130322 19110402
BRE60 100 19120602 19100532 25 mm (spline) 19150602 19130602 19110602
BRE60 112 19120602 19100542 30 mm (spline) 19150602 19130602 19110602
BRE60 132 19120602 19100552 35 mm (spline) 19150602 19130602 19110602
BRE100 132/160 19120802 19100652 35 mm (spline) 19150802 19130802 19110802
BRE150 132 19121502 19100752 35 mm (spline) 19151502 19131502 19111502
BRE150 160/180 19121502 19100772 45 mm (spline) 19151502 19131502 19111502
BRE250 160/180 19122402 19100872 45 mm (spline) 19152402 19132500 19112502
BRE250 200 19122402 19100882 50 mm (spline) 19152402 19132500 19112502
BRE400 200/225 19124002 19100912 60 mm (spline) 19154003 10114020 19114002
I MPORTANT NOTES
For brake coil part numbers, listed by brake size and coil voltage, please see page 4.
The large BRE 800 and BRE 1200 twin rotor brakes are supplied to NORD pre-assembled and complete. For parts list
details and spare parts information please contact NORD.
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 9 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
Brake Times & Electrical Selection
Brake timing performance is critical in selecting the optimal
brake system. NORD brakes can provide exceptional perfor-
mance in terms of the release (start) times and engagement
(stop) times. Use the following guidelines in order to select
the correct brake control components and connections.
1) Determine if the brake needs to be wired directly
from the motor terminal block or powered by a
separate power source.
- If you are using a frequency inverter, soft-start or a
two speed motor you will need to supply the
rectier from a separate power source.
- If the motor is powered direct across-the-line the
rectier power can be supplied from the motors
terminal block.
2) What type of performance do I need?
- Is the standard brake performance OK?
- Is a higher performance required for fast brake release
or very fast brake stopping?
Selection Suggestions
When Fast Stopping is Recommended
Any applications that require quick stops and positive action
at stand-still
Recommended Applications
conveyors and inclined conveyors
hoists and lifts
bulk material handling equipment
(bucket elevators, idler conveyors).
CAUTI ON

Hoisting (lifting/lowering) applications - must have
the brake wired for fast response.
When Fast-Release is Recommended (Overexcitation)
Fast Release is recommended in any application that is very
high-cycling with frequent starts and stops. These applica-
tions require the brake to release very-quickly in order to
avoid excessive heat build-up in the AC motor and brake coil.
Index conveyors
Diverters
Storage and retrieval crane systems
Power Source Brake Release
(start)
Brake engagement
(stop)
Braking
Method *
Rectier
Motor
Terminal Block
Standard Standard (AC switching) 10 GVE/GHE/GUE
Standard Fast (DC switching) 15 GVE/GHE/GUE
Fast (Overexcitation) Standard (AC switching) 30 PMG 500
Fast (Overexcitation) Fast (DC switching) 35 PMG 500
Separate
Power Source
Standard Standard (AC switching) 20 GVE/GHE/GUE
Standard Fast (DC switching) 25 GVE/GHE/GUE
Fast (Overexcitation) Standard (AC switching) 45 PMG 500
Fast (Overexcitation) Fast (DC switching) 50 PMG 500
* Braking methods referenced in connection diagrams on pages 11-15.
Please see important note below:

I MPORTANT NOTE

The PMG500 rectier is required when utilizing the larger 800 Nm (590 lb-ft) - and 1200 Nm (885 lb-ft) twin-rotor brakes. In
order to prevent rapid wear, NORD recommends using the PMG500 rectier to overexcite the brake during its release. The
brake coil should be sized utilizing the PMG rectier like a half-wave rectier.
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 10 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
3) What is the AC brake supply voltage?
The table below determines the rectier and DC brake voltage required, based on the AC supply voltage & braking method.
AC Brake
Supply Voltage (VAC)
Braking
Method
Rectier
Model Type
DC Brake
Voltage (VDC)
Rectier
Part Number
115
(105-120)
20 GVE20L 105 19141000
25 GVE20L 105 19141000
208
(200-208)
10 GVE20L 180 19141000
15 GVE20L 180 19141000
20 GVE20L 180 19141000
25 GVE20L 180 19141000
230
(220-240)
10 GVE20L 205 19141000
10 GHE40L 105 19141010
15 GVE20L 205 19141000
15 GHE40L 105 19141010
20 GVE20L 205 19141000
20 GHE40L 105 19141010
25 GVE20L 205 19141000
25 GHE40L 105 19141010
30 PMG 500 105 19140200
35 PMG 500 105 19140200
45 PMG 500 105 19140200
50 PMG 500 105 19140200
400
(380-415)
10 GHE40L 180 19141010
15 GHE40L 180 19141010
20 GHE40L 180 19141010
25 GHE40L 180 19141010
30 PMG 500 180 19140200
35 PMG 500 180 19140200
45 PMG 500 180 19140200
50 PMG 500 180 19140200
460
(440-480)
10 GHE40L 205 19141010
15 GHE40L 205 19141010
20 GHE40L 205 19141010
25 GHE40L 205 19141010
30 PMG 500 205 19140200
35 PMG 500 205 19140200
45 PMG 500 205 19140200
50 PMG 500 205 19140200
500
10 GHE50L 225 19141020
15 GHE50L 225 19141020
20 GHE50L 225 19141020
25 GHE50L 225 19141020
575
(550-600)
10 GHE50L 250 19141020
15 GHE50L 250 19141020
20 GHE50L 250 19141020
25 GHE50L 250 19141020
Specify Rectier Model Type And DC Brake Voltage
?
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 11 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
Typical Connection Diagrams
___
= Br ak i ng Met hod *

The normally open contact/s (NO) is not supplied by NORD. It must close at the same time power is
supplied to the brake. The contact must be capable of switching inductive loads and/or be rated IEC AC3.
10
JUMPER BRAKE COIL
230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
BR101A
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GVE20
LOW
VOLTAGE
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
MOTOR
STARTER
10
JUMPER BRAKE COIL
460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
BR101B
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GVE20
10
JUMPER BRAKE COIL
460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK
STANDARD RELEASE
NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING)
GP101C
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GHE40
HIGH
VOLTAGE
MOTOR
STARTER
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
10
JUMPER BRAKE COIL
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
180 VDC
205 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
BR601A
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GVE20
GVE20
GHE40
GHE40
LOW
VOLTAGE
MOTOR
STARTER
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
10
JUMPER
BRAKE COIL
400 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
BR601B
230/400Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GVE20
MOTOR
STARTER
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
HIGH
VOLTAGE
10 15
BRAKE COIL
460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING)
BR103B
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GVE20
MOTOR
STARTER
15
BRAKE COIL
460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
BR103C
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GHE40
MOTOR
STARTER
15
BRAKE COIL
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
180 VDC
205 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
BR603A
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GVE20
GVE20
GHE40
GHE40
MOTOR
STARTER
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
LOW
VOLTAGE
15
BRAKE COIL
400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
BR603B
230/400Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GVE20
MOTOR
STARTER
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
HIGH
VOLTAGE
15 15
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
RECTIFIER
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
208 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 208-230YY/460Y GVE20
JUMPER
BRAKE COIL
575 VAC 575 VAC 250 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
BR601C
332/575Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GHE50
MOTOR
STARTER
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
HIGH
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
BRAKE COIL
575 VAC 575 VAC 250 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
BR603C
332/575Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GHE50
MOTOR
STARTER
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
HIGH
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
BRAKE COIL
208 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
BR103A
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GVE20
MOTOR
STARTER
LOW
VOLTAGE
HIGH
VOLTAGE
HIGH
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 12 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
___

20 20 20 20
25 25 25 25
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
BR102A
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GVE20
LOW
VOLTAGE

SEPERATE POWER SOURCE
STANDARD RELEASE
JUMPER
V
B-AC
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
BR102B
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GHE40
HIGH
VOLTAGE

STANDARD RELEASE
JUMPER
V
B-AC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
BR104A
MOTOR RECTIFIER

STANDARD RELEASE
208 VAC
230 VAC
230 VAC
230 VAC
205 VDC
205 VDC
208-230YY/460Y
230YY/460Y
GVE20
GVE20
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
BR104B
MOTOR RECTIFIER

STANDARD RELEASE
460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GHE40
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
BR604A
MOTOR RECTIFIER

STANDARD RELEASE
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
GHE20
GHE20
GHE40
GHE40
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
BR604B
MOTOR RECTIFIER

STANDARD RELEASE
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
400 VAC
575 VAC
230 VAC
332 VAC
105 VDC
180 VDC
230/400Y
332/575Y
GHE20
GHE40
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
BR602A
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER

STANDARD RELEASE
JUMPER
V
B-AC
LOW
VOLTAGE
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
180 VDC
205 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
GVE20
GVE20
GHE40
GHE40
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
BR602B
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER

STANDARD RELEASE
JUMPER
V
B-AC
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
400 VAC
575 VAC
400 VAC
575 VAC
180 VDC
250 VDC
230/400Y
332/575Y
GHE40
GHE50
HIGH
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
208 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 208-230YY/460Y GVE20
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
LOW
VOLTAGE
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
LOW
VOLTAGE
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 13 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
30
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
PMG101A
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500
LOW
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
30
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
PMG101B
MOTOR RECTIFIER
30
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
PMG101C
MOTOR RECTIFIER
30
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
PMG101D
MOTOR RECTIFIER
POWERED FROM
FAST-RELEASE (OVER EXCITATION)
POWERED FROM
POWERED FROM
POWERED FROM
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
JUMPER JUMPER
V
B-AC
V
B-AC
+ +
HIGH
VOLTAGE
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
JUMPER
V
B-AC
+
HIGH
VOLTAGE
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
JUMPER
V
B-AC
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
LOW
VOLTAGE
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
30
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
PMG101E
MOTOR RECTIFIER
POWERED FROM
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
JUMPER
V
B-AC
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y PMG500
HIGH
VOLTAGE
35
BRAKE COIL
230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
PMG102A
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
PMG500
MOTOR
STARTER
LOW
VOLTAGE
35
460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
POWERED FROM
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
PMG500
35
BRAKE COIL
460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
PMG500
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
PMG102B PMG102C
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
V
B-AC
+ + +
35
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
PMG102D
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
LOW
VOLTAGE
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
35
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
PMG102E
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y PMG500
V
B-DC
HIGH
VOLTAGE
___

DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 14 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER

JUMPER
V
B-AC
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
JUMPER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
PMG104A PMG104B
+ +
LOW
VOLTAGE
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
JUMPER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
PMG104E
+
400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y PMG500
HIGH
VOLTAGE
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC MOTOR RECTIFIER
PMG105A
50
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
LOW
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
JUMPER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
PMG104C
+
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
JUMPER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
PMG104D
+
LOW
VOLTAGE
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
PMG105D
50
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
+
LOW
VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
PMG105E
50
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y PMG500
HIGH
VOLTAGE
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
PMG105B
50
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
PMG105C
50
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
+ +
___

DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 15 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
Typical Connection Diagrams - Single Phase Motors
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR BRAKES
U35000 - 16 of 16
NORD Gear Limited
Troubleshooting Cause Remedy
Brake doesnt release Air gap too large Check air gap and adjust
Brake not recieving electrical power Check electrical connection
Failed rectier Replace rectier
Brake is getting too warm Use fast response (FR) rectier
Voltage to brake coil too small Check connection voltageof brake coil
Rectier supply voltage from inverter Rectier voltage must be from seperate source.
(Inverter output voltage varies)
Brake release is delayed Air gap too large Check air gap and adjust
Voltage to brake coil too small Check connection voltage of brake coil
Brake does not engage Voltage to coil too large Check connection voltages of brake windings
Hand release is adjusted incorrectly Adjust to correct air gap
Anchor plate mechanically blocked Remove mechanical blockage
Brake engagement is
delayed
Voltage to coil too large Check connection voltage of brake windings
Brake is switched to AC side Use DC switching
Troubleshooting Information
DRIVESYSTEMS
FAST ACTING BRAKE RECTIFIERS
(GPE, GPU & PMG)
U35100 - 1 of 10
NORD Gear Limited
General Instructions
This manual provides general operating instructions for the
Fast Acting Brake Rectiers type GPE, GPU, and PMG that
are commonly offered by NORD in addition to the standard
brake control rectiers. Please feel free to contact NORD
with any questions concerning the supplied brake rectiers
and brake components.
Safety Notice
Only qualied personnel should attempt installation, opera-
tion and maintenance of NORD brakes and brake rectiers.
If you have a question about a procedure or are uncertain
about any detail, seek clarication and DO NOT PROCEED.
WARNI NG

This equipment contains high electrical voltage.
Remove and lockout all power from the electric motor
and brake before any work is completed on the brake.
The user is responsible for conforming to all national
and local electrical and safety codes. Wiring practices,
proper grounding, disconnects, and over current
protection, are of particular importance.
Make certain the load is supported when servicing the
brake. Removing power from the brake or removing
the brake from the motor will release the load, which
may cause severe injury or death.
Failure to follow proper procedures and precautions
may result in severe bodily injury or death.
Fast Acting Brake Rectiers
Like the standard NORD brake control rectiers, NORDs fast
acting brake control rectiers convert AC voltage to DC volt-
age. The Fast Acting Brake Rectiers type GPE, GPU, and
PMG are utilized to improved brake performance and are
often recommended in order to provide shorter brake re-
lease times or to provide faster stopping times.
All of the fast acting rectiers are a two-stage push de-
sign meaning that when power is rst applied these rectiers
operate like a full-wave rectier and then after a relatively
short period of time they act like a half-wave rectier. For
example, the GP type rectiers start out in full-wave mode
when power is rst applied and then after approximately 250
ms they act like a half-wave rectiers.
Table 1 : Fast Acting Brake Rectiers Types and Ratings
Type Part No. Input Volt. Rated Output Current
VAC 10% (40 C) (75 C)
GPE20L
Push-Hybrid
19140230
(Black)
200-275 0.70 ADC 0.50 ADC
GPE40L
Push-Hybrid
19140240
(Black)
330-500 0.70 ADC 0.50 ADC
GPU20L
Push-Hybrid
19140090
(Black)
200-275 0.70 ADC 0.50 ADC
GPU40L
Push-Hybrid
19140170
(Black)
330-500 0.70 ADC 0.50 ADC
PMG500
Push-Hybrid
19140200
(Black)
200-500 4.0 ADC 2.8 ADC
GPE and PMG Rectiers - External DC Switching
Designed for external control of the brakes DC-switching.
Primarily used in across-the-line applications where the
brake power is supplied by the motor terminals.
May also be used in situations where the brake power is
supplied separate from the motor.
GPU Rectiers - Integrated DC Switching/Voltage Sensing
This type of rectier is primarily used when the brake is
powered separately from the motor.
This includes applications involving two-speed motors and
motors powered by an inverter or soft-starter.
I MPORTANT NOTE
The GPU rectier may also be utilized for across-the-line
applications; however it must always be powered separate
from the motor and have its own pair of contactors or
starters. It is unadvisable to use the motor terminal block
to supply the GPU rectiers AC power due to the motors
slow energy dissipation when switched off.
I MPORTANT NOTE
If the motor is connected to a frequency inverter, soft start,
or is a two-speed motor, the AC power must be supplied to
the brake rectier seperately from the motor power.
There are two ways to apply the fast acting brake rectiers.
In the rst method, known as Overexcitation, the brake
is released very quickly.
In the second method, known as Reduced Power
Holding, the brake is set very quickly, allowing for very
fast stopping times.
NORD brake motors typically include the rectier located in
the motor terminal box.
DRIVESYSTEMS
(GPE, GPU & PMG)
NORD Gear Limited
U35100 - 2 of 10
DC-Switching Fast Brake Engagement (stopping)
The Fast Acting Brake Rectiers type GPE, GPU, and PMG
can be wired for DC switching. DC switching directly inter-
rupts the current ow in the rectiers DC circuit and provides
much faster stopping than when the brake is switched with
the application or by removal of the normal AC power.
WARNI NG

brake wired for fast response (DC-switching).
GPE Rectiers External DC Switching
To implement DC switching, a contact must be installed in
between terminals 3 and 4 on the brake rectier in place
of the factory-installed jumper. This switch must close when
power is supplied to the rectier (at terminals 1 and 2) and
the switch must open when power is removed. The contact
between terminals 3 & 4 must be capable of switching induc-
tive loads, and/or be IEC AC3 rated.
Figure 1 : GPE Rectiers External DC Switching
Terminals 3 & 4 -
*

I MPORTANT NOTE
As indicated in User Manual U35200, the IR relay can also
be used in place of the external switch between terminals
3 and 4, in order to provide automatic DC switching once
power is removed from the motor. The IR relay can only be
used under the following two conditions.
the motor is directly powered across the line.
when the brake power is provided via the motors
power terminal.
GPU Rectiers Integrated DC Switching / Voltage Sensing
These GPU rectiers integrate DC-Switching, which is trig-
gered by sensing the AC voltage supplied to the rectier.
When no voltage is present the GPU rectier automatically
opens the DC circuit. The GPU rectier is primarily designed
for use with a separate brake power source, such as inverter-
powered motors, soft-start motors, and two-speed motors.
I MPORTANT NOTE
It is unadvisable to use the motor terminal block to sup-
ply the GPU rectiers AC power due to the motors slow
energy dissipation when switched off.
Figure 2a : GPU Rectiers Integrated DC Switching
Terminals 3 & 4 - No Jumper Connected
The DC-switching function of the GPU brake rectier can be
disabled (and AC-switching can be enabled) by shorting ter-
minals 3 & 4 via a jumper or an external switch.
Figure 2b : GPU Rectiers AC Switching
Terminals 3 & 4 - Jumper Connected
DRIVESYSTEMS
(GPE, GPU & PMG)
NORD Gear Limited
U35100 - 3 of 10
PMG500 Rectier External DC Switching
The PMG500 rectier operates in a similar fashion as the GPE
rectiers. To implement DC switching, a contact must be in-
stalled in as indicated in Figure 3. This switch must close when
power is supplied to the rectier and the switch must open
when power is removed. The DC switching contact must be
capable of switching inductive loads, and/or be IEC AC3 rated.
Figure 3 : PMG500 Rectier External DC Switching
*
(DC SWITCHING)
PMG 500
+
Terminals ~ & ~ - Brake system connection to AC supply voltage
Terminals + & - - DC Voltage Connection to the brake coil
Terminals & -
*

I MPORTANT NOTE
As indicated in User Manual U35000, the PMG500 rectier
is required when utilizing the larger 800 Nm (590 lb-ft)
- and 1200 Nm (885 lb-ft) twin-rotor brakes. In order to
prevent rapid wear, NORD recommends using the PMG500
rectier to overexcite the brake during its release. The
brake coil should be sized utilizing the PMG rectier like
a half-wave rectier. The PMG500 push-hybrid rectier is
designed to switch from an initial full-wave mode to a -
nal half-wave mode and may be powered from the motor
terminal block or from its own power source.
Methods of Operation:
Overexcitaion vs Reduced Power Holding
There are two ways to apply the fast acting brake rectiers.
In the rst method, known as Overexcitation, the brake
is released very quickly.
In the second method, known as Reduced Power
Hold-ing, the brake is set very quickly, allowing for very
fast stopping times.
Overexcitation (Fast Brake Release)
In overexcitation the rectier initially over-voltages the brake
coil. This overexcitation of the rectier produces a magnetic
eld in the brake coil that is stronger than normal, releasing
the brake much more quickly. The rectier is then switched
over to a lower holding voltage so as not to thermally over-
load the brake coil. In this method the brake coil is selected
as if the brake system is powered by a half-wave rectier.
Therefore, the brake coils DC-voltage rating should be 45%
of the AC voltage applied to the rectier. This type of brake
control is also called Voltage Forcing and Supercharging.
Example
System voltage: 230VAC
Brake coil: 105VDC
Initial brake release voltage: 205VDC
Holding brake voltage: 105VDC
Reduced Power Holding (Fast Brake Stopping)
In reduced power holding, the rectier initially supplies the
rated DC voltage to the brake coil. When voltage is rst ap-
plied, the rectier operates as a full-wave rectier (90% of
the applied AC voltage), releasing the brake in the standard
time. After the brake is released, the rectier switches to
half-wave mode (45% of the applied DC voltage), weaken-
ing the brakes magnetic eld. The weaker eld will allow
the brake to stop more quickly when power is removed. In
this method the brake coil is selected as if the brake system is
powered by a full-wave rectier. Therefore, the brake coils
DC-voltage rating should be 90% of the AC voltage applied
to the rectier.
Example
System voltage: 230VAC
Brake coil: 205VDC
Initial brake release voltage: 205VDC
Holding brake voltage: 105VDC
DRIVESYSTEMS
(GPE, GPU & PMG)
NORD Gear Limited
U35100 - 4 of 10
Brake Times & Electrical Selection
Brake timing performance is critical in selecting the optimal
brake system. NORD brakes can provide exceptional perfor-
mance in terms of the release (start) times and engagement
(stop) times. Use the following guidelines in order to select
the correct brake control components and connections.
1) Determine if the brake needs to be wired directly
from the motor terminal block or powered by a separate
source.
- If you are using a frequency inverter, soft-start or a two
speed motor you will need to supply the rectier from a
separate power source.
- If the motor is powered direct across-the-line the rectier
power can be supplied from the motors terminal block.
2) What type of performance do I need?
- Is the standard brake performance OK?
- Is a higher performance required for fast brake release or
very fast brake stopping?
Selection Suggestions
When Fast or Very Fast Stopping is Recommended
Any applications that require quick stops and positive action
at stand-still
conveyors and inclined conveyors
hoists and lifts
bulk material handling equipment (bucket elevators,
idler conveyors).
WARNI NG

brake wired for fast response (DC-switching)
When Fast-Release is Recommended (Overexcitation)
Any application that is very high-cycling with frequent starts
and stops. These applications require the brake to release
very-quickly in order to avoid excessive heat build-up in the
AC motor and brake coil.
Index conveyors
Diverters
Power Source Brake Release (start) Brake engagement (stop) Braking Method * Rectier
Motor
Terminal Block
Standard Very Fast (Reduced power holding) 40 GPE or PMG 500
Fast (Overexcitation) Standard (AC switching) 30 GPE or PMG 500
Fast (Overexcitation) Fast (DC switching) 35 GPE or PMG 500
Seperate
Power Source
Standard Very Fast (Reduced power holding) 55 GPU or PMG 500
Fast (Overexcitation) Standard (AC switching) 45 GPU or PMG 500
Fast (Overexcitation) Fast (DC switching) 50 GPU or PMG 500
* Braking methods referenced in connection diagrams on pages 6-10.
DRIVESYSTEMS
(GPE, GPU & PMG)
NORD Gear Limited
U35100 - 5 of 10
Supply
Voltage
(VAC)
Braking
Method
Rectier
Type
Rectier
P/N
Coil
Voltage
(VDC)
Brake Compatibility
B
R
E
5
B
R
E
1
0
B
R
E
2
0
B
R
E
4
0
B
R
E
6
0
B
R
E
1
0
0
B
R
E
1
5
0
B
R
E
2
5
0
B
R
E
4
0
0
B
R
E
8
0
0
B
R
E
1
2
0
0
208
(200-208)
30 GPE20L 19140230 105 X X X X
30 PMG500 19140230 105 X X X X X X X X X X X
35 GPE20L 19140230 105 X X X X
35 PMG500 19140230 105 X X X X X X X X X X X
40 GPE20L 19140230 180 X X X X X X X
40 PMG500 19140200 180 X X X X X X X X X X X
45 GPU20L 19140090 105 X X X X
45 PMG500 19140200 105 X X X X X X X X X X X
50 GPU20L 19140090 105 X X X X
50 PMG500 19140200 105 X X X X X X X X X X X
55 GPU20L 19140090 180 X X X X X X X
55 PMG500 19140200 180 X X X X X X X X X X X
230
(220-240)
30 GPE20L 19140230 105 X X X X
30 PMG500 19140230 105 X X X X X X X X X X X
35 GPE20L 19140230 105 X X X X
35 PMG500 19140230 105 X X X X X X X X X X X
40 GPE20L 19140230 205 X X X X X X X
40 PMG500 19140200 205 X X X X X X X X X X X
45 GPU20L 19140090 105 X X X X
45 PMG500 19140200 105 X X X X X X X X X X X
50 GPU20L 19140090 105 X X X X
50 PMG500 19140200 105 X X X X X X X X X X X
55 GPU20L 19140090 205 X X X X X X X
55 PMG500 19140200 205 X X X X X X X X X X X
332
30 GPE40L 19140240 180 X X X X
30 PMG500 19140240 180 X X X X X X X X X X X
35 GPE40L 19140240 180 X X X X
35 PMG500 19140240 180 X X X X X X X X X X X
45 GPU40L 19140170 180 X X X X
50 GPU40L 19140170 180 X X X X
400
(380-415)
30 GPE40L 19140240 180 X X X X X X X
30 PMG500 19140240 180 X X X X X X X X X X X
35 GPE40L 19140240 180 X X X X X X X
35 PMG500 19140240 180 X X X X X X X X X X X
45 GPU40L 19140170 180 X X X X X X X
45 PMG500 19140200 180 X X X X X X X X X X X
50 GPU40L 19140170 180 X X X X X X X
50 PMG500 19140200 180 X X X X X X X X X X X
460
(440-480)
30 GPE40L 19140240 205 X X X X X X X
30 PMG500 19140240 205 X X X X X X X X X X X
35 GPE40L 19140240 205 X X X X X X X
35 PMG500 19140240 205 X X X X X X X X X X X
45 GPU40L 19140170 205 X X X X X X X
45 PMG500 19140200 205 X X X X X X X X X X X
50 GPU40L 19140170 205 X X X X X X X
50 PMG500 19140200 205 X X X X X X X X X X X
DRIVESYSTEMS
(GPE, GPU & PMG)
NORD Gear Limited
U35100 - 6 of 10
30
JUMPER BRAKE COIL
230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP101A
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GPE20L
LOW
VOLTAGE
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
MOTOR
STARTER
30
JUMPER BRAKE COIL
460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP101B
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GPE20L
30
JUMPER BRAKE COIL
460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
GP101C
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GPE40L
HIGH
VOLTAGE
MOTOR
STARTER
POWERED FROM
POWERED FROM
30
JUMPER BRAKE COIL
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
GP101D
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GPE20L
GPE20L
GPE40L
GPE40L
LOW
VOLTAGE
MOTOR
STARTER
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
30
JUMPER
BRAKE COIL
400 VAC
575 VAC
230 VAC
332 VAC
105 VDC
180 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
GP101E
230/400Y
332/575Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GPE20L
GPE40L
MOTOR
STARTER
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
HIGH
VOLTAGE
35
BRAKE COIL
230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
GP102A
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GPE20L
MOTOR
STARTER
LOW
VOLTAGE
35
BRAKE COIL
460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
GP102B
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GPE20L
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
35
BRAKE COIL
460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
GP102C
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GPE40L
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
35
BRAKE COIL
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
GP102D
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GPE20L
GPE20L
GPE40L
GPE40L
MOTOR
STARTER
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
LOW
VOLTAGE
35
BRAKE COIL
400 VAC
575 VAC
230 VAC
332 VAC
105 VDC
180 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
GP102E
230/400Y
332/575Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GPE20L
GPE40L
MOTOR
STARTER
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
HIGH
VOLTAGE
40
BRAKE COIL
230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
(DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING)
GP103A
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GPE20L
MOTOR
STARTER
LOW
VOLTAGE
40
BRAKE COIL
460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
GP103B
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
GPE20L
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
___
= Br ak i ng Met hod
*

The normally open contact/s (NO) is not supplied by NORD. It must close at the same time power is supplied to the
brake. The contact must be capable of switching inductive loads and/or be rated IEC AC3.
DRIVESYSTEMS
(GPE, GPU & PMG)
NORD Gear Limited
U35100 - 7 of 10
40
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
GP103C
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
LOW
VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
208 VAC
230 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
GPE20L
GPE20L
40
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
GP103D
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
400 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230/400Y GPE20L
HIGH
VOLTAGE
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP104A
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GPU20L
LOW
VOLTAGE

JUMPER
V
B-AC
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP104B
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
JUMPER
V
B-AC
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP104C
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
JUMPER
V
B-AC
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP104D
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
JUMPER
V
B-AC
LOW
VOLTAGE
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
GPU20L
GPU20L
GPU40L
GPU40L
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP104E
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER

JUMPER
V
B-AC
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
400 VAC
575 VAC
230 VAC
332 VAC
105 VDC
180 VDC
230/400Y
332/575Y
GPU20L
GPU40L
HIGH
VOLTAGE
50
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP105A
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
LOW
VOLTAGE
50
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP105B
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
HIGH
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
50
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP105C
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
HIGH
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
50
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP105D
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
LOW
VOLTAGE
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
GPU20L
GPU20L
GPU40L
GPU40L
50
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP105E
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
400 VAC
575 VAC
230 VAC
332 VAC
105 VDC
180 VDC
230/400Y
332/575Y
GPU20L
GPU40L
HIGH
VOLTAGE
V
B-AC
___
*

DRIVESYSTEMS
(GPE, GPU & PMG)
NORD Gear Limited
U35100 - 8 of 10
55
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP106A
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
V
B-AC
LOW
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
55
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP106B
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
V
B-AC
HIGH
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
55
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
GP106C
MOTOR RECTIFIER
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
208 VAC
230 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
GPU20L
GPU20L
55
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
GP106D
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
400 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230/400Y GPU20L
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
LOW
VOLTAGE
HIGH
VOLTAGE
30
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
PMG101A
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
LOW
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
30
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
PMG101B
MOTOR RECTIFIER
30
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
PMG101C
MOTOR RECTIFIER
30
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
PMG101D
MOTOR RECTIFIER
POWERED FROM
POWERED FROM
POWERED FROM
POWERED FROM
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
JUMPER JUMPER
V
B-AC
V
B-AC
+ +
HIGH
VOLTAGE
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
JUMPER
V
B-AC
+
HIGH
VOLTAGE
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
JUMPER
V
B-AC
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
LOW
VOLTAGE
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
30
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
PMG101E
MOTOR RECTIFIER
POWERED FROM
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
JUMPER
V
B-AC
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y PMG500
HIGH
VOLTAGE
35
BRAKE COIL
230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
PMG102A
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
PMG500
MOTOR
STARTER
LOW
VOLTAGE
35
460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
POWERED FROM
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
PMG500
35
BRAKE COIL
460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
PMG500
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
PMG102B PMG102C
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
V
B-AC
+ + +
___
*

DRIVESYSTEMS
(GPE, GPU & PMG)
NORD Gear Limited
U35100 - 9 of 10
35
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
PMG102D
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
LOW
VOLTAGE
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
35
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
RECTIFIER
PMG102E
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 W1 V1
400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y PMG500
V
B-DC
HIGH
VOLTAGE
40
BRAKE COIL
230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
PMG500
MOTOR
STARTER
LOW
VOLTAGE
40
BRAKE COIL
460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
230YY/460Y
MOTOR RECTIFIER
PMG500
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
PMG103A PMG103B
+ +
40
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
LOW
VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
208 VAC
230 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
PMG500
PMG500
40
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
motor
POWERED FROM
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
400 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230/400Y PMG500
HIGH
VOLTAGE
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER

JUMPER
V
B-AC
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
JUMPER
V
B-AC
V
B-AC
PMG103C PMG103D PMG104A PMG104B
+ + + +
LOW
VOLTAGE
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
JUMPER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
PMG104C
+
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
JUMPER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
PMG104D
+
LOW
VOLTAGE
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
45
BRAKE COIL
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
B-DC
V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR RECTIFIER
MOTOR
STARTER
JUMPER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
PMG104E
+
400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y PMG500
HIGH
VOLTAGE
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
PMG105A
50
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
LOW
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
___
*

DRIVESYSTEMS
NORD Gear Limited
(GPE, GPU & PMG)
U35100 - 10 of 10
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
PMG105B
50
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
PMG105C
50
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
PMG105D
50
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
+ + +
LOW
VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
400 VAC
460 VAC
105 VDC
105 VDC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
400/690Y
460/Y
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
PMG500
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
PMG105E
50
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER

V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y PMG500
HIGH
VOLTAGE
55
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
55
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
55
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
208 VAC
230 VAC
208 VAC
230 VAC
180 VDC
205 VDC
208/360Y
230/400Y
PMG500
PMG500
55
V
motor
V
B-AC
V
400 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230/400Y PMG500
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
STANDARD RELEASE
VERY FAST STOPPING
PMG106A PMG106B PMG106C PMG106D
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
V
B-AC
LOW
VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
+
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
HIGH
VOLTAGE
+
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
+
LOW
VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
BRAKE COIL V
B-DC
V
motor
MOTOR
STARTER
V
B-AC
RECTIFIER
+
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
HIGH
VOLTAGE
___
*

DRIVESYSTEMS
CURRENT SENSING BRAKE RELAY (IR)
Motor Current Sensing Brake Relay (IR)
The current sensing relay, normally called the IR option, is
used to achieve improved brake engagement or stopping
time without the use of external control equipment or ad-
ditional wiring. The relay is mounted directly onto the motor
terminal box. The relay switch leads are connected to termi-
nals 3 and 4 of the rectier. When the power to the motor is
shut off, the IR relay opens the brake circuit on the DC side;
this allows the brake to demagnetize quickly.
WARNI NG

Motor must be powered across-the-line
(not inverter powered or controlled with a soft-start)
The brake power must be provided from the motors
terminal block (not separately powered)
Motor must be a single-speed (not possible with
two-speed motors)
Ratings
Part Number 18556010 18556020
Motor Frame Sizes 63S 180M* 180L 225M
AC input current
black/white wires
25 AAC
75Aac 0.2 s
50 AAC
75AAC 0.2s
DC brake current
red and blue wires
2.0 ADC 2.0 ADC
Additional brake
setting delay
18 ms 18 ms
Ambient temperature
- 40 to 75 C
- 40 to 167 F
- 40 to 75 C
- 40 to 167 F
Enclosure with o-ring
mounted to a terminal box
IP65 IP65
* For the 180MX/4, 230/460V motor use part number 18556020
Connection Notes
Rectier IR Relay Wires
To Rectiers
Type Part Number Design Red Blue
GVE20L 19141000 Full-Wave 3 4
GHE40L 19141010 Half-Wave 4 3
GHE50L 19141020 Half Wave 4 3
GPE20L 19140230 Push-Hybrid 4 3
GPE40L 19140240 Push-Hybrid 4 3
Conduit Box Thread Adapter
Thread Motor Frame Part number
M20 63-71 18542006*
M25 80-90 18522253
M32 100-132 18522320
M40 160-180 18522400 + 18522253
* Spacer
U35200 - 1 of 3
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
U35200 - 2 of 3
NORD Gear Limited
Connection Diagrams

___
15 15 15
15 15
15 15 15 15
DRIVESYSTEMS
U35200 - 3 of 3
NORD Gear Limited
Connection Diagrams
GPE Rectier with IR Relay used for External DC-Switching
Method Operation
Start - Fast release (Overexcitation)
Stop - Fast stop (DC-Switching)
GPE type - External DC-Switching
Terminal 3 & 4 - Contact or IR-relay
Method Operation
Start - Standard Release
Stop - Very Fast stop (Reduced power Hold)
GPE type - External DC-Switching
Terminal 3 & 4 - Contact or IR-relay

35
___ = Br ak i ng Met hod
40
___ = Br ak i ng Met hod
Additional Reference - U________ GP Brake Rectier Installation and Maintenence
DRIVESYSTEMS
NEMA/IEC INPUT ADAPTERS
& THEIR COUPLINGS
NEMA/ IEC Motor Adapters
Motor adapters allow for easy installation and removal of in-
dustry standard motors. Motor adapters consist of a coupling
and an adapter housing that connects the motor to the gear
reducer.
NORD Gear supplies a coupling that is to be mounted on the
motor shaft. It is important that the coupling is properly po-
sitioned.
For NEMA Input Adapters, follow the Motor Installation
Instructions on pages 3-4.
For IEC Input Adapters, the supplied coupling will mount
directly against the motor shaft shoulder. No locating
measurements need to be taken.
NOTE

Some of the larger IEC inputs will have a coupling spacer
included to help locate the coupling. Slide the spacer
against the motor shaft shoulder, slide the coupling
against the spacer and tighten set screw(s).
NOTE

For the larger motor adapters (IEC160 / N250TC and larg-
er), an Automatic Lubricator is supplied. This will need to
be activated at the time of startup. For operation and
activation instructions, refer to user manual U45200.
NEMA/IEC Motor Weight Limits
When mounting a motor to a NORD NEMA C-face motor
adapter it is important to consider the motors weight. Fol-
lowing is a table that includes the maximum motor weight
the NEMA adapter can support. If the motor exceeds the
listed weight is must be externally supported. When a C-face
mounted motor is externally supported care must be taken
to ensure that the support system does not impose additional
pre-loads on the NEMA motor adapter.
NEMA Motor Weight Limit
Motor FRAME 56C 143TC 145TC 182TC 184TC 210TC
Max Weight [lb] 66 88 110 130 175 220
Motor FRAME 250TC 280TC 324TC 326TC 365TC
Max Weight [lb] 440 550 770 1100 1540
IEC Motor Weight Limit
Motor FRAME 63 71 80 90 100 112
Max Weight [lb] 55 66 88 110 130 175
Motor FRAME 132 160 180 200 225 250
Max Weight [lb] 220 440 550 770 1100 1540
Couplings
Couplings are made with tough abrasion resistant materials,
which resist most chemicals and petroleum products. They
are electrically isolated (prevent metal to metal contact) and
require no lubrication or maintenance. Depending upon the
size of the C-face input, NORD provides either a gear or a jaw
type coupling.
NORD supplies three different types of couplings depending
on the size of input: J style, M style and Jaw style cou-
pling. Following are instructions on how to properly mount
each type of coupling onto the motor.
U45100 - 1 of 6
NORD Gear Limited
WARNI NG

LOCK OUT POWER before any maintenance is performed. Make absolutely sure that no voltage is applied while work is
being done on the gearbox or input.
& THEIR COUPLINGS
U45100 - 2 of 6
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
Couplings for the NEMA and IEC Adapters
Depending on the size of the input adapter to the gearbox,
NORD Gear supplies two styles of couplings - BoWex
(gear
tooth) and Rotex
(jaw) couplings.
BoWex
Couplings
NORD C-face adapter input shafts have a machined spline on
the end. NORD incorporates two styles of BoWex
couplings,
the J and M styles. The J style is a one-piece coupling
with a metal hub and nylon spline. The M style is a two-
piece coupling the metal hub and a nylon sleeve. Nylon
and steel components allow them to operate in high ambient
temperatures without lubrication or maintenance.
Nylon sleeves resist dirt, moisture, most chemicals and
petroleum products
No lubrication required
Operating Conditions:
-22F - 212F (-30C - 100C)
Higher temperature coupling sleeve
available up to 250F (120C)
Special bore available
BoWex
Couplings Mechanical Ratings J Style

Coupling
Type
Available
Bore Sizes
Cont. / Peak
Torque
Input
J14
11 mm,14 mm
5/8 in
10/20 Nm
89/117 lb-in
IEC 63, 71
NEMA 56C
J24
19 mm, 24 mm
5/8 in, 7/8 in
20/40 Nm
117/354 lb-in
IEC 80, 90
NEMA 56C, 140TC
J28
28 mm
1-1/8 in
45-90 Nm
399/797 lb-in
IEC 100-112
NEMA 180TC
BoWex
Couplings Mechanical Ratings M Style

Coupling
Type
Available
Bore Sizes
Cont. / Peak
Torque
Input
M14,
M24, M28
Same as
J Style
Same as
J Style
Same as
J Style
M38
38 mm
1-1/8 in, 1-3/8 in
80/160 Nm
708/1,416 lb-in
IEC 132
NEMA 180TC, 210TC
M42
42 mm
1-5/8 in
100/200 Nm
885/1,770 lb-in
IEC 160
NEMA 250TC
M48
48 mm
1-7/8 in
140/280 Nm
1,240/2,478 lb-in
IEC 180
NEMA 280TC
Rotex
Couplings
The cast iron jaw type couplings have an integral urethane
spider that provides smooth transmission of the motor
torque. A set screw on the coupling prohibits axial move-
ment along the motor shaft.
Excellent shock and vibration dampening
Excellent resistance to oils and most chemicals
No metal-to-metal contact
Operating Conditions: -22F - 195F (-30C - 90C)
Higher temperature material (Hytrel) spider available
up to 230F (110C)
Low temperature materials available upon request
Special bores available
BoWex
Couplings Mechanical Ratings J Style

Coupling
Type
Available
Bore Sizes
Cont. / Peak
Torque
Input Spider
R19
14 mm
19 mm
17/34 NM
150/300 lb-in
SEK/SEP 100
Urethane
98 Shore A
Hardness
Color: Red
R24
19 mm
24 mm
60/120 Nm
530/1,060 lb-in
SEK/SEP 100
SEK/SEP 130
R28
32 mm
38 mm
95/190 Nm
840/1,680 lb-in
SEK/SEP 65
SEK/SEP 215
Urethane
92 Shore
A Hardness
Color:
Yellow
R38
1.89 (48 mm)
Max Bore
190/382 Nm
1,680/3,380 lb-in
-
R42
2.44 (62 mm)
Max Bore
310/620 Nm
2,740/5,480 lb-in
-
R48
42, 48 mm
1-5/8, 1 7/8 in
310/620 Nm
2,740/5,480 lb-in
IEC 160, 180
NEMA 250T
NEMA 280T
SEK/SEP 300
SEK/SEP 215
R65
60 mm
2-1/8, 2-3/8 in
625/1,250 Nm
5,530/11,060 lb-in
IEC 225
NEMA 320T
NEMA 360T
R90
65, 75, 80 mm
2-1/8, 2-3/8 in
2,400/4,800 Nm
24,240/42,480 lb-in
IEC 250, 280
IEC 315
NEMA 360TC
NEMA 400TS
NEMA 440TS
DRIVESYSTEMS
& THEIR COUPLINGS
U45100 - 3 of 6
NORD Gear Limited
J Style Coupling NEMA C-face Motor Installation
1. Measure the distance from the face of the input
adapter to the face of the splined shaft and record that
measurement as A in the equation below.
2. Measure depth of coupling engagement zone and
record the measurement as B in the equation below.
3. Add A + B and subtract 0.08 (~2mm) from the
distance. This needs to be done so that the coupling
will not be preloaded after installation!
4. Use that measurement to locate the coupling from the
face of the motor onto the shaft.
5. Once in place, tighten the set screw to lock the coupling
in place. It is recommended that the key is staked or
bonded (Loctite) in place to prohibit the key from
vibrating out.
6. Mount the motor onto the input adapter with customer
supplied bolts. Make sure that the coupling from the
adapter and the motor engage securely. Use lock
washers or Loctite to prohibit bolts from becoming
loose from vibration.
SET SCREW
TIGHTEN
DISTANCE
PLACEMENT
COUPLING
C
-
F
A
C
E

M
O
T
O
R
A
B
DISTANCE
SUBTRACT
DISTANCE
COUPLING
- 0.080" (2mm) =
DISTANCES
MEASURED
A + B
+
PLACEMENT
M Style Coupling NEMA C-face Motor Installation
1 Measure the distance from the face of the input adapter
to the face of the splined shaft & record that measurement.
2. Subtract 0.31 (~8mm) from the distance. This needs to
be done so that the coupling will not be preloaded after
installation!
4. Once in place, tighten the set screw to lock the coupling
in place. It is recommended that the key is staked or
bonded (Loctite) in place to prohibit the key from
vibrating out.
adapter and the motor engage securely. Use lock washers
or Loctite to prohibit bolts from becoming loose from
vibration.
C
-
F
A
C
E

M
O
T
O
R
COUPLING
PLACEMENT
DISTANCE
TIGHTEN
SET SCREW
SUBTRACT
DISTANCE
- 0.310" (8mm) =
DISTANCE
COUPLING
MEASURED
DISTANCE
PLACEMENT
Jaw Style Coupling NEMA C-face Installation
1. Measure the distance from the face of the input adapter
to the face of the coupling as shown and record that
measurement.
2. Subtract the X dimension from the measured distance.
This needs to be done so that the coupling will not be
preloaded after installation!
4. The metal portion of the coupling should be heated up
prior to assembly, generally 250F to 300F (120C to 150C).
WARNI NG

DO NOT HEAT THE URETHANE SPIDER.
5. Once in place, tighten the setscrew to lock coupling in
place. Let the coupling cool down before placing the
spider into the jaws. It is recommended that the key is
staked or bonded (Loctite) in place to prohibit the key
from vibrating out.
adapter and the motor engage securely. Use lock washers
or Loctite to prohibit bolts from becoming loose from
vibration.
C
-
F
A
C
E

M
O
T
O
R
COUPLING
PLACEMENT
DISTANCE
TIGHTEN
SET SCREW
URETHANE
SPIDER
SUBTRACT
DISTANCE
- X See table =
Below
DISTANCE
COUPLING
MEASURED
DISTANCE
PLACEMENT
Coupling
Size
X
(Subtract this value from measured distance)
R14 0.06 (1.5 mm)
R19 & R24 0.08 (2.0 mm)
R28 0.10 (2.5 mm)
R38 & 42 0.12 (3.0 mm)
R48 0.14 (3.5 mm)
R65 0.18 (4.5 mm)
R90 0.22 (5.5 mm)
DRIVESYSTEMS
& THEIR COUPLINGS
U45100 - 4 of 6
NORD Gear Limited
& THEIR COUPLINGS
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
NEMA/IEC Parts List for UNICASE Gearboxes
NEMA 56C - 180TC NEMA 180TC - 280TC
NEMA 250TC - 400TC
IEC 160 - IEC 315
NORD Gear Limited
89 Circlip
90 Key
91 Shaft Seal
92 Washer
93 Hexagon Screw
94 Circlip
95 Clutch Shaft Bearing
97 Space
98 Circlip
100 Circlip
101 Key
102 Key
103 Coupling
104 Coupling
105 Coupling
106 Set Screw
107 Clutch Shaft
108 Clutch Pinion Shaft
109 Seal
110 Oil-Plug
111 NEMA / IEC Adapter
112 Oil Flinger
113 Shim
140 Shim
141 Shim
142 Shim
144 Cover
145 Automatic Lubricator*
146 Adapter
147 Bearing Cover
148 Hexagon Screw
149 Washer
150 Shaft Seal
* Please see U45250 for automatic
lubricator Instructions.
13 Clutch Pinion Shaft
14 Clutch Shaft
26 Coupling
27 Coupling
28 Coupling
38 IEC Adapter
43 Coupling
62 Oil Flinger
70 Shaft Seal
101 Key
160 Snap Ring
161 Key
163 Shim
164 Snap Ring
165 Set Screw
166 Snap Ring
197 Bolt
198 Spring Washer
NEMA 56C - 180TC
IEC 63 - IEC 112
NEMA 210TC - 280TC
IEC 132-IEC 180
IEC 200
& THEIR COUPLINGS
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
NEMA/IEC Parts List for Nordbloc Gearboxes
DRIVESYSTEMS
AUTOMATIC LUBRICATOR
Automatic Lubricator
Some NORD gear units with NEMA 250TC or IEC 160 and larger
input adapters, have a PERMA Classic automatic lubricator
supplied to help dispense grease to the outboard bearing.
Helical Inline SK62, SK72, SK73, SK82, SK83, SK92, SK93,
SK102 and SK103
Parallel-Shaft
Clincher
SK6282, SK7282, SK7382 SK8282, SK8382,
SK9282, SK9382, SK10282, SK10382,
SK11282, SK11382, and SK12382
90.1 Series
Helical-Bevel
SK9072.1, SK9082.1, SK9086.1, SK9092.1,
and SK9096.1
Principle of Operation
The activation screw is secured into the top of the lubrication
canister and tightened until the ring-eyelet reaches its break-
ing point. A zinc-molybdenum gas generator drops into a cit-
ric acid liquid electrolyte, that is contained within an elastic
bladder. The gas generator starts an electrochemical reaction
which gradually pressurizes the bladder by releasing hydro-
gen gas in very small amounts. The gas creates enough pres-
sure (up to 4 bar or 58 psi) to expand the bladder and push
the piston and the lubricant forward.
Lubricant is continuously injected into the lubrication point
until the bearing cavity is full. Any back pressure from the
bearing will cause the system to neutralize. The bladder
inside the canister will continue to slowly build pressure so
that once the equipment resumes normal operation, the
lubricator will also resume its normal function. After 12
months of operation the PERMA canister must be replaced.
The lubricator contains approximately 120 cm
3
or 120 ml
(4.8 oz) of grease. For reference, a single stroke of a typi-
cal grease gun delivers approximately 1.0-1.2 cm
3
(0.030.04
oz) of grease. This means the canister contains approximately
100 strokes of grease. At the end of the lubrication period,
the discharge indicator cap or piston becomes clearly visible
through the clear nylon discharge indicator cap which is lo-
cated at the bottom of the PERMA canister; this helps indi-
cate that the lubricant has been fully discharged.
To prevent premature bearing failure, the lubrication
dispenser must be activated prior to commissioning
the gear reducer.
The lubricator must only be used once and should
never be opened or taken apart or permanent damage
will result.
Never unscrew the PERMA canister from the lubrica-
tion point after activation or during the discharge
period. This would cause a permanent pressure loss in
the lubricator and would justify replacing the lubricator.
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP STOP
WARNI NG

Avoid swallowing the gas generator, the liquid electro-
lyte, and the lubricant.
Avoid contact of, the liquid electrolyte, and the lubri-
cant with the eyes, skin or clothing.
Observe all applicable MSDS sheets.
Follow applicable local laws and regulations concerning
waste disposal.
U45250 - 1 of 2
NORD Gear Limited
PERMA Classic Options Supplied by NORD
NORD Part Number 28301000 28301010
Lubrication Option Synthetic (standard) Food Grade (optional)
PERMA Classic Temperature Range 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F) 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F)
Lubrication Volume 120 cm3 or 120 ml (4.8 oz) 120 cm3 or 120 ml (4.8 oz)
Grease Lubrication Mfg. / Type Klber / Petamo GHY 133 Klber SF10 Perma
Lubrication Temperature Range -30 to 120 C (-22 to 248 F) -40 to 120 C (-40 to 248 F)
The temperature range values shown do not apply to other components and/or lubricants within the gear reducer.
The lubricator contents will dispense for a 12 month period when the average temperature is 20 C (68 F).
DRIVESYSTEMS
AUTOMATIC LUBRICATOR
NORD Gear Limited
Temperature Inuences Discharge Rate
Discharge rate is based upon an ambient temperature of 20 C (68 F). The gray activating screw supplied by PERMA indicates
that the lubricator contents will dispense for a 12 month period when the average temperature is 20 C (68 F).
Lower ambient temperatures will lead to slower dispensing rates and higher ambient temperatures will lead to faster
dispensing rates.
Dispensing rates depend primarily on average ambient conditions and not extreme highs and lows.
Discharge can also be inuenced by type of lubricant, vibration, and the connecting parts and values shown are
approximate, based upon supplier testing completed.
Average Ambient Temperature Discharge Period Months
0 C (32 F) >18
10 C (50 F) 18
20 C (68 F) 12
30 C (86 F) 6
40 C (104 F) 3
Values are approximate.
Attention!
Screw in the activation screw until the lug breaks off
before commissioning the gear unit.
Dispensing time: 12 Months
Month
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Activation Date
Year
11 12 13 14 15
Initial Assembly Instructions
When rst receiving the gear unit with motor adapter, the
automatic lubricator is installed as shown in the gure below.
1. Loosen and remove the M8 x 16 socket head cap screws (1)
and the protective cartridge case cover (2).
2. Insert the gray colored activation screw (3) into the lubri-
cation dispenser (5) and tighten securely by hand.
3. Put a suitable tool through the ring-eyelet (4) and use it
to turn the activator screw until the eyelet breaks off. The
lubricator is now activated.
4. Ret the protective cartridge case cover (2) and tighten
the M18 x 16 socket head screws.
5. Mark the activation date indicating on the reddish-orange
adhesive label (6) by indicating the month and year.
6. Take note of the activation date and replace the canister
again in twelve months.
Replacement Assembly Instructions
1. Loosen and remove the M8 x 16 socket head cap screws (1)
and the protective cartridge case cover (2).
2. Remove the expired or old PERMA canister from the
bearing housing.
3. Remove the protective shipping plug from the thread-end
of the New PERMA canister.
4. Screw the canister into the reducer bearing housing by
hand until it is snug and secure. Do not over tighten or the
plastic threads on the canister can become damaged!
5. Put a suitable tool through the ring-eyelet (4) and use it
to turn the activator screw until the eyelet breaks off. The
lubricator is now activated.
6. Ret the protective cartridge case cover (2), tighten the
M18 x 16 socket head screws (1)
7. Take note of the activation date and replace the canister
again in twelve months.
DRIVESYSTEMS
SOLID INPUT SHAFT (W)
1. Solid Input Shaft (W)
The shaft will be inch or metric, depending on how the unit
was ordered. Measure and verify the shaft before mounting
anything on the shaft. Below are the tolerances used for the
solid shafts.
2. Solid shaft diameter tolerance
Reducer input shaft extensions have a diameter tolerance as
specied in Table 1.
Table 1: Solid Shaft Diameter Tolerance
Above

(in)
To &
Including
(in)
Tolerance
(in)
0.375 1.750 +0.0000 / -0.0005
1.750 2.750 +0.0000 / -0.0010
Above

(mm)
To &
Including
(mm)
Tolerance
(mm)
ISO 286-2
Fit Class
10 18 +0.012 / +0.001 k6
18 30 +0.015 / +0.002 k6
30 50 +0.018 / +0.002 k6
50 70 +0.030 / +0.011 m6
3. Fitting drive elements onto the reducer solid shaft
Solid input shaft extensions are provided with a drill and
tap feature as indicated in Table 2. When installing drive
elements such as coupling hubs, pulleys, sprockets, or gears,
NORD recommends using the threaded hole in the end of the
shaft, along with a suitable assembly device tted into the
threaded hole.
Typical Assembly
Device
Table 2: Solid Input Shaft End - Threaded Holes
Above

(in)
To &
Including
(in)
Tap size & Depth
(in)
0.375 0.500 10-24 x 0.43 in
0.500 0.875 1/4-20 x 0.59 in
0.875 0.938 5/16-18 x 0.71 in
0.938 1.100 3/8-16 x 0.87 in
1.100 1.300 1/2-13 x 1.10 in
1.300 1.875 5/8-11 x 1.42 in
1.875 2.750 3/4-10 x 1.73 in
Above

(mm)
To &
Including
(mm)
Tap Size & Depth
(mm)
10 13 M4 x 10 mm
13 16 M5 x 12.5 mm
16 21 M6 x 16 mm
21 24 M8 x 19 mm
24 30 M10 x 22 mm
30 38 M12 x 28 mm
38 50 M16 x 36 mm
50 70 M20 x 42 mm
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
DO NOT DRIVE or HAMMER the coupling hub, pulley,
sprocket, or gear into place. An endwise blow to the
reducer shaft can generate damaging axial forces and
cause damage to the reducer housing, bearings or internal
components.
WARNI NG

To avoid serious injury the user must provide suitable
safety guards for all rotating shafts and shaft compo-
nents such as couplings, chain drives, belt drives, etc. All
guarding must adhere to local regulations and safety
standards.
U45300 - 1 of 5
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORD Gear Limited
4. Installing interference-t hubs to the reducer shaft
Prior to installing any interference-t hubs to the reducer
shaft, consult with the manufacturer to determine proper
assembly and t. Interference-ts usually require heating the
coupling, sprocket or gear hub, per the manufacturers rec-
ommendations. Coupling hub installation typically follows
ANSI/AGMA 9002-A86. Always make sure the reducer shaft
seals are protected from the heat source. Apply uniform heat
to the drive element hub to prevent distortion. NORD does
not recommend heating the drive element hub beyond 212F
to 275F (100C to 135 C).
WARNI NG

When using heat to mount a drive element hub, do not
use open ame in a combustible atmosphere or near
ammable materials. Use suitable protection to avoid
burns or serious injury.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
center is as close to the gear housing as possible and check
tighten the belts or chains.
5. Coupling installation
The performance and life of any coupling depends upon how
well it is installed. Coupling hubs are typically mounted ush
with the shaft ends, unless specically ordered for overhung
mounting. Shaft couplings should be instaIIed according to
the coupling manufacturers recommendations for gap, an-
gular and paraIIeI aIignment. To help obtain critical shaft
alignment coupling hubs may be installed to the machine
shafts prior to nal shimming or tightening of the founda-
tion bolts. Proper coupling alignment aIIows for thermaI and
mechanicaI shaft movement during operation and ensures
that only torque (no radial load) is transmitted between the
mating shafts.
Coupling gap and angular alignment
The shaft gap must be sufcient to accommodate any antici-
pated thermal or mechanicaI axiaI movement. When setting
the coupling gap, insert a spacer or shim stock equal to the
required spacing or gap between the coupIing hub faces.
Measure the clearance using feeler gauges at 90-degree in-
tervals, to verify the angular alignment.
Parallel (or offset) alignment
Mount a dial indicator to one coupIing hub, and rotate this
hub, sweeping the outside diameter of the other hub. The
paraIIeI or offset misalignment is equal to one-half of the
total indicator reading. Another method is to rest a straight
edge squarely on the outside diameter of the hubs at 90
intervals and measure any gaps with feeler gauges. The maxi-
mum gap measurement is the paraIIeI or offset misalignment.
Check alignment
After both angular and paraIIeI alignments are within speci-
ed Iimits, tighten aII foundation boIts securely and re-check
critical aIignment. If any of the specied Iimits for aIignment
are exceeded, realign the coupIing.
6. Installing sheaves (pulleys), sprockets and gears
To avoid unnecessary bearing loads and additional shaft de-
ection, mount all power take-off devices (sprockets, pulleys,
gears, etc.) so that the applied load center is as close to the
gear housing as possible, as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2: Pully or Sprocket Mounting
Sprocket
Sprocket Hub

Align the driver sheave or sprocket with the driven sheave
or sprocket by placing a straight-edge length-wise across
the face of the sheaves or sprockets. AIignment of bushed
sheaves and sprockets should be checked only after bushings
have been tightened. Check horizontal shaft alignment by
placing one leg of a square or a level vertically against the
face of the sheave or sprocket.
Always check component alignment and tension any belts or
chains per the manufacturers recommendation. The ideal
belt or chain tension allows proper wrap of the driver and
driven wheels, while maintaining the lowest possible tension
of the belts or chain, so that no slipping occurs under load
conditions. Check belt or chain tension frequently over the
rst 24 to 48 hours of operation.
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
center is as close the gear housing as possible and check
tension the belts or chains.
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORD Gear Limited
7. Service Guidelines for W-Shaft Input with Grease Fitting
On some solid shaft input (Type W) gear units, the outer roll-
er bearing needs to be re-greased at regular service inter-
vals. This is necessary for double-stage gearboxes sizes SK62
or SK6282 and larger, and triple-stage gearboxes from size
SK73, SK7382 or SK9072.1 and larger.
To lubricate the bearing of the input shaft, approximately
0.75 to 1.0 ounces (20-25 grams) grease should be added by
the grease tting approximately after every 2,500 hours of
service or at least every 6 months. The W-shaft input is factory
assembled with the proper amount and type of grease. The
type of grease supplied depends upon the type of oil speci-
ed at time of order.
Standard Bearing Grease Options
Reducer Oil Type Grease Type/Thickener NLGI Grade Ambient Temperature Range Manufacturer Brand/Type
Mineral Standard (Li-Complex) NLGI 2 -30 to 60C (-22 to 140F) Mobil Grease XHP222
Synthetic High Temp (Polyurea) NLGI 2 -25 to 80C (-13 to 176F) Mobil Polyrex EP 2
Food-Grade Food-Grade (AL-Complex) NLGI 2 -25 to 40C (-13 to 104F) Mobil Grease FM222
STOP
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP
Grease compatibility depends upon the type of thickener or soap complex used, the base oil type suspended within the
thickener, and the type of additives used. The user should check with the lubrication supplier before making substitutions
in brand and type in order to assure compatibility and to avoid causing damage to the extended bearing.
64 Circlip
66 Key
67 Shaft Seal
68 Washer
69 Hexagon Screw
70 Circlip
71 Input Shaft Bearing
74 Ball Bearing
75 Input Shaft Bearing
76 Washer
77 Hexagon Screw
78 Key
79 Oil Flinger
80 Bearing Cover
81 Circlip
82 Shim
83 Input Shaft, Plain
84 Input Shaft, Gearcut
85 Drain Plug
86 Seal
87 Input Bearing Housing
88 Shaft Seal (Oil Flinger)
139 Shim
W-Type Input Parts List for UNICASE Gearboxes
SK 02 - SK 52
SK 03 - SK 63
SK 0182NB - SK 6382
SK 02040 - SK 42125
SK 13050 - SK 43125
SK 9012.1 - SK 9052.1
SK 9013.1 - SK 9053.1
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORD Gear Limited
SK 62 - SK 72
SK 73 - SK 93
SK 6282 - SK 7282
SK 7382 - SK 9382
SK 9062
SK 82 - SK 102
SK 103
SK 8282 - SK 9282
SK 9082 - SK 9092 SK 10282 - SK 12382
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORD Gear Limited
13 Pinion Shaft
14 InputShaft
38 IEC Adapter
57 Bearing
58 Bearing
62 Oil Flinger
70 Shaft Seal
71 Shaft Seal
160 Snap Ring
161 Key
162 Key
163 Shim
164 Snap Ring
165 Set Screw
166 Snap Ring
167 Snap Ring
168 Snap Ring
W-Type Inputs for Parts List for Nordbloc / 92 Bevel Gearboxes
SK172 - SK673
SK92072 - SK92372
SK772 - SK973
SK92672 - SK92772
DRIVESYSTEMS
MOTOR MOUNT PLATFORM (MK)
Motor Mount Platform (MK)
For proper installation of the belt drive, consult the manufac-
turer. NORD MK motor mounts are adjustable in two ways.
Slotted holes are provided at the input cylinder for the ini-
tial height adjustment. There are two ne adjustments at
the yoke to increase/decrease tension. Two spanner head
wrenches will be needed to tighten/loosen the ne adjust-
ments. The four bolts holding the motor platform to the
input cylinder must be loosened in order to use the ne
adjustments.
The motor mounting platform has tapped holes to accept the
foot pattern of the standard footed NEMA or IEC motor. All
MK mounting input shaft diameters are metric.
Align the sheaves or sprockets square and paraIIeI by plac-
ing a straight edge across their faces. Alignment of bushed
sheaves and sprockets should be checked after bushings have
been tightened. Check horizontal shaft alignment by placing
a IeveI vertically against the face of the sheave or sprocket.
Adjust beIt or chain tension per the manufacturers specied
procedure. After a period of operation, recheck alignment
and adjust as required.
the reducer is sized so that the shaft and bearings
have adequate capacity. To avoid unnecessary bearing
loads and additional shaft deection, mount all power
take-off devices (sprockets, pulleys, etc.) so that the
applied load center is as close to the gear housing as
possible and check component alignment and tension
of any belts or chains per the manufacturers recom-
mendation. Do not over tighten the belts or chains.
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP STOP
In-Line Unit Clincher Unit
Bevel Unit Worm Unit
BOLTS (4)
YOKE
(FINE ADJUSTMENT)
SLOTTED HOLES (4)
WARNI NG

NORD Gear does not furnish the safety guards for the belt
drive. It is the responsibility of the customer to install a
safety guard to conform to OSHA standards.
U45400 - 1 of 1
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
SUGAR SCOOP
Sugar Scoop
Each scoop bracket includes the coupling for the motor and
the coupling guard.
NORDs standard supplied coupling is the jaw-type
coupling with elastomeric spider element.
The reducer-side (driven) coupling hub is mounted by
NORD.
The motor-side (driver) coupling hub must be mounted
by the party responsible for supplying or mounting the
motor.
The supplied coupling guard must be mounted after cou-
pling installation.
Coupling Mounting Instructions
1. Make sure that the motor shaft is clean and free of burrs
or defects.
2. Check the motor shaft, coupling hub bores, key and key
seat dimensions to make sure they are the proper dimen-
sions.
3. Mount the coupling onto the motor by placing the cou-
pling so that the inside face is ush with the end of the
motor shaft and tightening the set screws to hold it in
place (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Place coupling flush with end of
motor shaft and tighten setscrew.
I MPORTANT NOTE
Heating the coupling hub slightly, up to 176F (80C) will
help facilitate installation onto the motor shaft.
WARNI NG

Wear appropriate safety gloves to handle the heated cou-
pling hubs to avoid serious burns or injury.
DO NOT DRIVE or HAMMER coupling hubs into place. An end-
wise blow to the reducer or motor shaft can generate damaging
axial forces and cause damage to the reducer or motor housing,
bearings, or internal components.
HARMFUL SI TUATI ON
STOP STOP
4. Let the coupling cool down before mounting the spider
into the jaws. The spider should not be under axial com-
pression when installed.
5. Place the motor onto the scoop and engage the couplings
together. The scoop has slotted holes to help accommo-
date axial alignment. Secure the motor to the scoop bracket
but do not completely tighten the fasteners.
I MPORTANT NOTE
Before tightening the motor to the scoop bracket, the
alignment of the coupling must be checked. Shimming
of the motor feet may be needed to properly align the
couplings. Careful coupling alignment extends the life of
not only the coupling but all the components of the drive
train.
6. Check the parallel alignment by placing a straight edge
or level across the two coupling hubs, and measure the
maximum offset at various points around the circumference
of the coupling, without rotating the coupling. The
maximum parallel alignment should not exceed 0.015
inches (4 mm).
7. Check the angular alignment of the coupling without
rotating the hubs. The maximum angular displacement
should not exceed 1.0.
8. After both angular and parallel alignment is within
specied limits, tighten all motor mounting hardware to
the appropriate torque specication.
9. Re-check the critical alignment and repeat steps 6 and 7 if
needed.
10. Mount the coupling guard to the scoop.
WARNI NG

It is the customer responsibility to properly guard the ro-
tating shaft and coupling connection and make sure the
system meets all local safety regulations.
I MPORTANT NOTE
After a period of operation, it is suggested that the sys-
tem be checked to make sure coupling alignment is being
maintained.
U45500 - 1 of 1
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
TOUCH-UP KIT
Items included in the touch-up kit
I. No Rinse Alodine
Touch-N-Prep pen.

II. Color matched sealer pen
WARNI NG

Always wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE),
including gloves and safety glasses with side shields.

When opening individual pens, pull safety caps straight
out from pen. Do not twist or torque the cap to avoid
damaging the applicator assembly.

Do not use ngers to prime the applicator tip. Priming
takes 15-30 seconds.

Make sure the surface is clean and dry.
I MPORTANT NOTE
I. Metal temperature must be above 50 F

II. Do not excessively use abrasive pad while removing
surface oxidation. Oxidation only needs to be
removed from areas with exposed aluminum.

III. Use enough product to wet surface but avoid pooling.

IV. Do not rinse or wipe Alodine coating before the
product is allowed to dry.

V. Allow to air dry or use a blow dryer. Do not use a heat
gun. Maximum drying temperature is 140F.

VI. Dry color will appear opaque.
Part I: Allodine
871 Touch-N-Prep
Pen Instructions
Touch-N-Prep

pens are designed for easy and safe repair of
clean, bare, or previously painted aluminum surfaces. It is a
non-rinse, dry-in-place application that can be applied using
the following steps:
1. Surface Preperation
Before applying the coating, the treated surface must
be cleaned using the following process:
If the scratch is more than 24 hours old use a moistened
abrasive pad to remove oxides from the surface of the
metal.
Wipe substrate with a damp lint-free cloth to ensure
complete removal of soils and dislodged oxides
generated from the previous step.
Allow Surface to dry before Touch-N-Prep

application.
2. Prime Applicator Tip
To activate, hold the Touch-N-Prep

pen upright and pop off
the cap. Do not twist or turn to remove the cap, since this
may result in the pen leaking. Hold the pen tip down onto a
clean surface to begin the flow of solution to the tip.
3. Application
Press the pen tip down on the surface until solution lls the
pen tip. Apply the Alodine
871
solution to the metal

surface with firm, smooth, even strokes, covering all of the
edges. Overlap each stroke and allow to dry.
Frequent short jabs to re wet the application rip are preferred
to maintain constant coating weights and avoid over-wetting
the felt tip.
4. Re-Application
Within 5 minutes of the rst coat, apply a second coat at a
90 angle to the rst coat with the same smooth, rm stroke.
NORD Gear Limited
5. Prepare the Pen for Storage
Always immediately replace the cap when not in use to avoid
evaporation and contamination.
6. Drying
Allow the Alodine

Touch-N-Prep

coating to air dry thoroughly.
Part II: Sealer Application
1. Prime Applicator Tip
To activate, hold the

pen upright and pop off the cap. Do not
twist or turn to remove the cap, since this may result in the
pen leaking. Hold the pen tip down onto a clean surface to
begin the flow of solution to the tip.
2. Application
Press the pen tip down on the surface until solution lls the
pen tip. Apply the sealer pen solution to the metal surface
with firm, smooth, even strokes, covering all of the edges.
Overlap each stroke and allow to dry.
3. Prepare the Pen for Storage
Always immediately replace the cap when not in use to avoid
evaporation and contamination.
4. Drying
Allow the sealer pen

coating to air dry thoroughly.
DRIVESYSTEMS
TOUCH-UP KIT
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORD GEAR CORPORATION
CONDITIONS OF SALE WWW.NORD.COM
NORD Gear Limited
1. CONTRACT
Any contract between Nord Gear Corporation, hereinafter designated as Seller, and the Buyer is subject to the terms and conditions
of sale hereinafter set forth. Any deviation from such terms and conditions must be specically set forth in writing and consented to
by Seller. Accordingly, the Buyer and Seller acknowledge and agree that the terms and conditions set forth below and on the face
hereof shall govern Buyers purchase of the goods described on the face hereof and shall take precedence over and represents the nal
agreement between Buyer and Seller, notwithstanding any inconsistent, contradictory or other prior or further conditions contained in
any oral or written request or purchase order issued by Buyer or any other document furnished by Buyer in connection with its purchase
of the Goods, regardless of whether such document or documents are exchanged simultaneously with this Invoice or prior or subsequent
thereto. Any additional or different terms or conditions which may appear in any communicaiton, oral or written, from Seller, its ofcers,
employees, agents or representatives, are hereby expressly rejected and shall not be effective or binding upon the Seller, unless speci-
cally hereafter agreed to in writing by Seller and no such additional or different terms or conditions in any document submitted to Seller
by Buyer shall become part of the contract between Buyer and Seller, unless such written acceptance by Seller specically recognizes
and assents to their inclusion. Any objection by Buyer to the terms and conditions hereof shall be ineffective unless Seller is advised in
writing thereof within two (2) days of the date of this Invoice.
2. CONFIRMATION
An order shall be deemed accepted only when duly conrmed by Seller, at Nord Gear Corporations home ofce in Waunakee,
Wisconsin, and upon such conrmation the order shall become a contract binding upon the parties hereto, their successors and assigns.
3. PRICES
Prices shown are list prices and may be subject to applicable discounts. Unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, prices are FOB factory
Waunakee, Wisconsin. Prices and discounts are subject to change without notice until order is accepted. Sellers prices do not include
cost of any inspection permits required.
4. LIMITED WARRANTY
Seller warrants the goods sold hereunder to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service not arising
from misuse, negligence, or accident, including but not limited to the use, installation, and transportation of the goods by the Buyer, its
agents, servants, employees, or by carriers. Such obligations under this warranty are limited to remedying any deciencies in the goods
at Waunakee, Wisconsin, or at such place or places in the United States of America as may be designated by Seller. THIS WARRANTY
SHALL PERTAIN TO ANY PART OR PARTS OF ANY GOODS TO WHICH BUYER OR ITS ASSIGNS HAS GIVEN WRITTEN NOTICE OF CLAIMED
DEFECTS TO SELLER. NORD GEAR CORP. WARRANTS ITS PRODUCTS AGAINST DEFECTS IN MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP FOR A
PERIOD OF 12 MONTHS FROM DATE OF INSTALLATION OR 18 MONTHS FROM DATE OF SHIPMENT WHICHEVER COMES FIRST ON ALL
COMPONENTS. 36 MONTHS FROM DATE OF INVOICE OR 24 MONTHS FROM DATE OF INSTALLATION WHICHEVER COMES FIRST ON
GEARS AND HOUSINGS ONLY. PARTS WHICH ARE SUBJECT TO OPERATIONAL WEAR AND TEAR, SUCH AS BELTS & TRACTION DISCS,
ARE NOT COVERED BY THE LIMITED WARRANTY. Buyer shall be required to furnish Seller with details of such defects and this warranty
shall be effective as to such goods which Sellers examination shall disclose to its satisfaction to have been defective and which at
Sellers option shall promptly thereafter be returned to Seller or its nominees. THE LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH HEREIN IS IN LIEU
OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN, SELLER HAS MADE
AND MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO THE GOODS SOLD HEREUNDER, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THEIR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ANY DESCRIPTION OR MODEL OF THE GOODS IS FOR IDENTI-
FICATION OR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY AND SHALL NOT BE DEEMED TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. SELLER
MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS AS TO THE CAPACITY OR PERFORMANCE OF THE GOODS SOLD HEREUNDER, EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN
THE INVOICES SPECIFICATIONS OR OTHER VALID AGREEMENT OR CONDITION AGREED TO BETWEEN THE PARTIES, AND ANY SUCH
REPRESENTATIONS ARE EXPRESSLY CONDITIONED UPON THE CORRECTNESS OF THE DATA AND INFORMATION FURNISHED BY THE
BUYER AND UPON THE GOODS BEING PROPERLY INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED. THE REMEDIES OF THE BUYER PROVIDED HEREUNDER
ARE EXCLUSIVE. In no event shall the Seller be liable to the Buyer or to any other person for any loss or damage, direct or indirect,
arising out of or caused by the use or operation of the goods, or for the loss of prots, business, or good will, or for any incidental, special
or consequential damages. Seller shall in no event be liable to any person or rm (including any assignee or Buyer) except Buyer
and its successors. Unless specically authorized by Seller in writing, Seller shall not become responsible for any repair work done by
Buyer or any other party on any goods sold. Any and all costs of the return to the Seller of such goods and all related costs to remove
and re-install such goods, shall be borne by Buyer. Goods sold but not manufactured by the Seller are being warranted as to defects in
material and workmanship consistent with the limited warranty policy of the original manufacturer of the goods and if there is not such
a limited warranty policy, the warranty shall be limited to the provision of the preceding paragraph of Article 4 herein. Standards for
the operating characteristics of the gearboxes and the gearmotors are in conformity with Sellers tests.
5. SHORTAGE AND NONCONFORMITY
Any claim of shortage or that the goods do not conform with the specications of the order or model must be made in writing within ten
(10) days after delivery of the goods (as to which such claim is made) to Buyer or its nominees, but in no event shall the claim be later
than within the time limit provided by the carrier or insurance company, otherwise such claim shall be deemed waived. Buyer may not
return any goods claimed to be in non-conformity without Sellers prior written authorization. Goods returned without permission will
not be accepted, including for credit, and will be returned to Buyer, F.O.B. Sellters plant. Any claim based on the receipt of damaged
Goods must be led with the carrier which delivered the goods. The samples, measurements, dimensions and weights contained in the
Sellers catalogs, sales manuals, photographs and drawings constitute only an approximate guide. The Seller reserves the right to make
any change which the Seller, in its absolute discretion, considers necessary. While the goods will be delivered principally according to
specications or standards or quantities agreed upon, insignicant deviations or insignicant changes in construction are permissible.
The same applies to partial deliveries, In the event that Buyer has a veried claim of shortage or nonconformity of the goods to the
specications of the order or the model, and if such claim has been submitted within the required time limit as set forth above, the
Seller shall, at its own expense, make up for the shortage of the goods, or replace or repair the goods, as the case may be, but in no
event shall Seller be or become liable to Buyer or to any other person or persons for any loss in damage, direct or indirect, arising out
of or caused by such incidents or for the loss of prots, business or good will. The liability of the Seller to Buyer, if any hereunder, for
breach of warranty, contract, negligence or otherwise, shall in no event exceed the amount of the purchase price of the goods sold
with respect to which any damages are claimed. Shipping dates are estimates unless parties expressly agree on time of the essence.
6. FORCE MAJEURE
The obligation of the Seller shall be modied or excused, as the case may be, for reasons of Acts of God, war, governmental law
regulations, strikes or lock-outs, re, breakdown of machinery, whether in its own business enterprise, or if for any other cause beyond
Sellers control, the goods cannot be delivered or their delivery becomes delayed in whole or in part. In the above instances time for
delivery shall be extended for the period of the delay caused, with the proviso, however, that either party may cancel in writing the
undelivered portion of the order or contract if the delay exceeds six (6) months from the delivery date originally conrmed by Seller.
In no event shall Seller become liable in the aforesaid instances to Buyer or any third party for consequential damages or business loss.
7. SHIPMENT AS UNIT
Each shipment by Seller shall be treated as a separate and distinct unit with respect, but only with respect to forwarding, terms of pay-
ment, and the making of claims by the Buyer: provided, however, that if the Buyer defaults in the payment of any obligation to Seller
or any installments thereof, under any agreement between Buyer and Seller, or if Buyer refuses to accept any goods when tendered
for delivery, the Seller may, on fteen (15) days written notice to the Buyer, without prejudice to Sellers other lawful remedies, either
defer further performance until the defaulted payments are made in full, or make future deliveries for cash in advance only, or treat the
entire contract or contracts with Buyer as breached by the Buyer and pursue its remedies for breach.
8. BUYERS REFUSAL OF DELIVERY
If Buyer refuses to accept delivery of any goods tendered for delivery, then Seller, without prejudice to Sellers other lawful remedies,
may either store or cause such goods to be stored in a warehouse, for buyers account and at Buyers cost, risk and expense, or sell
such goods (without notice) to any purchases at public or private sale, and hold the Buyer liable for any difference between (a) the
contract price of the goods, and (b) the price at which goods are resold less the costs and expense of such resale including brokerage
commissions, or restocking charges.
9. GOODS IN TRANSIT
If prior to delivery or while the goods are in transit, Buyer or Seller becomes bankrupt or insolvent, or any petition in bankruptcy or for
the reorganization or for a state court receivership is led against Buyer or Seller, as the case may be, then the other party hereto may
forthwith terminate this contract by giving written notice of such termination. Such termination shall not affect any claim for damages
available to the Buyer, provided that if Buyer is then indebted to Seller, the amount of any such damage claim shall be abated to the
extent that the indebtedness of Buyer to Seller, as actually paid in money, is abated by any order of judgement entered or any plan
adopted in any bankruptcy, reorganization, receivership, or similar proceeding. Such termination shall not prejudice the Sellers rights
to any amounts then due under the contract. If Buyer becomes bankrupt or insolvent or any petition in bankruptcy or for reorganizing
or if a state court receivership is led against Buyer, then, at its option Seller may take possession of any goods theretofore sold to
Buyer, in connection with which the full purchase price has not been paid, analogous to the terns and provisions set forth in Paragraphs
11 and 12 hereinafter.
10. DELIVERY
(a) Any indicated dates of delivery are approximate only, but NORD Gear will attempt to meet them whenever possible. (b) NORD
Gear will not be liable for any penalty clausess contained in any specications or order submitted unless agreed to in writing by an
authorized ofcer of NORD Gear Corporation. (c) Unless otherwise agreed, delivery of the goods to any carrier shall constitute delivery
to the Buyer, and thereafter the risk of loss or damage to the goods shall be upon the Buyer. (d) If the Buyer does not give delivery
instructions to the Seller at least (10) days prior to the delivery date ex factory conrmed by the Seller, the Seller may deliver the goods
to a carrier of its own choosing, at Buyers cost and risk, or, at Sellers option, may store the goods on the pier or any warehouse, at
Buyers cost and risk. Any purchase price in such event becomes due and payable within ten (10) days of such storage.
11. PAYMENT OF PURCHASE PRICE
Time of payment is of the essence under the contract. Unless otherwise provided, terms of payment are 30 days net from the date
of invoice with a 1% discount if paid within 10 days of date of invoice. Upon default in any of the terms of the contract, or failure
to comply with any of the conditions thereof, or upon seizure of the property under execution or other legal process, or if the Buyer
becomes bankrupt or insolvent, or any petition for reorganization or for a state court receivership is led against Buyer, or if the Buyer
makes any assignment for the benet of its creditors or otherwise sells, encumbers or disposes of the goods, or if for any other reason
the Seller should deem itself insecure, the full amount of the purchase price then remaining unpaid shall at once become due and
payable at the option of the Seller.
12. BUYERS DEFAULT
Upon the Buyers default, the Seller may dispose of the merchandise in any manner that it deems t and, if it desires to resell same,
may do so at private or public sale, with or without notice, and with or without the property being at the place of sale, subject, however,
to applicable laws. The Seller or its assigns shall have the right to bid at such sale and may become the purchaser of the property.
The proceeds of the sale shall rst be applied to the expenses incurred in retaking, repairing, storing and selling the goods, reasonable
attorneys fees included, and then shall be applied to the payment of the balance due under the contract. Any surplus amount shall be
paid to the Buyer. If a deciency results after the resale, the Buyer agrees to pay such forthwith, together with reasonable attorneys
fees, for the recovery of the goods incurred by the Seller. If upon the Buyers default, the Seller elects not to resell any goods which
it may repossess, then the cost of repossession, including reasonable attorneys fees, shall forthwith be due and payable from Buyer
to Seller. Buyer agrees to pay all reasonable costs and reasonable attorneys fees incurred by Seller in enforcing Sellers rights against
Buyer, including Sellers right to payment of the purchase price of the goods and Buyers payment of all other amounts owing to Seller
required under this Invoice and Conditions of Sale.
13. SECURITY INTEREST AND TITLE
In states and localities which are governed by the Uniform Commercial Code, this contract shall serve as security agreement, reserving in
Seller a security interest until full payment of purchase price. The provisions of the Uniform Commercial Code regarding security interest
shall have preference and apply if inconsistent with other terms of the conditions of sale. In states and localities where the Uniform
Commercial Code does not apply, title to the goods shall remain in the Seller or its assigns until full payment of the purchase price.
Buyer agrees to execute forthwith any and all documents in such a way and form as Seller may need for ling or recording the security
interest under the Uniform Commercial Code with the proper registers or ofces, or for ling or recording the conditional sales contract.
14. SALES AND USE TAX
Buyer agrees to bear and pay any sales or use tax in connection with the purchase herein, and to hold the Seller harmless from pay-
ment. At the option the Seller, Buyer shall give evidence of payment or of exemption certicate.
15. INSURANCE
The Buyer shall keep the goods insured against damage by re, water or other casualty as required by Seller, with a company acceptable
to Seller, with loss payable to Seller for the total purchase price until the Seller is fully paid. Seller, if it so elects, may place said insur-
ance at Buyers expense; Seller may cancel such insurance at any time and without notice and may receive the return premium, if any.
16. MODIFICATION BY SELLER
Any contract may be assigned or transferred by the Seller, or the time for the making of any payment due by Buyer may be extended
by Seller without derogation of any of the rights of the Seller or its assigns. Waiver by any party of any default shall not be deemed
a waiver of any subsequent default.
17. RETURNED GOODS
No goods will be accepted for return unless authorized in writing by Seller. In all cases, transportation and restocking charges will
be borne by Buyer.
18. PACKING
The Buyer will be charged for export packaging or other special packing desired. Cost for cartage to ship or transfer express will be
added to the invoice. No credit will be allowed if no packing is required.
19. CHANGES/CANCELLATION
NORD Gear will not accept changes in specications to a conrmed order unless such changes are requested in writing and conrmed
back in writing. In addition, the purchaser must to agree to any additional charges that may arise from the change. Placing orders on
hold or cancellation of orders require Sellers written approval, and are subject to cancellation and/or restocking charges.
20. BUYERS RESPONSIBILITY AS TO MAINTENANCE
Buyer shall use and shall require its employees and agents to use all safety devices and guards and shall maintain the same in proper
working order. Buyer shall use and require its employees and agents to use safe operation procedures in operating the equipment and
shall further obey and have its employees and agents obey safety instructions given by Seller. If Buyer fails to meet the obligations
herein, Buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and save Seller harmless from any liability or obligation with regard to any personal injuries
or property damages directly or indirectly connected with the operation of the equipment. Buyer further agrees to notify Seller promptly
and in any event not later than ten (10) days after notice or knowledge of any accident or malfunction involving Sellers equipment
which has caused personal injury or property damages and to cooperate fully with Seller in investigating and determining the causes
of such accident and malfunction. In the event that Buyer fails to give such notice to Seller or to cooperate with Seller, Buyer shall be
obligated to defend, indemnify and save Seller harmless from any such claims arising from such accident.
21. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
(a) If for any reason a provision of a contract is legally invalid, then in such event the rest of the contract shall remain in full force and
affect, except that the parties shall try to replace such invalid provision closest to their original mutual intentions. (b) This Invoice and
these Conditions of Sale constitute the entire agreement between the parties regarding the subject matter hereof and supercedes all
prior agreements, understandings and statements, whether oral or written, regarding such subject matter. No modication to, change
in or departure from, the provisions of this Invoice and Conditions of Sale shall be valid or binding on Seller, unless approved in writing
by Seller. No course of dealing or usage of trade shall be applicable unless expressly incorporated into this Invoice and Conditions of
Sale. Any amendments to any contract or contracts between the parties shall be valid only upon the written consent of both parties.
22. NON ASSIGNMENT BY BUYER
Contract or contracts may not be assigned by the Buyer without prior written consent of the Seller.
23. APPLICABLE LAW AND VENUE
All contracts and their interpretation are governed by the applicable, substantive laws of the State of Wisconsin. Any litigation brought
by the Buyer regarding this Invoice or goods purchased hereunder may only be brought in the Circuit Court for Dane County, Wisconsin.
Nord Gear Company Terms 12/4/06
NORD Gear Limited
DRIVESYSTEMS
NORD GEAR LIMITED
TERMS & CONDITIONS OF SALE WWW.NORD.COM
High Performance
AC Vector Drives
B1000
Operating & Instruction Manuals
For Gear Units
Intelligent Drivesystems
B1000 DRIVESYSTEMS
Product
Overview
We can match our NORDAC AC vector drives with our Inverter/Vector Duty Motors and
UNICASE Speed Reducers to provide a total AC Motor Drive solution from one trusted source.
HIGH PERFORMANCE
MOTORS & BRAKEMOTORS
HELICAL IN-LINE
NORDBLOC
HELICAL IN-LINE
- Gear ratios 1.88:1 to over 370:1
PARALLEL HELICAL CLINCHER
- Shaft, Flange or Foot Mount
RIGHT ANGLE
HELICAL-BEVEL 2-STAGE
- Gear ratios 4.1:1 to 72:1
RIGHT ANGLE HELICAL-BEVEL
RIGHT ANGLE HELICAL-WORM
MINICASE
RIGHT ANGLE WORM

- Gear ratios 5:1 to 500:1
UNICASE
SPEED REDUCERS
NORDAC
AC VECTOR DRIVES
INVERTER/VECTOR DUTY
- Standard or Energy Efficient
- Integral, NEMA or Metric IEC
- 1/6 to 250 hp
TRIO SK300E
- Motor or remote mounted
- IP55 washdown
- 380-460V, 3-phase, to 5hp
- 200-240V, 3-phase, to 3hp
SK500/520/530E
- Compact, high performance
- 380-480V, 3-phase, to 10hp
- 200-240V, 3-phase, to 5hp
- 200-240V, 1-phase, to 3hp
- 110-120V, 1-phase, to 1.5hp
SK700E
- Flexible high performance
- 380-460V, 3-phase, to 200hp
FLEXBLOC

WORM
- Modular bolt-on options
- Gear ratios 5:1 to 3,000:1
1
0
0
2
0
0
1
0
4
/
0
9
0
9
National Customer Service Toll-Free: 888.314.6673
[email protected]
WEST
Corona, CA (Los Angeles)
Phone: 608.849.0190
MIDWEST
Waunakee, WI (Madison)
Phone: 608.849.7300
EAST
Charlotte, NC
Phone: 608.849.0140
CANADA
Brampton, ON (Toronto)
Phone: 905.796.3606
NORD Gear Limited
Toll-Free in Canada: 800.668.4378
[email protected] www.nord.com
DRIVESYSTEMS

NORD BIM1000 General Instructions 200903

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NORD BIM1000 General Instructions 200903

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NORD BIM1000 General Instructions 200903

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What products does Nord offer?

What products does Nord offer?

What are the main features of Nord's gear units?

What are the main features of Nord's gear units?

High Performance

RIGHT ANGLE WORM

the key/s into place

is a registered trademark of Loctite Corporation

RETAIN FOR FUTURE USE

RETAIN FOR FUTURE USE U10310 - 2 of 3

RETAIN FOR FUTURE USE U10310 - 3 of 3

G-Rapid Plus Paste (product of Dow

, NORD offers the heavy-duty

WORM REDUCER LUBRICATION

: P/N 22008050 (Includes Gasket)

.1 gear units with M10x1 air vent.

Motor Sizes 63, 71 & 80:

Worm Gear Units

Worm Gear Units

gear unit assemblies. During this process the gear

worm-gear reducers are shipped from NORD

worm-gear reducers are lled with a synthetic

worm-gear reducers are shipped from NORD

worm-gear reducers are lled with a synthetic

CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.automatedpt.com Email: [email protected]

P/N 22008050 (Includes Gasket)

VL2 & VL3

Couplings Mechanical Ratings J Style

Couplings Mechanical Ratings M Style

Couplings Mechanical Ratings J Style

solution to the metal

RIGHT ANGLE WORM

You might also like